VECTOR INVERTER

FR-V560

INSTRUCTION MANUAL (Detailed)

HIGH PRECISION & HIGH RESPONSE VECTOR INVERTER

FR-V560-2.2K to 55K-NA
WIRING 1
VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER VECTOR CONTROL WITHOUT ENCODER

PARAMETERS PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATIONS

Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi vector inverter. This Instruction Manual (detailed) provides instructions for advanced use of the FR-V500 series inverters. Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, always read this Instruction Manual and the Instruction Manual (basic) [IB-0600134E] packed with the product carefully to use the equipment to its optimum performance. This instruction manual uses the International System of Units (SI). The measuring units in the yard and pound system are indicated in parentheses as reference values.

This section is specifically about safety matters

Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read through the Instruction Manual (basic) and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

WARNING CAUTION
Note that even the

Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury. Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may cause physical damage only. level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow the

instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety.

CAUTION

1. Electric Shock Prevention

WARNING
While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. You may get an electric shock. Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed. Otherwise, you may access the exposed high-voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and get an electric shock. Even If power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection. You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock. Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for more than at least 10 minutes and check for the presence of any residual voltage with a meter etc. This inverter must be grounded. Grounding must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards). Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this equipment should be fully competent to do the work. Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or be injured. Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric shock. Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. Do not change the cooling fan while power is on. It is dangerous to change the cooling fan while power is on.

2. Fire Prevention

CAUTION
Mount the inverter to incombustible material. Mounting it to or near combustible material can cause a fire. If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. A continuous flow of large current could cause a fire. When a brake resistor is used, use an alarm signal to switch power off. Otherwise, the brake resistor will overheat abnormally due to a brake transistor or other fault, resulting in a fire. Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P, N. This could cause a fire.

3.Injury Prevention

CAUTION
Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal to prevent damage etc. Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise damage etc. may occur. Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage etc. While power is on and for some time after power-off, do not touch the inverter or brake resistor as they are hot and you may get burnt.

4. Additional Instructions
Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.

1) Transportation and installation

CAUTION
When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury. Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended. Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the inverter. Do not operate if the inverter is damaged or has parts missing. When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or setting dial; it may fall off or fail. Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the inverter. Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct. Prevent screws, wire fragments, other conductive bodies, oil or other flammable substances from entering the inverter. Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions: -10C to +50C (14F to 122F) (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing) -20C to +65C* (-4F to 149F) Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt) Maximum 1000m(3280.80feet) above sea level for standard operation. Altitude, vibration After that derate by 3% for every extra 500m(1640.40feet) up to 2500m (8202.00feet) (91%). 5.9m/s 2 or less (conforming to JIS C 0040) *Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit. Environment Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Storage temperature Ambience

A-1

2) Wiring

CAUTION
Do not fit capacitive equipment such as power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter to the inverter output side. The connection orientation of the output cables (terminals U, V, W) to the motor will affect the direction of rotation of the motor.

3) Trial run

CAUTION
Check all parameters, and ensure that the machine will not be damaged by a sudden start-up.

4) Operation

WARNING
When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it will restart suddenly after an alarm stop. The [STOP] key is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been made. Prepare an emergency stop switch separately. Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure to do so may restart the motor suddenly. The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the equipment. Do not modify the equipment.

CAUTION
The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee protection of the motor from overheating. Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise nearby electronic equipment may be affected. Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power from the inverter may heat/damage the power capacitor and generator. When a 575V class motor is inverter-driven, it should be insulation-enhanced or surge voltages suppressed. Surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. When parameter clear or all clear is performed, each parameter returns to the factory setting. Re-set the required parameters before starting operation. The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its setting, fully examine the performances of the motor and machine. In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure safety. Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always perform inspection and test operation. In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure safety.

5) Emergency stop

CAUTION
Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails. When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage of the inner parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker. When any protective function is activated, take the appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.

6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement

CAUTION
Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the inverter.

7) Disposing of the inverter

CAUTION
Treat as industrial waste

8) General instructions
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this Instruction Manual show the inverter without a cover, or partially open. Never operate the inverter in this manner. Always replace the cover and follow this Instruction Manual when operating the inverter.

A-2

CONTENTS
1 WIRING
1.1

Basic configuration and connection of peripheral devices ............................. 2

Basic configuration .............................................................................................................................2 Selection of peripheral devices ..........................................................................................................3

1.1.1 1.1.2

1.2 1.3 1.4

Connection diagram ............................................................................................ 4 Internal block diagram......................................................................................... 5 Main circuit terminal specifications ................................................................... 6
Specification of main circuit terminal ..................................................................................................6 Cables and wiring length ....................................................................................................................7

1.4.1 1.4.2

1.5

Motor ..................................................................................................................... 8
Encoder cable and encoder setting....................................................................................................8 Inverter-driven 575V class motor .....................................................................................................10

1.5.1 1.5.2

1.6

Connection of stand-alone option units .......................................................... 11

Connection of the external brake resistor.........................................................................................11 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU-C) ..........................................................................................12 Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor .....................................................................12

1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3

1.7

Control circuit terminal specifications ............................................................ 13

Specification of control circuit terminal .............................................................................................13 Control circuit terminal layout ...........................................................................................................15 Wiring instructions ............................................................................................................................15 Connecting the control circuit to a power supply separately from the main circuit...........................15 Changing the control logic................................................................................................................16

1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.7.4 1.7.5

1.8 1.9

Precautions for use of the vector inverter....................................................... 18 Others ................................................................................................................. 19

Leakage currents and countermeasures..........................................................................................19 Power off and magnetic contactor (MC)...........................................................................................21 Installation of power factor improving reactor...................................................................................21 Notes on grounding ..........................................................................................................................22 Inverter-generated noises and their reduction techniques ...............................................................23 Power supply harmonics ..................................................................................................................25 Using the PU connector for computer link........................................................................................26

1.9.1 1.9.2 1.9.3 1.9.4 1.9.5 1.9.6 1.9.7

1.10 Input terminals ................................................................................................... 29

1.10.1 1.10.2 1.10.3 1.10.4 1.10.5 1.10.6 1.10.7 Run (start) and stop (STF, STR, STOP) ..........................................................................................29 External thermal relay input (OH).....................................................................................................30 Speed setting potentiometer connection (10E, 2 (1), 5)...................................................................30 Torque setting input signal and motor-generated torque (terminals 3, 5) ........................................31 Meter connection method and adjustment (DA1, DA2)....................................................................31 Common terminals (SD, 5, SE) ........................................................................................................32 Signal inputs by contact-less switches .............................................................................................32

1.11 How to use the input signals (assigned terminals DI1 to DI4, STR) (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187) ................................................................................ 33
1.11.1 Multi-speed setting (RL, RM, RH, REX signals): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "0, 1, 2, 8" Remote setting (RL, RM, RH signals): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "0, 1, 2" .........................33 Second function selection/second motor switchover (RT signal) : Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "3" ............................................................................................33 Jog operation (jog signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "5" ....................................................33 Third function selection (X9 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "9" .....................................34

1.11.2 1.11.3 1.11.4

1.11.5 1.11.6 1.11.7 1.11.8 1.11.9 1.11.10 1.11.11 1.11.12 1.11.13 1.11.14 1.11.15 1.11.16 1.11.17 1.11.18

PU operation external interlock signal (X12 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "12"...........34 PID control enable terminal: Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "14" ...............................................34 Brake sequence opening signal (BRI signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "15" ....................34 PU operation/external operation switchover: Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "16"......................34 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover terminal (X20 signal) : Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "20" ..........................................................................................34 Orientation command (X22 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "22"....................................35 Pre-excitation/servo on (LX signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "23" ...................................35 Output stop (MRS signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "24" ..................................................35 Start self-holding selection (STOP signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "25".........................35 Control mode changing (MC signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "26"..................................36 Torque restriction selection (TL signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "27" .............................36 Start time tuning (X28 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "28" ............................................36 Torque bias selection 1 (X42 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "42" Torque bias selection 2 (X43 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "43" .................................36 P control selection (P/PI control switchover) (X44 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "44" ............................................................................................37

1.12 How to use the output signals (assigned terminals DO1 to DO3, ABC) (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195) ................................................................................ 38 1.13 Design information to be checked ................................................................... 40 1.14 Using the second motor.................................................................................... 41
1.14.1 1.14.2 Wiring diagram (second motor) ........................................................................................................41 Second motor setting parameters ...................................................................................................41

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER

2.1 2.2

43

What is vector control? ..................................................................................... 44 Speed control ..................................................................................................... 46

Outline of speed control ...................................................................................................................46 Easy gain tuning function block diagram..........................................................................................46

2.2.1 2.2.2

2.3

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control .................................................... 47

Control block diagram ......................................................................................................................47 Concept of adjustment of manual input speed control gains............................................................48 Speed control gain adjustment procedure (Pr. 820, Pr. 821) ...........................................................48 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................49 Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control (Pr. 877 to Pr. 881)..............................51

2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5

2.4 2.5 2.6

Torque control.................................................................................................... 53
Outline of torque control ...................................................................................................................53

2.4.1

Fine adjustment for torque control .................................................................. 54

Control block diagram ......................................................................................................................54

2.5.1

Gain adjustment for torque control.................................................................. 55

Concept of torque control gains .......................................................................................................55 Gain adjustment procedure ..............................................................................................................55 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................56

2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3

2.7

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494) .................................. 57
Position control step .........................................................................................................................57 Control block diagram ......................................................................................................................58 Parameter.........................................................................................................................................58 Conditional position feed function by contact input (Pr. 419=0) .......................................................60 Setting the electronic gear................................................................................................................61

2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5

II

VECTOR CONTROL WITHOUT ENCODER

3.1 3.2

67

Speed control (without encoder) ...................................................................... 68

Outline of speed control ...................................................................................................................68

3.1.1

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control (without encoder) ..................... 69

Control block diagram ......................................................................................................................69 Concept of adjustment of manual input speed control gains............................................................70 Speed control gain adjustment procedure (Pr. 820, Pr. 821) ...........................................................70 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................71 Speed feed forward control (Pr. 877 to Pr. 881)...............................................................................72

3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5

3.3 3.4 3.5

Torque control (without encoder) .................................................................... 73

Outline of torque control ...................................................................................................................73

3.3.1

Fine adjustment for torque control (without encoder) ................................... 74

Control block diagram ......................................................................................................................74

3.4.1

Gain adjustment for torque control (without encoder)................................... 75

Concept of torque control gains .......................................................................................................75 Gain adjustment procedure ..............................................................................................................75 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................76

3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3

PARAMETERS
4.1 4.2 4.3

77

Parameter lists ................................................................................................... 78 At-a-glance guide to functions ......................................................................... 86 Basic functions (Pr. 0 to Pr. 9) .......................................................................... 89
Torque boost (Pr. 0) .........................................................................................................................89 Maximum and minimum speed settings (Pr. 1, Pr. 2) .....................................................................89 Base frequency, base frequency voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19)...................................................................90 Multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)......................................90 Acceleration and deceleration times (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111) .91 Motor overheat protection (Pr. 9, Pr. 452, Pr. 876 ) .........................................................................93

4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6

4.4

Standard operation functions (Pr. 10 to Pr. 16) .............................................. 95

DC injection brake operation (Pr. 10, Pr.11, Pr. 12, Pr.802, Pr. 850)..............................................95 Starting speed (Pr. 13) .....................................................................................................................97 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ...........................................................................................................98

4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3

4.5

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37) ........................................... 98

Inverter output stop (MRS) (Pr. 17) ..................................................................................................98 Torque restriction (Pr. 22, Pr. 803, Pr. 810, Pr. 812 to Pr. 817) ...................................................100 RH, RM, RL signal input compensation (Pr. 28) ............................................................................101 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration curve (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143, Pr. 380 to Pr. 383) ............102 Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)........................................................................................105 Speed jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36).........................................................................................................106 Speed display (Pr. 37, Pr. 144) ......................................................................................................106

4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5 4.5.6 4.5.7

III

CONTENTS

2.7.6 2.7.7 2.7.8 2.7.9 2.7.10 2.7.11

In-position width (Pr. 426) ................................................................................................................63 Excessive level error (Pr. 427) .........................................................................................................63 Pulse monitor selection (Pr. 430) .....................................................................................................63 Concept of position control gains .....................................................................................................63 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................64 Position control is not exercised normally ........................................................................................65

4.6

Output terminal functions (Pr. 41 to Pr. 50)................................................... 108

Up-to-speed sensitivity (Pr. 41) ......................................................................................................108 Speed detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116)............................................................................108

4.6.1 4.6.2

4.7

Display functions 1 (Pr. 52 to Pr. 56).............................................................. 110

Monitor display/DA1, DA2 terminal function selection (Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158) .........................110 Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 866) ................................................................................113

4.7.1 4.7.2

4.8 4.9

Automatic restart (Pr. 57, Pr. 58) .................................................................... 114

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165) ................114

4.8.1

Additional functions (Pr. 59) ........................................................................... 116

Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59 ) ....................................................................................116

4.9.1

4.10 Brake sequence (Pr. 60, Pr. 278 to Pr. 285) ................................................... 118
4.10.1 Brake sequence function (Pr. 60, Pr. 278 to Pr. 285).....................................................................118

4.11 Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79) ........................................... 121

4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.3 4.11.4 4.11.5 4.11.6 4.11.7 4.11.8 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ..........................................................................................121 Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450).......................................................................................................123 PWM carrier frequency selection (Pr. 72, Pr. 240).........................................................................124 Speed setting signal on/off selection (Pr. 73).................................................................................125 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) .........................................127 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77) .....................................................................................128 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78 ) ..............................................................................129 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79) .................................................................................................129

4.12 Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 96)............................................................... 132

4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3 4.12.4 4.12.5 4.12.6 Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 9, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 83, Pr. 84, Pr. 71, Pr. 96, Pr. 450, Pr. 452).............................................132 Parameters.....................................................................................................................................132 Execution of offline auto tuning ......................................................................................................133 Utilizing or changing offline auto tuning data for use......................................................................136 Setting the motor constants directly ...............................................................................................137 Direct input + offline auto tuning.....................................................................................................138

4.13 Online auto tuning (Pr. 95) .............................................................................. 139

4.13.1 Online auto tuning selection (Pr. 95, Pr. 9, Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81 ).................................................139

4.14 Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124) .............................................. 141

4.14.1 4.14.2 Computer link operation (RS-485 communication) (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)........................................141 E2PROM write selection (Pr. 342) .................................................................................................152

4.15 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134) ....................................................................... 152

4.15.1 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134) ......................................................................................................152

4.16 Current detection (Pr. 150 to Pr. 153)............................................................. 159

4.16.1 4.16.2 Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151).......................................................................159 Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)........................................................................................160

4.17 Auxiliary functions (Pr. 156, Pr. 157).............................................................. 161

4.17.1 4.17.2 Stall prevention operation selection (Pr. 156) ................................................................................161 OL signal output timer (Pr. 157) .....................................................................................................162

4.18 Display function 3 (Pr. 160)............................................................................. 163

4.18.1 Extended function display selection (Pr. 160) ................................................................................163

4.19 Initial monitor (Pr. 171) .................................................................................... 163

4.19.1 Actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 171) ...................................................................................163

4.20 Terminal assignment functions (Pr. 180 to Pr. 195) ..................................... 163
IV

4.20.1 4.20.2

Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187).......................................................163 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195).....................................................165

4.21 Auxiliary function (Pr. 244) ............................................................................. 167

4.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) .......................................................................................167

4.22 Stop selection function (Pr. 250) .................................................................... 167

4.22.1 Stop selection (Pr. 250)..................................................................................................................167

4.23 Operation selection function (Pr. 251) ........................................................... 168

4.23.1 Output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251) ........................................................................168

4.24 Additional function 2 (Pr. 252, Pr. 253) .......................................................... 169

4.24.1 Override bias, gain (Pr. 252, Pr. 253).............................................................................................169

4.25 Power failure stop functions (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266) .......................................... 169
4.25.1 Power-failure deceleration stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266).........................................................169

4.26 Droop (Pr. 286 to Pr. 288) ................................................................................ 171

4.26.1 Droop control (Pr. 286, Pr. 287, Pr. 288)........................................................................................171

4.27 Orientation (Pr. 350 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393 to Pr. 399) ........................................ 172
4.27.1 Orientation control (Pr. 350, Pr. 351, Pr. 356, Pr. 357, Pr. 360 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393, Pr. 396 to Pr. 399) .........................................................................................................................172

4.28 Control system function (Pr. 374) .................................................................. 179

4.28.1 Overspeed detection (Pr. 374) .......................................................................................................179

4.29 Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494) ................................ 180
4.29.1 Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494) .................................................................180

4.30 Remote output (Pr. 495 to Pr.497) .................................................................. 181

4.30.1 Remote output function (Pr. 495 to Pr.497)....................................................................................181

4.31 Operation selection functions 4 (Pr. 800 to Pr. 809) ..................................... 182
4.31.1 4.31.2 4.31.3 4.31.4 Control selection (Pr. 800, Pr. 451) ................................................................................................182 Torque characteristic selection (Pr. 801)........................................................................................182 Torque command right selection (Pr. 804 to Pr. 806) ....................................................................184 Speed restriction (Pr. 807 to Pr. 809).............................................................................................185

4.32 Control system functions (Pr. 818 to Pr. 837) ............................................... 187
4.32.1 4.32.2 4.32.3 4.32.4 4.32.5 4.32.6 4.32.7 4.32.8 4.32.9 4.32.10 Easy gain tuning selection (Pr. 818, Pr. 819) .................................................................................187 Speed loop proportional gain setting (Pr. 820, Pr. 830) .................................................................187 Speed control integral time setting (Pr. 821, Pr. 831) ....................................................................187 Speed setting circuit filter function (Pr. 822, Pr. 832) .....................................................................187 Speed detection filter function (Pr. 823, Pr. 833) ...........................................................................188 Current loop proportional gain setting for vector control (Pr. 824, Pr. 834)...................................188 Current control integral time setting for vector control (Pr. 825, Pr. 835) ......................................188 Torque setting filter function (Pr. 826, Pr. 836) ..............................................................................188 Torque detection filter function (Pr. 827, Pr. 837) ..........................................................................189 Model speed control gain (Pr. 828) ................................................................................................189

4.33 Torque biases (Pr. 840 to Pr. 848) .................................................................. 189

4.33.1 Torque bias function (Pr. 840 to Pr. 848) .......................................................................................189

4.34 Additional functions (Pr. 851 to Pr. 865) ........................................................ 192

4.34.1 4.34.2 4.34.3 4.34.4 4.34.5 Selection of number of encoder pulses (Pr. 851) ...........................................................................192 Selection of encoder rotation direction (Pr. 852) ............................................................................192 Excitation ratio (Pr. 854).................................................................................................................193 Notch filter (Pr. 862, Pr. 863)..........................................................................................................193 Torque detection (Pr. 864) .............................................................................................................194

CONTENTS

4.34.6

Low speed detection (Pr. 865) .......................................................................................................194

4.35 Display function (Pr. 867) ................................................................................ 195

4.35.1 DA1 output response level adjustment (Pr. 867)............................................................................195

4.36 Terminal function assignment (Pr. 868)......................................................... 195

4.36.1 No. 1 terminal function assignment (Pr. 868) .................................................................................195

4.37 Protective functions (Pr. 870 to Pr. 874) ........................................................ 196

4.37.1 4.37.2 4.37.3 Speed deviation excessive (Pr. 870, Pr. 871) ................................................................................196 Speed restriction (Pr. 873) .............................................................................................................197 Stop by OLT level prevention (Pr. 874) ..........................................................................................197

4.38 Operation selection functions 5 (Pr. 875) ...................................................... 198

4.38.1 Fault definition (Pr. 875) .................................................................................................................198

4.39 Control system function 2 (Pr. 877 to Pr. 881) .............................................. 198
4.39.1 Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control (Pr. 877 to Pr. 881)...........................198

4.40 Maintenance function (Pr. 890 to Pr. 892)...................................................... 199

4.40.1 Maintenance output function (Pr. 890 to Pr. 892)...........................................................................199

4.41 Calibration functions (Pr. 900 to Pr. 920)....................................................... 200

4.41.1 4.41.2 DA1/DA2 terminal calibration (Pr. 900, Pr. 901).............................................................................200 Biases and gains of speed setting terminals (speed setting No. 2, torque command No. 3, multi function No. 1 terminal) (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr. 917 to Pr. 920)...........................................................................................202

4.42 Additional function (Pr. 990) ........................................................................... 205

4.42.1 PU buzzer control (Pr. 990)............................................................................................................205

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.1

207

Errors (Alarms)................................................................................................. 208

Major faults.....................................................................................................................................208 Minor fault.......................................................................................................................................215 Warnings ........................................................................................................................................215 How to recover from PU stop error (PS) ........................................................................................217

5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4

5.2 5.3

Correspondences between digital and actual characters ........................... 218 Resetting the inverter ...................................................................................... 218

SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 6.2 6.3

219

Model specifications........................................................................................ 220 Common specifications .................................................................................. 221 Outline dimension drawings........................................................................... 222
Inverter outline dimension drawings...............................................................................................222 Operation panel (FR-DU04-1) outline dimension drawings............................................................224 Parameter unit (FR-PU04V) outline dimension drawings...............................................................224

6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3

APPENDIX
Appendix

225

Parameter Data Code Lists..................................................................... 226

VI

WIRING
Basic configuration and connection of peripheral devices.................................................2 Connection diagram .............................................4 Internal block diagram ..........................................5 Main circuit terminal specifications ....................6 Motor ......................................................................8 Connection of stand-alone option units..............11 Control circuit terminal specifications................13 Precautions for use of the vector inverter ..........18 Others.....................................................................19 Input terminals ......................................................29 How to use the input signals (assigned terminals DI1 to DI4, STR) (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187)...........33 How to use the output signals (assigned terminals DO1 to DO3, ABC) (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195)........ 38 Design information to be checked ......................40 Using the second motor .......................................41

This chapter describes the basic "wiring" for use of this product. Always read the instructions and other information before using the equipment. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14

<Abbreviations> DU : Operation panel (FR-DU04-1) PU : Operation panel (FR-DU04-1) and parameter unit (FR-PU04V) Inverter : Mitsubishi vector inverter FR-V500 series Pr. : Parameter number PU operation : Operation using the PU (FR-DU04-1/FR-PU04V) External operation : Operation using the control circuit signals Combined operation : Operation using both the PU (FR-DU04-1/FR-PU04V) and external operation <Trademarks> CC-Link is a registered trademark of CC-Link Partner Association. Ethernet is a registered trademark of XEROX corporation. DeviceNet is a registered trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vender Association, Inc.) Profibus is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS User Organization. Other company and product names herein are the trademarks or registerd trademarks of their respective owners.

6
1

Basic configuration and connection of peripheral devices

1.1 Basic configuration and connection of peripheral devices

1.1.1 Basic configuration
Power supply
Use within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter. (Refer to page 220.)

(NFB) or (ELB)

No-fuse breaker (NFB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB)

The breaker must be selected carefully since an in-rush current flows in the inverter at power-on. (Refer to page 3.)

Magnetic contactor
(MC)

Install the magnetic contactor to ensure safety. (For details, refer to page 21.) Do not use this magnetic contactor to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will cause the inverter life to be shorten. (Refer to page 3.)

AC reactor

Power factor improvement reactor

The reactors must be used when the power factor is to be improved or the inverter is installed near a large power supply system (1000kVA or more and wiring distance within 10m (32.81feet)). The inverter may be damaged if you do not use reactors. Make selection carefully. DC reactor, AC reactor (Caution) Remove the jumpers across terminals P-P1 to connect to the DC reactor.

Line noise filter Radio noise filter Inverter FR-V500 RS T

Noise filter
Install a noise filter to reduce the magnetic noise generated from the inverter. Line noise filter Effective in the range from about 1MHz to 10MHz. When more wires are passed through, a more effective result can be obtained. (Note that the number of wires run through is limited when fitting to the output side.) Radio noise filter Effective in reducing the noises in the AM radio frequency band. Dedicated filter for the input side.

Inverter
The life of the inverter is influenced by ambient temperature. The ambient temperature should be as low as possible within the permissible range. This must be noted especially when the inverter is installed in an enclosure. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).) Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the inverter. The control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main circuit to protect them from noise. (Refer to page 4.)

Power factor improvement reactor Brake resistor Brake resistor (FR-ABR)

P P1 P PR P

Brake resistor (Caution) For the 7.5K or less inverter, remove the jumpers across terminals PR-PX to connect
to the inverter.

Brake unit (FR-BU-C)

Brake unit (Caution) For the 7.5K or less inverter, remove the jumpers across terminals PR-PX to connect
to the inverter. .

Line noise filter Encoder cable

Motor with encoder

Perform offline auto tuning when exercising vector control with encoder. (Refer to page 132.) Devices connected to the output
Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output side of the inverter. When installing a no fuse breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact each manufacturer for selection of the no fuse breaker.
Ground Earth(Ground)

Ground
To prevent an electric shock, always ground the motor and inverter. For reduction of induction noise from the power line of the inverter, it is recommended to wire the ground cable by returning it to the ground terminal of the inverter. (For details of noise reduction techniques, refer to page 19.)

CAUTION
Do not fit capacitive equipment such as power factor correction capacitor, radio noise filter or surge suppressor to the output side of the inverter. This will cause the inverter to trip or power factor correction capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected, immediately remove them. (If the radio noise filter is connected, switching power off during motor operation may result in "E.UVT". In this case, connect the radio noise filter on the primary side of the magnetic contactor.) Electromagnetic wave interference The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes harmonic components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, install the radio noise filter (for use on the input side only) or line noise filter to minimize interference. For details of peripheral devices, refer to manuals of each peripheral devices.

Basic configuration and connection of peripheral devices 1.1.2 Selection of peripheral devices

Check the motor applicable to the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices need to be selected according to the motor capacity. Refer to the list below and prepare appropriate peripheral devices.
No-fuse Breaker (NFB) or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB) * With power factor Standard improving reactor
15A 20A 30A 60A 90A 150A 200A 10A 15A 30A 50A 75A 125A 175A

Motor Output (kW (HP))

2.2 (3) 3.7 (5) 7.5 (10) 15 (20) 22 (30) 37 (50) 55 (75)

Applicable Inverter Type

FR-V560-2.2K-NA FR-V560-3.7K-NA FR-V560-7.5K-NA FR-V560-15K-NA FR-V560-22K-NA FR-V560-37K-NA FR-V560-55K-NA

Fuse

Magnetic Contactor (AC3)

7A 10A 21A 42A 59A 94A 137A

K5-15A K5-20A K5-40A K5-80A K5-110A K5-200A K5-300A

* Select the NFB type according to the power supply capacity. Install the NFB according to the inverter capacity. When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage of the inner parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker. For installation in the United States and Canada, select circuit breakers authorized by UL and cUL.

1 WIRING
3

Connection diagram

1.2 Connection diagram

Motor
U V W
Grounding Match phase sequence.

Avoid frequent ON-OFF. Repeated inrush currents at power-on will shorten the converter life. (Switching life is 100,000) 3-phase AC power supply

NFB MC R S T R1 S1

Vector inverter (FR-V500)

IM

OH SD PA

Leave the unused terminals open A-phase signal output A-phase inverted signal output B-phase signal output B-phase inverted signal output Z-phase signal output Z-phase inverted signal output Power supply terminal Power supply ground terminal
Encoder

Take care not to short terminals PC-SD.

External transistor common 24VDC power supply Contact input common (source) Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start Reset

PC STF STR RES DI1(RL) DI2(RM) DI3(RH) DI4(RT) SD Contact

input common

PAR PB PBR PZ PZR PG SD

Terminals DI1 to DI4 and STR vary in function with the input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187) settings.

Digital input signal 4

Control input signals (no voltage input allowed) Refer to page 16 for details.

SINK
You can select between sink and source.

Jumper (When using the Jumper power factor (When using the improving DC FR-BEL, remove reactor, remove this jumper.) jumper.) this

SOURCE R

P1 P PX

Speed setting potentiometer 1/2W 1k 2W 1k is recommended for use when speed setting is changed frequently.

10E(+10V) 3 2 1 +10V 2 (0 to +10V) 5

PR N
DO1(RUN) DO2(SU) DO3(IPF)

Across terminals P FR-BEL power factor Across terminals P Power factor and PR, connect only improving DC reactor and PR, connect only the brake resistor. (option) the optional, In addition, never brake short these terminals. FR-ABR high-duty recommended High-duty resistor. addition, TerminalIn PR is brake resistor never short provided forthese the 15K (option) R terminals. or less. Jumper Jumper (Remove (Remove this jumper Terminal PR is when when using using the FR-ABR.) high-duty brake resistor.) provided for the 15K Terminal PX is provided for or less. the 7.5K 5.5K or less.

Analog command input Speed Terminal Control Main 10E, 2, 5 speed command 3 Torque restriction command Torque Control Speed restriction command Torque command

1( + 10V) 3( + 10V)

Analog input common

Any of three different signals can be selected using the parameter. (Open collector output)

SE A B C 5V 12V 24V DA1 EXT DA2 Differential

Complimentary

Open collector output common Alarm output (Contact output)

Terminals DO1 to DO3 and ABC vary in function with the output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195) settings.

External power supply Prepare a +10V external power supply for terminals 1, 3.

-10V

Change the jumper connector and parameter settings according to the encoder specifications. Refer to page 9 for details.

load impedance of 10k or more +10V 12 bits 1ch (+) Analog signal output 0 to 10V 12 bits 1ch (-)
(+)

PU connector

Main circuit terminal (Analog output common) Control circuit terminal

CAUTION To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm (3.94 inches) from the power cables. During wiring, do not leave wire off-cuts in the inverter. Wire off-cuts will cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in a control box etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.

Internal block diagram

1.3 Internal block diagram

Avoid frequent ON-OFF. Repeated inrush current at power-on will shorten the converter life. (switching life is about 100,000 times) NFB MC R S T Jumper R1 S1
Control power supply

FR-V500
P1

Jumper: Remove this jumper when connecting power factor improving DC reactor. the FR-BEL. Jumper: Remove this jumper when connecting Motor the externalthe brake resistor. connecting FR-ABR. 7.5 or less only) (5.5K PR P N PX U U V V * * IM R W W TR CHARGE

ASIC Change the jumper connector and parameter according to the encoder specifications. Protective circuit
5.5V12V 24V EXT CMP LDV

PG RS485 DU04-1
TB

PA
TA

PAR PB PBR PZ PZR SD Encoder

10E Output speed setting potentiometer Analog common 0 to 10VDC 0 to 10VDC 2 5 3 1

10V CPU
TZ

OH ASIC DA1 DA2 Analog signal output

1
A

External transistor PC common SD Forward rotation Reverse rotation Reset Multi-function input 4 Four different signals can be selected using the parameters. STF STR RES DI1 DI2

SINK SOURCE

RA

B C

Alarm output

Three different DO1 signals can be DO2 selected using the parameters. DO3 (Open collector output) SE
OPTION #1 OPTION #2 OPTION #3

DI3 DI4

CAUTION
1. 2. The 22K or more is not equipped with the built-in brake resistor and brake transistor marked *. The brake transistor is provided for the 15K or less and the built-in brake resistor for the 7.5K or less. Always ground the inverter and motor.

WIRING

Main circuit terminal specifications

1.4 Main circuit terminal specifications

1.4.1
R, S, T U, V, W

Specification of main circuit terminal

Terminal Name
AC power input Inverter output

Terminal Symbol

Description
Connect to the commercial power supply. Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor. Connected to the AC power supply terminals R and S. To retain the alarm display and alarm output, remove the jumpers from terminals R-R1 and S-S1 and apply external power to these terminals. Do not turn off the power supply for control circuit (R1, S1) with the main circuit power (R, S, T) on. Doing so may damage the inverter. The circuit should be configured so that the main circuit power (R, S, T) is also turned off when the power supply for control circuit (R1, S1) is off. 15K or less: 60VA, 22K to 55K: 80VA Disconnect the jumper from terminals PR-PX (7.5K or less) and connect the brake resistor across terminals P-PR. For the 15K or less, connecting the resistor further provides regenerative braking power. Connect the optional FR-BU-C brake unit. Disconnect the jumper from terminals P-P1 and connect the power factor improving reactor. When the jumper is connected across terminals PX-PR (factory setting), the built-in brake circuit is valid. (Provided for the 7.5K or less.) For grounding the inverter chassis. Must be grounded.

R1, S1

Power supply for control circuit

P, PR

Brake resistor connection Brake unit connection Power factor improving DC reactor connection Built-in brake circuit connection Ground

P, N P, P1 PR, PX

CAUTION The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring. When connecting the external brake resistor, remove jumpers across terminals PR-PX (7.5K or less). Refer to page 105. When connecting the brake unit (FR-BU-C), remove jumpers across terminals PR-PX (7.5K or less). Refer to page 12.

Main circuit terminal specifications 1.4.2 Cables and wiring length

Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% max. If the wiring distance between the inverter and motor is long, the motor torque will decrease due to the voltage drop of the main circuit cable especially at high-frequency output. The encoder signal will also be affected by the voltage drop. The following selection example assumes the wiring length of 20m (65.62 feet).
Tightening Torque Nm
1 1 4 4 7 7

Applicable Inverter Type

FR-V560-2.2K, 3.7K-NA FR-V560-7.5K-NA FR-V560-15K-NA FR-V560-22K-NA FR-V560-37K-NA FR-V560-55K-NA

Terminal Screw Size

M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M8

Crimping Terminals
2-4 5.5-4 5.5-6 14-6 22-8 38-8 2-4 2-4 5.5-6 14-6 22-8 38-8 2 3.5 5.5 14 22 38

HIV Cables mm2

2 2 5.5 14 22 38 14 12 10 6 4 2

AWG
14 14 10 6 4 2

R, S, T U, V, W R, S, T U, V, W R, S, T U, V, W

The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following expression:

Line voltage drop [V] =

3 cable resistance[m

/m] wiring distance[m] current[A] 1000

Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque reduction) in the low speed range. CAUTION Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque. A screw that has been tighten too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction. A screw that has been tighten too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage. The crimping terminals recommended for use to wire the power supply and motor are those provided with insulation sleeves.

1 WIRING
7

Motor

1.5 Motor
POINT

Perform offline auto tuning (rotation mode) with the motor alone before connecting a load. If higher torque accuracy is required, perform online auto tuning next.
Offline auto tuning The inverter measures necessary motor circuit constant and stores it to improve low speed torque. (Refer to page 132) Online auto tuning High torque accuracy corresponding to the motor temperature variation is available. (Refer to page 139) This inverter is factory-set to connect the encoder for 5V and differential line driver connector. Please check encoder specifications before operating the inverter.

(1) List for setting the motor with encoder

Item
Motor setting Offline tuning Capacity setting Number of encoder pulses Encoder rotation direction Encoder power supply specification Encoder output type Electronic thermal relay function Thermal protector input

Parameter, Jumper Connector, Terminal

Pr. 71 "applied motor" Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status" Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" Pr. 852 "encoder rotation direction" Encoder power supply jumper connector on the back of the control terminal Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay" Across OH-SD Pr. 876 "thermal relay protector input"

Refer to
123 132 132 10 10 9 93 93

(2) List for setting the motor without encoder

Item
Motor setting Offline tuning Online auto tuning Capacity setting Electronic thermal relay function Thermal protector input

Parameter, Jumper Connector, Terminal

Pr. 71 "applied motor" Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status" Pr.95 "online auto tuning selection" Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay" Across OH-SD Pr. 876 "thermal relay protector input"

Refer to
123 132 139 132 93 93

1.5.1

Encoder cable and encoder setting

Item
Resolution

(1) Encoder specification check items

Specification
1000 to 4096 Pulse/Rev

Setting
Setting by Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" Switching the position of the jumper connector on the back surface of the control circuit terminal block

Refer to
10 9 14 9

Power supply voltage 5V, 12V, 24VDC Output signal form Output circuit A, B phases (90 phase) Z phase (1 Pulse/Rev)

Switching the position of the jumper connector Differential line driver, Complimentary on the back surface of the control circuit terminal block

(2) Wiring example

1) Differential line driver
FR-V500 PA PAR PB PBR PZ PZR Encoder A-phase signal output A-phase inverted signal output B-phase signal output B-phase inverted signal output Z-phase signal output Z-phase inverted signal output

2) Complimentary
FR-V500 PA PAR PB PBR PZ PZR Encoder A B C D F G

PG SD

Power suppoly terminal Power supply earth ground terminal (ground) terminal

PG SD

S R

2mm2 Inverterearth ground terminal Inverter (ground) terminal

2mm2 ground terminal Inverter earth (ground) terminal

Motor
(3) Encoder cable gauge (Cable fabrication specification)
Wiring Distance
0 to 10m (0 to 32.81feet) 10 to 20m (32.81 to 65.62feet) 20 to 100m (65.62 to 328.08feet)

Wiring 0.2mm2 Cables

2 parallels or more 4 parallels or more 6 parallels or more

Using larger gauge cable mm2

0.4mm
2

AWG
26 or more 21 or more 16 or more

0.75mm2 1.25mm
2

(4) Cable stresses

(1) The way of clamping the cable must be fully considered so that flexing stress and cable's own weight stress are not applied to the cable connection. (2) In any application where the motor moves, do not subject the cable to excessive stress. (3) Avoid any probability that the cable sheath might be cut by sharp chips, rubbed by a machine corner or trampled over by workers or vehicles. (4) When mounting the encoder on a machine where the motor will move, the flexing radius should be as large as possible. CAUTION Please contact the cable manufacturer for the number of cable flexes and cable stress due to the flexing radius.

(5) Setting the power supply specification of the encoder and pulse output type
CAUTION Make setting correctly. Fitting the jumper connector to the position exceeding the power specification results in an encoder failure. Fitting the jumper connector to the position below the power specification results in an encoder malfunction. Switch the position of the jumper connector on the back surface of the control circuit terminal block according to the encoder specification. (Refer to page 16 for removal and installation of the control circuit terminal block.) CAUTION Jumper connector for the encoder power supply The jumper connector is fitted to 5V when shipped from the factory. Switch its position according to power supply specification.

1 WIRING

Power supply voltage is 5.5V Power supply voltage is 12V Power supply voltage is 24V Power supply voltage is external

Jumper connector encoder output circuit

The jumper connector is fitted to differential line driver (LDV) when shipped from the factory. Switch its position according to output circuit.

Differential line driver (LDV) Terminating resistance

Complimentary (CMP) Terminating resistance

Motor
(6) Setting the number of encoder pulses and encoder rotation direction
Set the following parameters according to the encoder specification.
Parameter
851 852

Name
Number of encoder pulses Encoder rotation direction

Factory Setting
1024 1

Setting Range
0 to 4096 0, 1

Remarks
These are extended mode parameters. Set "1" in Pr. 160 "extended function selection"

The rotation direction of the encoder is displayed on the operation status indication (FWD, REV) of the operation panel.
Pr. 852 Setting Rotation direction of the encoder
CW

A Encoder Forward rotation is clockwise rotation when viewed from A.

CCW

1 (factory setting)

A Encoder

Forward rotation is counterclockwise rotation when viewed from A.

REMARKS
The number of encoder pulses should be between 1000 and 4096.

1.5.2

Inverter-driven 575V class motor

In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at the motor terminals. Especially for a 575V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation.
200

Voltage at a motor terminal (%)

150

100% 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Motor wiring length (m)

Surge voltage at a motor terminal by motor wiring length (reference) When the 575V class motor is driven by the inverter, consider the following measures:

Measures
(1) Insulation-enhanced motor Select an insulation-enhanced motor. Many motor manufacturers sell motors with insulation systems designed to withstand the stress imposed by PWM inverters. (2) AC reactor For added protection, install an AC reactor on the inverter output.

10

Connection of stand-alone option units

1.6 Connection of stand-alone option units

The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required. Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.

1.6.1

Connection of the external brake resistor

The built-in brake resistor is connected across terminals P and PR. Fit the external brake resistor when the built-in brake resistor does not have enough thermal capability for high-duty operation. At this time, remove the jumper from across terminals PR-PX and connect the external brake resistor across terminals P-PR. The external brake resistor should be as listed in the following table. Selected the rated power of the brake resistor according to the brake duty. (The rated power indicated below assumes that the brake resistor duty is 10%)
Inverter capacity
2.2K 3.7K 7.5K 15K

Brake resistance specification (wattage at 10% ED)

350 (500W) 200 (800W) 110 (1600W) 55 (3200W)

CAUTION 1. The brake resistor connected should only be the dedicated brake resistor. 2. The jumper across terminals PR-PX (7.5K or less) must be disconnected before connecting the external brake resistor. A failure to do so may damage the inverter.

Model ..... FR-V560-2.2K, 3.7K, 7.5K-NA

1)Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper 2)Connect the brake resistor across terminals P and PR. (The jumper should remain disconnected.)
1) Removal of jumper 2) Connection of brake resistor

Terminal P

1
Terminal PR

Terminal PR

Terminal PX
Terminal PX

Jumper

Model ..... FR-V560-15K-NA

1) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P and PR.
PR R1 S1 Power supply terminal block for control circuit

P1

External brake resistor

11

WIRING

Connection of stand-alone option units 1.6.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU-C)

Connect the optional FR-BU-C brake unit as shown below to improve the braking capability during deceleration.
T (Caution 4) ON R S T U V W PR HA HB HC
THS TH2

MC Power supply

Motor IM MC

OFF

Remove jumper.

Inverter PR P PX N

PR P/+ N/-

P
TH1

Brake unit FR-BU-C

Resistor unit FR-BR-C

CAUTION 1. Connect the inverter terminals (P, N) and FR-BU-C brake unit terminals so that their terminal signals match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.) For the 7.5K or less model, the jumper across terminals PR-PX must be removed. 2. The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and resistor unit should be within 5m (16.40 feet). If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10m (32.80 feet). 3. If a transistor in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot. Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off a current in case of fault. 4. Install a voltage-reducing transformer.

1.6.3

Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor

When using the power factor improving DC reactor, connect it between terminals P1-P. In this case, the jumper connected across terminals P1-P must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not exhibit its function.
P1 P P/ {

Remove the jumper.

CAUTION 1. The wiring distance should be within 5m (16.40 feet). 2. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R, S, T).

12

Control circuit terminal specifications

1.7 Control circuit terminal specifications

1.7.1
Type

Specification of control circuit terminal

Terminal Symbol
STF

Terminal Name
Forward rotation start

Description
Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to stop. When the STF and STR signals are Turn on the STR signal to start turned on reverse rotation and turn it off to simultaneously, the stop. The terminal function varies with stop command is given. the input terminal function selection (Pr. 187) setting. Refer to page 163 for details. The terminal functions vary with the input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183) settings. Refer to page 163 for details.

Rated Specifications

STR

Reverse rotation start

Input resistance 4.7k Voltage at opening 21 to 27VDC Current at short-circuited 4 to 6mADC Control by open collector output or 0V contact signal

DI1 to DI4

Digital input terminals 1 to 4

OH Contact input

Thermal protector input

RES

Reset

SD

Contact input common (sink)

PC

24VDC power supply and external transistor common, contact input common (source)

10E 2

Speed setting power supply Speed setting (voltage)

Torque setting terminal

Multi-function setting terminal Speed setting common, Analog signal output common

Input resistance 150k Voltage at opening 21 to Temperature sensor terminal input for motor overheat 27VDC protection. Current at short-circuited OHT error occurs when terminals OH and SD are open. 140 to 180mADC Isolate by photocoupler Input resistance 4.7k Voltage at opening 21 to 27VDC Used to reset the protective circuit activated. Turn on Current at short-circuited the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it off. 4 to 6mADC Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled. Control by open collector output or 0V contact signal. Contact input common terminal. Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal). Isolated from terminals 5 and SE. When connecting a transistor output (open collector output) such as a programmable controller, connect the external power supply common for transistor output to Voltage range 18 to 26 this terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by a sneak VDC current. PC-SD can be used as a 24VDC and 0.1A Permissible load current power supply. Note that a sneak current may not be 0.1A prevented in this case. When source logic has been selected, this terminal serves as a contact input common. Used as power supply when connecting volume for 10VDC0.4V speed setting (torque setting) from outside of the Permissible load current inverter. (terminal 5 is a common terminal) 10mA By entering 0 to 10VDC, the maximum output speed is reached at 10V and I/O are proportional. Acts as a torque setting signal for torque control or as a torque restriction signal for speed control or position control. Input resistance Acts as an input terminal for the external analog-based 10k1k torque bias function. Permissible maximum 0 to 10VDC input voltage 20VDC Since this is a multi-function selection terminal, its function varies with the Pr.868 "No. 1 terminal function assignment" setting. Refer to page 195 for details. 0 to 10VDC input Common terminal for speed setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 3) or DA1 and DA2. Isolated from terminals SD and SE. Do not ground.

Input signals

1 WIRING

Speed setting

13

Control circuit terminal specifications

Type Terminal Symbol
PA

Terminal Name
A-phase signal input terminal A-phase inverted signal input terminal B-phase signal input terminal B-phase inverted signal input terminal Z-phase signal input terminal Z-phase inverted signal input terminal Encoder power supply terminal (Positive side) Contact input common (sink), Power supply ground terminal

Description

Rated Specifications
Differential line receiver input (AM26LS32 equivalent) or complimentary input Differential line receiver input (AM26LS32 equivalent) Differential line receiver input (AM26LS32 equivalent) or complimentary input Differential line receiver input (AM26LS32 equivalent) Differential line receiver input (AM26LS32 equivalent) or complimentary input Differential line receiver input (AM26LS32 equivalent) 5.5VDC 350mA 12VDC 150mA 24VDC 80mA

PAR

PB

A-, B- and Z-phase signals are input from the encoder.

Encoder signal

Input signals

PBR

PZ

PZR

PG

SD

A, B, C

Alarm output

Output signals

Open collector

DO1 to DO3 SE

Digital output terminals 1 to 3 Open collector output common

Power supply for encoder. You can switch the power supply between 5, 12 and 24VDC. Can be switched to the external power supply. (Refer to the instruction manual (basic) for the switchover method.) Common terminal for contact input or encoder power supply. Isolated from terminals 5 and SE. Do not ground. Switch-over contact output indicating that the output has been stopped by the inverter protective function. 230VAC 0.3A, 30VDC 0.3A. Alarm: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C), normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C). The terminal function varies with the output terminal function selection (Pr. 195) setting. Refer to page 165 for details. The terminal functions vary with the output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192) settings. Refer to page 165 for details. Common terminal for terminals DO1, DO2 and DO3. Isolated from terminals SD and 5. One selected from monitoring items, such as the speed, is output.* The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the corresponding monitoring item.

Power supply common

Contact output Permissible contact 230VAC 0.3A 30VDC 0.3A

Contact

Open collector output Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A

Analog

DA1, DA2

Analog signal output

5 Communication

Analog signal output common

0 to 10VDC Permissible load current 1mA Resolution 12 bit load impedance 10k or more Common terminal for DA1 and DA2. Isolated from terminals SD and SE. Do not ground.

PU connector

With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485. Conforming standard : EIA Standard RS-485 Transmission format : Multidrop link system Communication speed : Maximum. 19200bps Overall length : 500m

* Not output during inverter reset.

RS-485

14

Control circuit terminal specifications 1.7.2 Control circuit terminal layout

Terminal screw size : M3.5 Tightening torque : 1.2Nm When connecting three or more control cables to the terminal 5, connect the accessory terminal 5 dedicated L-shaped jumper to the terminal 5. In this case no cable should be connected to the screw in the part.
5

A 10E

B 2 3

DO1 DO2 DI4 SE

DI3

DI2

DI1 STR STF

DA1 DO3 1 DA2

PZ

PZR PG RES PC OH SD

PA PAR PB PBR SD

Jumper

1.7.3
1) 2) 3) 4)

Wiring instructions

5)

Terminals 5, SD and SE are common to the I/O signals and isolated from each other. Do not ground these terminals. Avoid connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5. Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit). Since the control circuit input signals are micro currents, use two or more parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact to prevent a contact fault. It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm 2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals. If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or the cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel or parameter unit contact fault. The maximum wiring length should be 30m (98.43 feet).

1.7.4

Connecting the control circuit to a power supply separately from the main circuit

If the magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter power supply is opened when the protective circuit is operated, the inverter control circuit power is lost and the alarm output signal cannot be kept on. To keep the alarm signal on terminals R1 and S1 are available. In this case, connect the power supply terminals R1 and S1 of the control circuit to the primary side of the MC.

<Connection procedure>

1
R1 S1 Power supply terminal block for control circuit Power supply terminal block for control circuit

MC

Main power supply

1) Loosen the upper screws. 2) Remove the lower screws. 3) Pull out and remove the jumper. 4) Connect the separate power supply cables for control circuit to the upper terminals (R1, S1). (Note 4)

CAUTION 1. When the main circuit power (R, S, T) is on, do not switch off the control power (terminals R1, S1). Otherwise the inverter may be damaged. 2. When using a separate power supply, the jumpers across R-R1 and S-S1 must be removed. Otherwise the inverter may be damaged. 3. For a different power supply system which takes the power of the control circuit from other than the primary side of the MC, the voltage should be equal to the main circuit voltage. 4. The power supply cables must not be connected to the lower terminals. If connected, the inverter may be damaged. 5. Entering the start signal with power supplied to only the R1 and S1 terminals will result in an error display (E.OC1).

15

WIRING

Control circuit terminal specifications 1.7.5 Changing the control logic

The input signals are factory set to sink logic (SINK). To change the control logic, the jumper connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the other position. (The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.) 1) Loosen the two mounting screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (The screws cannot be removed.) Pull down the terminal block from the back of the control circuit terminals.

2)

Fit the jumper connector from the sink logic (SINK) position on the back surface of the control circuit terminal block to the source logic (SOURCE) position to change to the source logic.

3)

Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws.

CAUTION 1. Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly. 2. While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block. 3. The sink-source logic change-over jumper connector must be fitted in only one of those positions. If it is fitted in both positions at the same time, the inverter may be damaged.

16

Control circuit terminal specifications

4) Sink logic type and source logic type The sink logic type is a logic where a signal turns on when a current flows out of the corresponding signal input terminal. Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals. The source logic type is a logic where a signal turns on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the RUN signal when sink logic is selected
Sink logic Current STF R

Sink connector

Current flow concerning the RUN signal when source logic is selected
Source logic PC

Current STF R Source connector

STR

STR

SD

Inverter RUN

DC input (sink type) <Example : AX40> 1 R R

Inverter RUN

DC input (source type) <Example : AX80> 1

R R

SE SE 24VDC 9 24VDC

When using an external power supply for transistor output Sink logic type Source logic type Using terminal PC as a common terminal prevents a Use terminal SD as a common to prevent a malfuncmalfunction caused by undesirable current. (Do not tion caused by undesirable current. connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install a power supply in parallel in the outside of the inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction due to undesirable current.)
AY40 type transistor output module 1
2

1 WIRING

Inverter
STF STR 24VDC (SD)

AY80 type transistor output module 9 1 2

Inverter PC STF STR 24VDC 24VDC (SD)

9 PC 9 10
24VDC SD Current flow

10

SD

Current flow

17

Precautions for use of the vector inverter

1.8 Precautions for use of the vector inverter

The FR-V500 series is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method may shorten the product life or damage the product. Before starting operation, always recheck the following items. (1) Use insulation-sleeved crimping terminals for the power supply and motor cables. (2) Power must not be applied to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter. Otherwise the inverter will be damaged. (3) After wiring, wire off-cuts must not be left in the inverter. Wire off-cuts can cause an alarm, fault or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in a control box or the like, use care not to allow chips etc. to enter the inverter. (4) Wire the cables of the recommended size to make a voltage drop 2% or less. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a high frequency. Refer to page 7 for the recommended wire sizes. (5) The overall wiring length should be 100m (328.08 feet) maximum. Especially for long distance wiring, the high-response current restriction function may be reduced or the equipment connected to the secondary side may malfunction or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacity of the wiring. Therefore, note the overall wiring length. (6) Electromagnetic wave interference The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes harmonic components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, install the radio noise filter (for use on the input side only) or line noise filter to minimize interference. (7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output side of the inverter. This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices is installed, immediately remove it. (When the radio noise filter is connected, switching power off during motor operation may result in E. UVT. In this case, connect the radio noise filter in the primary side of the magnetic contactor.) (8) When rewiring after operation, switch power off, wait for more than 10 minutes, and then make sure that the voltage is zero using a tester, etc. For some time after power-off, there is a dangerous voltage in the capacitor. (9) A short circuit or ground fault in the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules. Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by peripheral circuit inadequacy or an ground fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation resistance may damage the inverter modules. Fully check the to-ground insulation and inter-phase insulation of the inverter secondary side before power-on. Especially for an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc. (10) Do not use the inverter power supply side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter. Always use the start signal (turn on/off terminals STF, STR-SD) to start/stop the inverter. (Refer to page 21.) (11) Across the P and PR terminals, connect only an external regenerative brake discharge resistor. Do not connect a mechanical brake. (12) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits. Application (contact) of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected incorrectly to short terminals 10E-5. (13) Use of single-phase power supply Do not use single-phase power input. (14) Connect the encoder to the backlash-free motor shaft.

Capacity (VA) of separate power supply

The capacity is 60VA or more for 15kW (20HP) or less and 80VA for 22kW (30HP) to 55kW (75HP) when separate power is supplied from R1, S1.

18

Others

1.9 Others
1.9.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures

Leakage currents flow through static capacitances existing in the inverter I/O wiring and motor. Since their values depend on the static capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., take the following measures.

(1)

To-ground leakage currents

Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other lines through the ground cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate ground leakage breakers and ground leakage relays unnecessarily. Countermeasures When the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the carrier frequency (Pr. 72) of the inverter. Note that motor noise increases. Selection of Soft-PWM (Pr. 240) will make it unoffending. Ground leakage breakers designed for harmonics and surges can be used in the inverter's own line and other lines to perform operation with the carrier frequency high (with low noise).

(2) Line-to-line leakage currents

Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacitances between the inverter output cables may operate the external thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50m (164.04 feet) or more) for the smallcapacity model (7.5kW (10HP) or less), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated motor current increases. Line-to-line leakage current data example
Motor capsity (kW (HP))
2.2 (3)

Rated Motor Current(A)

8.1

Leakage Current (mA) Wiring length Wiring length 50m (164.04 feet) 100m (328.08 feet)
1200 1770

Motor SF-JR 4P Carrier frequency: 14.5KHz Cable :2mm24-core Cab tyre cable

NFB Power supply Inverter

Thermal relay

Motor IM

1 WIRING

Line static capacitances Line-to-Line Leakage Current Path

Measures Use the electronic thermal relay function (Pr. 9) of the inverter. Decrease the carrier frequency. Note that motor noise increases. Selection of Soft-PWM (Pr. 240) will make it unoffending. Using a temperature sensor to directly detect the motor temperature is recommended to ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents. Installation and selection of no-fuse breaker Install a no-fuse breaker (NFB) on the power receiving side to protect the wiring of the inverter primary side. Select the NFB according to the power supply side power factor (which depends on the power supply voltage, output frequency and load). Especially for a completely electromagnetic NFB, one of a slightly large capacity must be selected since its operation characteristic varies with harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker.) As a ground leakage breaker, use the Mitsubishi ground leakage breaker designed for harmonics and surges.

19

Others
(3) Selection of rated sensitivity current of ground leakage breaker
When using the ground leakage breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM carrier frequency. Breaker for harmonic and surge Leakage Current Example of Cable Leakage Current Example of Rated sensitivity current Path per 1km during Commercial 3-Phase Induction Motor during In 10 (Ig1 + lgn + Ig2 + Igm) Power Supply Operation When CV Commercial Power Supply Operation Standard breaker Cable Is Routed in Metal Conduit (200V 60Hz) (200V 60Hz) Rated sensitivity current 2.0 In 10 {Ig1 + Ign + 3 (Ig2 + Igm)} 120 Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents of cable path 100 1.0 during commercial power supply operation 80 0.7 0.5 Ign *:Leakage current of noise filter on 60 0.3 inverter input side 40 0.2 Igm:Leakage current of motor during 20 commercial power supply operation
Leakage current (mA)
0

Leakage current (mA)

2 3.5 8 14 22 38 80 150 5.5 30 60 100

0.1

1.5 3.7 7.5 15 22 37 55 2.2 5.5 11 18.5 3045

Cable size (mm2)

Motor capacity (kW)

<Example>
2mm2 NV 5m (16.40feet) 2mm2 70m (229.65feet)

Noise filter Inverter

Ig1 Ign Ig2

3 IM 200V1.5kW Igm

CAUTION Install the NV on the primary (power supply) side of the inverter. In the connection neutral point grounding system, the sensitivity current is purified against an ground fault in the inverter secondary side. Grounding must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards) When the breaker is installed on the secondary side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics if the effective value is less than the rating. In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to temperature rise. * Note the leakage current value of the noise filter installed on the inverter input side.
Breaker for Harmonic and Surge
Leakage current Ig1 (mA) Leakage current Ign (mA) Leakage current Ig2 (mA) Motor leakage current Igm (mA) Total leakage current (mA) Rated sensitivity current (mA) ( Ig 10)

Standard Breaker

5m(16.40feet) 20 = 0.10 1000m(3280feet) 0 (without noise filter) 70m(229.65feet) 20 = 1.40 1000m(3280feet) 0.16 1.66 30 4.78 100

20

Others 1.9.2 Power off and magnetic contactor (MC)

(1) Inverter primary side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter primary side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes. (Refer to page 3 for selection.) 1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the inverter protective function is activated or the drive becomes faulty (e.g. emergency stop operation) When cycle operation or heavy-duty operation is performed with an optional brake resistor connected, overheat and burnout of the electrical-discharge resistor can be prevented if a regenerative brake transistor is damaged due to insufficient heat capacity of the electrical-discharge resistor and excess regenerative brake duty. 2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure 3) To rest the inverter for an extended period of time The control power supply for inverter is always running and consumes a little power. When stopping the inverter for an extended period of time, powering off the inverter will save power slightly. 4) To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work Since the MC on the inverter primary side is used for the above purposes, they correspond to the standard duties. Therefore, when making an emergency stop during running, select a JEM1038 class AC3 MC for the inverter input side currents. REMARKS
The MC may be switched on/off to start/stop the inverter. However, since repeated inrush currents at power-on will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 100,000 times), frequent starts and stops must be avoided. Turn on/off the inverter start controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.

(2) Handling of secondary side magnetic contactor

In principle, do not provide a magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor and switch it from off to on during operation. If it is switched on during inverter operation, a large inrush current may flow, stopping the inverter due to overcurrent shut-off. When an MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply, for example, switch it on/off after the inverter and motor have stopped.

Inverter Start/Stop Circuit Example

As shown on the right, always use the start signal (turn on/off terminals STF, STR-SD) to start/stop the inverter. (Refer to page 29.)
Power supply

NFB

MC R S T R1 S1 T *1 U V W To motor

Operation ready OFF ON MC Start/Stop MC RA

Inverter A

1 WIRING
B C

MC

Operation OFF RA RA

STF(STR) SD

REMARKS
*1. Connect the power supply terminals R1 and S1 to the primary side of the MC to hold an alarm signal when the inverter`s protective circuit is activated. At this time, remove jumpers across terminals R-R1 and S-S1. (For removal of jumpers, refer to page 15)

1.9.3

Installation of power factor improving reactor

When the inverter is connected near a large-capacity power transformer (1000kVA or more and wiring length 10m (32.80 feet) max.) or when a power capacitor is to be switched over, an excessive peak current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging the converter circuit. To prevent this, always install the power factor improving reactor.
R S T X Y Z Power supply equipment capacity (kVA) NFB Power supply AC reactor Inverter R S T P U V W P1 1500
Power factor improving reactor installation range

1000

DC reactor (*)

10 Wiring length (m)

REMARKS
* When connecting the DC reactor, remove the jumper across terminals P-P1. The wiring length between the DC reactor and inverter should be 5m (16.4feet) maximum and minimized. Use the same wire size as that of the power supply wire (R, S, T).

21

Others 1.9.4 Notes on grounding

Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and motor must be grounded. Grounding must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. ) (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards) Use the dedicated ground terminal to ground the inverter. (Do not use the screw in the case, chassis, etc.) Use the largest possible gauge for the ground cable. The gauge should be equal to or larger than those indicated in the following table. The grounding point should be as near as possible to the inverter to minimize the ground cable length. (Unit: mm2)
Motor Capacity
3.7kW (5HP) or less 7.5kW (10HP) 15kW (20HP) 22kW, 37kW (30HP, 50HP) 55kW (75HP)

Ground Cable Gauge

3.5 5.5 14 22 38

Ground the motor on the inverter side using one wire of the 4-core cable. Always ground the motor and inverter. (1)Purpose of grounding Generally, an electrical apparatus has an ground terminal, which must be connected to the ground before use. An electrical circuit is usually insulated by an insulating material and encased. However, it is impossible to manufacture an insulating material that can shut off a leakage current completely, and actually, a slight current flow into the case. The purpose of grounding the case of an electrical apparatus is to prevent operator from getting an electric shock from this leakage current when touching it. To avoid the influence of external noises, this grounding is important to audio equipment, sensors, computers and other apparatuses that handle low-level signals or operate very fast. (2)Grounding methods and grounding work As described previously, grounding is roughly classified into an electrical shock prevention type and a noiseaffected malfunction prevention type. Therefore, these two types should be discriminated clearly, and the following work must be done to prevent the leakage current having the inverter's high frequency components from entering the malfunction prevention type grounding: (a) Where possible, use independent grounding for the inverter. If independent grounding (I) is impossible, use joint grounding (II) where the inverter is connected with the other equipment at an grounding point. Joint grounding as in (III) must be avoided as the inverter is connected with the other equipment by a common ground cable. Also a leakage current including many high frequency components flows in the ground cables of the inverter and inverter-driven motor. Therefore, they must use the independent grounding method and be separated from the grounding of equipment sensitive to the aforementioned noises. In a tall building, it will be a good policy to use the noise malfunction prevention type grounding with steel frames and carry out electric shock prevention type grounding in the independent grounding method. (b) This inverter must be grounded. Grounding must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards). (c) Use the thickest possible ground cable. The ground cable should be of not less than the size indicated in the above table. (d) The grounding point should be as near as possible to the inverter to minimize the ground cable length. (e) Run the ground cable as far away as possible from the I/O wiring of equipment sensitive to noises and run them in parallel in the minimum distance. (f) Use one wire in a 4-core cable with the ground terminal of the motor and ground it on the inverter side.
Other equipment

Inverter

Inverter

Other equipment

Inverter

Other equipment

(I) Independent grounding ... Best

(II) Joint grounding ... Good

(III) Joint grounding ... Not allowed

22

Others 1.9.5 Inverter-generated noises and their reduction techniques

Some noises enter the inverter to malfunction it and others are radiated by the inverter to malfunction peripheral devices. Though the inverter is designed to be insusceptible to noises, it handles low-level signals, so it requires the following basic techniques. Also, since the inverter chops outputs at high carrier frequency, that could generate noises. If these noises cause peripheral devices to malfunction, measures should be taken to suppress noises. These techniques differ slightly depending on noise propagation paths. 1) Basic techniques Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not bundle them. Use twisted pair shielded cables for the detector connection and control signal cables, and connect the sheathes of the shield cables to terminal SD. Ground the inverter, motor, etc. at one point. Techniques to reduce noises that enter and malfunction the inverter When devices that generate many noises (which use magnetic contactors, magnetic brakes, many relays, for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be malfunctioned by noises, the following measures must be taken: Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many noises to suppress noises. Fit data line filters (page 24) to signal cables. Ground the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal. Techniques to reduce noises that are radiated by the inverter to malfunction peripheral devices Inverter-generated noises are largely classified into those radiated by the cables connected to the inverter and inverter main circuits (I/O), those electromagnetically and electrostatically induced to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power supply cables.
Air-propagated noises Noises directly radiated by inverter Noises radiated by power cables Noises radiated by motor cables
Magnetic induction noises

2)

3)

Invertergenerated noise

Path 1 Path 2 Path 3

5)

Telephone
7)

7)

1 WIRING
Sensor power supply

2) 1)

Path 4, 5 Path 6 Noises propagated through power cables Noise from ground cable due to leakage current Path 7
Instrument Receiver

Static induction noises Cable-propagated noises

3) Inverter 4) 6)

1) 3) Sensor

8)

Motor IM

Path 8

By decreasing the carrier frequency, the mains terminal interface voltage* can be reduced. When motor noise does not pose a problem, set the carrier frequency to a low value using Pr. 72. (*Mains terminal interface voltage represents the magnitude of noise propagated from the inverter to the power supply side.) Using shield cables as signal cables, induction noise can be reduced greatly (to 1/10 - 1/100). Induction noise can also be reduced by separating the signal cables from the inverter output cables. (Separation of 30cm (11.8 inches) reduces noise to 1/2-1/3.) By fitting the line noise filter on the inverter output side, induction noise to the signal cables can be reduced.

23

Others
Noise Propagation Path Measures
When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to malfunction due to noises, e.g. instruments, receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains the inverter or when their signal cables are run near the inverter, the devices may be malfunctioned by air-propagated noises. The following measures must be taken: (1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. (2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables. (3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them. (4) Insert line noise filters into I/O and radio noise filters into input to suppress cable-radiated noises. (5) Use shielded cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects. When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction noises may be propagated to the signal cables to malfunction the devices and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. (2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the I/O cables of the inverter. (3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them. (4) Use shielded cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects. When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inverter in the same line, inverter-generated noises may flow back through the power supply cables to malfunction the devices and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install the radio noise filter to the power cables (input cables) of the inverter. (2) Install the line noise filter to the power cables (I/O cables) of the inverter. When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter, leakage currents may flow through the ground cable of the inverter to malfunction the device. In such a case, disconnection of the ground cable of the device may cause the device to operate properly.

1), 2), 3)

4), 5), 6)

7)

8)

Data line filters

Noise entry can be prevented by providing a data line filter for the detector cable etc.

Example of noise reduction techniques

Install line noise filter on inverter input side. Inverter power supply Install radio noise filter on inverter input side. Separate inverter and power line by more than 30cm (11.8inches) (at least 10cm (3.93inches)) from sensor circuit. Control power supply Do not ground control box directly. Do not ground control cable. Reduce carrier Control box frequency.
line noise filter
radio noise filter

Install line noise filter on inverter output side.

Inverter

line noise filter

IM Motor
Use 4-core cable as motor power cable and use one wire as ground wire. Use twisted pair shield cable. Sensor

Power supply for sensor

Do not ground shield but connect it to common cable of signal.

24

Others 1.9.6 Power supply harmonics

Power supply harmonics may be generated from the converter section of the inverter, affecting the power supply equipment, power capacitors, etc. Power supply harmonics are different in generation source, frequency and transmission path from radio frequency (RF) noise and leakage currents. Take the following measures.

The differences between harmonics and RF noises are indicated below:

Item
Frequency Environment Quantitative understanding Generated amount Immunity of affected device Examples of safeguard

Harmonics
To wire paths, power impedance Logical computation is possible Approximately proportional to load capacity Specified in standards for each device. Install a reactor.

RF Noise
Across spaces, distance, laying paths Occurs randomly, quantitative understanding is difficult. According to current fluctuation rate (larger with faster switching) Differs according to maker's device specifications. Increase the distance.

Normally 40 to 50th degrees (3kHz or less) High frequency (several 10kHz to 1GHz order)

Safeguard
The harmonic current generated from the inverter to the power supply differs according to various conditions such as the wiring impedance, whether a power factor improving reactor is used or not, and output frequency and output current on the load side. For the output frequency and output current, the adequate method is to obtain them under rated load at the maximum operating frequency.
Power factor improving DC reactor
NFB

Inverter

IM

Motor

Power factor improving AC reactor

Do not insert power factor improving capacitor.

25

WIRING

CAUTION A power factor improving capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverter's output side may overheat or be damaged due to the harmonics of the inverter output. Also, when an overcurrent flows in the inverter, the overcurrent protection is activated. Hence, when the motor is driven by the inverter, do not install a capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverter's output side. To improve the power factor, insert a power factor improving reactor on the inverter's primary side or in the DC circuit.

Others 1.9.7 Using the PU connector for computer link

(1) When connecting the operation panel or parameter unit using a connection cable
Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).

(2) For RS-485 communication

The PU connector can be used to perform communication operation from a personal computer etc. By connecting the PU connector to computers such as a personal computer and Factory Automation computer with a communication cable, you can monitor the inverter operation and read and write parameters using a user program.

<PU connector pin-outs>

Viewed from the inverter (receptacle side) front

8)

1)

1) SG 2) P5S 3) RDA 4) SDB

5) SDA 6) RDB 7) SG 8) P5S

CAUTION 1. Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector. Otherwise, the product may be damaged due to electrical specification differences. 2. Pins No. 2 and 8 (P5S) provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.

<System configuration example> (1) Connection of a computer to the inverter (one-to-one connection)
Computer Station No.0 Inverter RS-485 connector RS-232C cable
Computer RS-232C connector

Station No.0 Inverter

RS-485 Interfase terminal

RS-485 connector Maximum 15m (49.21feet) RJ-45 connector 2) 10BASE-T cable 1)

RJ-45 connector 2) 10BASE-T cable 1)

RS-232C RS-485 converter

Computer - inverter connection cable

For a connection cable between the computer having RS-232C and the inverter (RS-232CRS-485 converter), refer to the table below. Examples of commercially available products (as of July, '02)
Type
FA-T-RS40 *

Maker
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd

* You can not connect multiple inverters with a converter cable (a computer and an inverter are one-to-one connection). As the RS-232C cable and the RS-485 cable (10BASE-T+RJ-45 connector) are provided with a product, no need to prepare a cable and a connector separately. Contact a maker for details of the product. REMARKS
When fabricating the cable on the user side, see below. Examples of commercially available products (as of July, '02)

Product
1) 2) 10BASE-T cable RJ-45 connector

Type

Maker

SGLPEV-T 0.5mm 4P Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd. * Do not use No. 2 and No. 8 pin (P5S). 5-554720-3 Tyco Electronics Corporation

26

Others
(2) Connection of a computer to multiple inverters (one-to-n connection)
Computer Station No. 1 Inverter RS-485 interface terminal
RS-485 connector

Station No. 2 Inverter

RS-485 connector

Station No. n (up to 32) Inverter

RS-485 connector

Distributor

10BASE-T cable 1)

RJ-45 connector 2)

Terminating resistor

Computer
RS-232C connector

Station No. 1 Inverter

RS-485 connector

Station No. 2 Inverter

RS-485 connector

Station No. n Inverter

RS-485 connector

RS-232C cable

Maximum 15m (49.21feet)

Converter

Distributor

10BASE-T cable 1)

RJ-45 connector 2)

Terminating resistor

REMARKS
When fabricating the cable on the user side, see below. Examples of commercially available products (as of July, '02)

Product
1) 2) 10BASE-T cable RJ-45 connector

Type
SGLPEV-T 0.5mm 4P * 5-554720-3

Maker
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd. Tyco Electronics Corporation

* Do not use No. 2 and No. 8 pin (P5S) of the 10 BASE-T cable.

1 WIRING
27

Others
<Wiring method>
1) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter
Computer Side Terminals Signal name
RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG

Cable connection and signal direction 10 BASE-T cable

Inverter PU connector
SDA SDB RDA RDB

Description Receive data Receive data Send data Send data Request to send Request to send Clear to send Clear to send Signal ground Frame ground

(Caution 1) 0.3mm2 or more

SG

2)

Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" (multiple) inverters

Cable connection and signal direction Computer
RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RDB RDA RDB RDA RDB RDA SDB SDA SDB SDA SDB CSA CSB SG FG SG SG SG
(Caution 1)

10 BASE-T cable

Termination resistor (Caution 2)

SDA

RSB

Station No. 1 Inverter

Station No. 2 Inverter

Station No. n Inverter

CAUTION 1. Make connections in accordance with the manual of the computer used. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they vary with the model. 2. There may be the influence of reflection depending on the transmission speed and/or transmission distance. If this reflection hinders communication, provide a termination resistor. If the PU connector is used to make a connection, use a distributor since a terminal resistor cannot be fitted. Connect the termination resistor to only the inverter remotest from the computer. (Termination resistor: 100)

28

Input terminals

1.10 Input terminals

1.10.1 Run (start) and stop (STF, STR, STOP)
To start and stop the motor, first switch on the input power of the inverter (when there is a magnetic contactor on the input side, use the operation-ready switch to turn on the magnetic contactor), then start the motor with the forward or reverse rotation start signal.

(1)

Two-wire type (STF, STR)

Power supply

NFB R, S, T Inverter STF STR (Pr.187 = "9999") SD

A two-wire type connection is shown on the right. 1) The forward/reverse rotation signal is used as both the start and stop signals. Turn on either of the forward and reverse rotation signals to start the motor in the corresponding direction. Turn on both or turn off the start signal during operation to decelerate the inverter to a stop. 2) The speed setting signal may either be given by entering 0 to 10VDC across the speed setting input terminal 2-5 or by setting the required values in Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 "three-speed setting" (high, middle, low speeds). (Refer to page 90 for three-speed operation.)

Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start

Output speed

Time

Across STF-SD (STR)

ON

Two-Wire Type Connection Example

(2)

Three-wire type (STF, STR, STOP)

Power supply

NFB
Forward rotation start

A three-wire type connection is shown on the right. Assign the start self-holding signal (STOP) to any of the input terminals. 1) Short signals STOP-SD to enable the start self-holding function. In this case, the forward/reverse rotation signal functions only as a start signal. REMARKS

Stop

R, S, T Inverter STF

Reverse rotation start

STR (Pr.187 = "9999") SD STOP (Set "25" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183)

1 WIRING

2)

3)

4) 5)

If the start signal terminals STF (STR)-SD are once shorted, then opened, the start signal is kept on and starts the inverter. To change the rotation direction, short the start signal STR (STF)-SD once, then open it. The inverter is decelerated to a stop by opening terminals STOP-SD once. The three-wire connection is shown on the right. When terminals JOG-SD are shorted, the STOP signal is invalid and jog signal has precedence. If the output stop terminals MRS-SD are shorted, the self-holding function is not deactivated.

Output speed

Assign the STOP signal to any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection).

ON ON

Time

Start Stop

Three-Wire Type Connection Example

29

Input terminals 1.10.2 External thermal relay input (OH)

When the external thermal relay or the built-in thermal relay of the motor (thermal protector) is actuated to protect the motor from overheat, the inverter output can be shut off and the corresponding alarm signal can be provided to hold a stop status. If the thermal relay contact resets, the motor cannot be restarted unless the reset terminal RES-SD are shorted for more than 0.1 seconds and then opened or a power-on reset is made. Therefore, this function can be used as an external emergency stop signal input.
Thermal relay Motor IM

Inverter

U V W OH SD

1.10.3 Speed setting potentiometer connection (10E, 2 (1), 5)

As an analog speed setting input signal, a voltage signal can be input. The relationships between the speed setting input voltages and output speeds are as shown below. The speed setting input signals are proportional to the output speeds. Note that when the input signal is less than the starting speed, the output speed of the inverter is 0r/min. If the input signal of 10VDC or higher is entered, it cannot exceed Pr. 1 "maximum speed".
Speed setting second gain speed (No. 1 terminal gain) (30r/min to 3600r/min) Output speeds (r/min) Maximum speed (0 to 3600r/min) Minimum speed (0 to 3600r/min) Starting speed (0 to 1500r/min) 1 0 Speed setting signals

Input voltage is proportional to output speed. Pr.1 Pr.2 Pr.13 10V Pr.73

Pr.903 Pr.918

Relationships between Speed Setting Inputs and Output Speeds

Related parameters
Maximum speed setting Pr. 1 "maximum speed" (Refer to page 89.)

(1) Voltage input (10E, 2, 5)

Enter the speed setting input signal of 0 to 10VDC across the speed setting input terminals 2-5. The maximum output speed is reached when 10V is input across terminals 2-5. The power supply used may either be the inverter's built-in power supply or an external power supply. For the builtin power supply, terminals 10E-5 provide 10VDC output. Use terminal 10E for the built-in power supply.
+10V 0 to 10VDC 10E 2 5

(2) Multi-function input (1, 5)

The analog input function can be multi-functioned, e.g. compensation signal may be entered across the main speed setting terminals 2-5 for synchronous operation. Across auxiliary input terminals 1-5 ... 0 to 10VDC The function of terminal 1 depends on the setting of Pr. 868 "No. 1 terminal function assignment". Refer to page 195 for details of Pr 868.

30

Input terminals 1.10.4 Torque setting input signal and motor-generated torque (terminals 3, 5)
Refer to the diagrams shown at below right for the relationship between the torque setting input signal and output voltage. The torque setting input signal is in proportion to the output torque. However, motor-generated torque varies with the motor temperature.
Gain Pr. 905 3
Output torque (Torque command) 150%

0 to 10VDC

Common(-)

Bias Pr.904
-10V Bias Pr.904

Gain Pr.905

10V Terminal 3

Analog Input Block Diagram

-150% Torque Setting Input vs. Output Torque

1.10.5 Meter connection method and adjustment (DA1, DA2)

The output speed etc. of the inverter can be displayed by connecting a meter (speed meter) across terminals DA1 (DA2)-5. The meter can be calibrated from the operation panel or parameter unit. However, if the meter is away from the inverter, the display value will vary with the wiring distance. The terminals DA1, DA2 are non-isolated from the control circuit of the inverter. Using a shield cable of within 30m (98.42feet) for wiring.
Load impedance 10k or more Inverter DA2 0 to 10VDC (+) Meter (Speed meter) 5 (-) Load impedance 10k or more

Inverter DA1

Zero-center
0 to 10VDC (+)

1 WIRING

Meter (Speed meter) 5 (-)

Types of Connected Meters

REMARKS
Using Pr. 867 "DA1 output filter", you can function the primary delay filter. (Refer to page 195.)

CAUTION Refer to page 200 for the meter adjustment procedure. [Example] To provide a 10V DA1-5 (DA2-5) output of 10V at the inverter output speed of 3000r/min, set "3000" (r/ min) in Pr. 55.(factory setting : 1800r/min)
Parameter No.
55

Name
Speed monitoring reference

Factory Setting
1800r/min

Setting Range
0 to 3600r/min

CAUTION Note that when wiring is long, a voltage type meter is susceptible to a voltage drop, induction noise, etc. and may not read correctly.

31

Input terminals 1.10.6 Common terminals (SD, 5, SE)

Terminals SD, 5 and SE are all common terminals (0V) for I/O terminals and the other common terminals are isolated from each other. Terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, OH, RES, DI1, DI2, DI3 and DI4) and the encoder output signals. When using the terminal SD as a common terminal for the encoder output signals, use a shielded or twisted cable to protect it from external noise. Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the speed setting analog input signals and analog output signals. Use a shielded or twisted cable to protect it from external noise. Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminals (DO1, DO2, DO3).

1.10.7 Signal inputs by contact-less switches

If a transistor is used instead of a contacted switch as shown on the right, the input signals of the inverter can control the STF, STR, OH, RES, DI1, DI2, DI3 and DI4 terminals. Input resistance : 4.7k Voltage when contacts are open : 21 to 27VDC When contacts are short-circuited : 4 to 6mADC
+24V

STF etc.

Inverter

SD

External Signal Input by Transistor

REMARKS When using an external transistor connected to the external power supply, use terminal PC to prevent a malfunction due to a sneak current. (Refer to page 17 for details.) Note that when off, an SSR (solid-state relay) has a relatively large leakage current and it may be accidentally input to the inverter.

32

How to use the input signals (assigned terminals DI1 to DI4, STR)

1.11 How to use the input signals (assigned terminals DI1 to DI4, STR) (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187)
These terminals vary in functions with the settings of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187.
Parameter
Pr. 180 "DI1 terminal function selection" Pr. 181 "DI2 terminal function selection" Pr. 182 "DI3 terminal function selection" Pr. 183 "DI4 terminal function selection" Pr. 187 "STR terminal function selection"

Factory-Set Value
0 1 2 3 9999

Factory-Set Signal
RL RM RH RT STR

Setting Range

0 to 3, 5, 8 to 16, 20, 22 to 28, 42 to 44, 9999 (9999 is valid for Pr. 187 only)

Page 163

The priorities of the speed commands are in order of jog, multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) and PID (X14).

1.11.1 Multi-speed setting (RL, RM, RH, REX signals): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "0, 1, 2, 8" Remote setting (RL, RM, RH signals): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "0, 1, 2"
When Pr. 59 = 0, turning on/off the RL, RM, RH and REX signals input as the speed commands enables multispeed operation (15 speeds). (Refer to page 90 for details. Pr. 59 = 0) When Pr. 59 "0", you can use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation without using analog signals even if the operation panel is away from the control box. (Refer to page 116 for details.)

1.11.2 Second function selection/second motor switchover (RT signal) : Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "3"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time" Pr. 45 "second deceleration time" Pr. 450 "second applied motor" Pr. 451 "second motor control method selection" Pr. 452 "second electronic thermal O/L relay" Pr. 453 "second motor capacity" Pr. 454 "number of second motor poles" Pr. 830 "speed control P gain 2" Pr. 831 "speed control integral time 2" Pr. 832 "speed setting filter 2 Pr. 833 "speed detection filter 2" Pr. 834 "torque control P gain 2" Pr. 835 "torque control integral time 2" Pr. 836 "torque setting filter 2" Pr. 837 "torque detection filter 2"

Inverter

Start Second acc/dec

STF(STR) RT SD

1 WIRING

Entering the RT signal enables the second functions (above parameters). However, when Pr. 450 = 9999, it is judged that the second motor functions are not selected, and parameters Pr. 451 and Pr. 453, Pr. 454 are invalid. The second functions other than the above are enabled with the first motor.

1.11.3 Jog operation (jog signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "5"
(1) Jog operation using external signals
Jog operation can be started/stopped by shorting the jog mode select terminal JOG-SD and shorting/opening the start signal terminal STF or STR-SD. The jog speed and jog acceleration/deceleration time are set in Pr. 15 (factory setting 150r/min, variable between 0 and 1500r/min) and Pr. 16 (factory setting 0.5s, variable between 0 and 3600s (when Pr. 21 = 0)/0 to 360s (when Pr. 21 = 1)), respectively, and their settings can be changed from the operation panel or parameter unit. The jog signal has higher priority than the multi-speed signals. (external)
Jog speed Pr. 15

Output speed

15r/min Forward rotation

90r/min

DC injection brake Reverse rotation Time

Across JOG-SD Forward rotation Across STF-SD Reverse rotation Across STR-SD

ON ON ON

33

How to use the input signals (assigned terminals DI1 to DI4, STR) 1.11.4 Third function selection (X9 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "9"
Turn on this "X9 signal" to set: Pr. 110 "third acceleration/deceleration time" Pr. 111 "third deceleration time" Select either the first motor or the second motor according to the RT signal input.
X9 signal
OFF OFF ON ON

Inverter

RT signal
OFF ON OFF ON

Applied Motor
First motor Second motor First motor Second motor

Other Function
First function Second function Third function Third function

Start Third acc/dec

STF(STR) X9 SD

1.11.5 PU operation external interlock signal (X12 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "12"
This function prevents the inverter from being inoperative during operation using an external command if the mode is accidentally left unswitched from the PU operation mode. (Refer to page 127.) X12 signal on ..... Shift to PU operation mode enabled (output stop during external operation) X12 signal off ..... Shift to PU operation mode disabled (output stop during external operation)

1.11.6 PID control enable terminal: Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "14"
Turn the X14 signal on to exercise PID control. When this signal is off, normal inverter operation is performed. Refer to page 152 for details. Related parameters
Pr. 128 "PID action selection", Pr. 129 "PID proportional band", Pr. 130 "PID integral time", Pr. 131 "upper limit", Pr. 132 "lower limit", Pr. 133 "PID action set point for PU operation", Pr. 134 "PID differential time" (Refer to page 152.)

1.11.7 Brake sequence opening signal (BRI signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "15"
Used when the method of inputting the mechanical brake opening completion signal to the inverter is used for the brake sequence functions. (Refer to page 118.) Related parameters
Pr. 60 "intelligent mode selection", Pr. 278 "brake opening speed", Pr. 279 "brake opening current", Pr. 280 "brake opening current detection time", Pr. 281 "brake operation time at start", Pr. 282 "brake operation speed", Pr. 283 "brake operation time at stop", Pr. 284 "deceleration detection function selection", Pr. 285 "overspeed detection speed" (Refer to page 118.)

1.11.8 PU operation/external operation switchover: Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "16"
You can change the operation mode. When Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = "8", turning the X16 signal on shifts the current operation mode to the external operation mode and turning that signal off shifts to the PU operation mode. Refer to page 129 for details. Related parameters
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" (Refer to page 129)

1.11.9 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover terminal (X20 signal) : Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "20"
When Pr. 29 = "4", you can use the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover terminal to set the acceleration of S-pattern acceleration/deceleration in the parameter. (Refer to page 102.) Related parameters
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern", Pr. 380 "acceleration S pattern 1", Pr. 381 "deceleration S pattern 1", Pr. 382 "acceleration S pattern 2", Pr. 383 "deceleration S pattern 2" (Refer to page 102.)

34

How to use the input signals (assigned terminals DI1 to DI4, STR) 1.11.10 Orientation command (X22 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "22"
With the position detector (encoder) fitted to the motor end, you can perform position stop (orientation) control of the rotation shaft. Refer to page 172 for details. Related parameters
Pr. 350 "stop position command selection", Pr. 351 "orientation switchover speed", Pr. 356 "Internal stop position command", Pr. 357 "orientation in-position zone", Pr. 360 "external position command selection", Pr. 361 "position shift", Pr. 362 "orientation position loop gain", Pr. 393 "orientation selection", Pr. 396 "orientation speed gain (P term)", Pr. 397 "orientation speed integral time", Pr. 398 "orientation speed gain (D term)", Pr. 399 "orientation deceleration ratio" (Refer to page 172.)

1.11.11 Pre-excitation/servo on (LX signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "23"
Pre-excitation When the start signal (STF, STR) is not input to the inverter (during a stop), turning on the pre-excitation terminal LX enables 0 speed control or servo lock. (Refer to page 95 for details.) Servo on Use the LX signal to exercise position control. Turning on the LX signal switches the servo on and cancels the base circuit shut-off, resulting in a servo lock status. (Refer to page 57 for details.) Related parameters
Pre-excitation Pr. 802 "pre-excitation selection" (Refer to page 95.) Servo-on Pr. 419 "position command right selection", Pr. 420 "command pulse scaling factor numerator", Pr. 421 "command pulse scaling factor denominator", Pr. 422 "position loop gain", Pr. 423 "position feed forward gain", Pr. 424 "position command acceleration/deceleration time constant", Pr. 425 "position feed forward command filter", Pr. 426 "in-position width", Pr. 427 "excessive level error", Pr. 430 "pulse monitor selection", Pr. 464 "digital position control sudden stop deceleration time", Pr. 465 to Pr. 494 (position feed amount) (Refer to page 57.)

1.11.12 Output stop (MRS signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "24"
Short the output stop terminals MRS-SD during inverter output to cause the inverter to stop the output immediately. This function is valid in any mode independently of the control mode. Open terminals MRS-SD to resume operation in about 20ms. Terminal MRS may be used as described below. (1) To stop the motor by mechanical brake (e.g. electromagnetic brake) Terminals MRS-SD must be shorted when the mechanical brake is operated and be opened before the motor that has stopped restarts. (2) To provide interlock to disable operation by the inverter After terminals MRS-SD have been shorted, the inverter cannot be operated if the start signal is given to the inverter. (3) To coast the motor to stop The motor is decelerated according to the preset deceleration time and is stopped by operating the DC injection brake at the DC injection brake operation speed or less. Using terminal MRS, the motor is coasted to a stop.
Motor coasted to stop

1
0.5r/min Approx. 20ms Across MRS-SD Across STF (STR)-SD ON ON

1.11.13 Start self-holding selection (STOP signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "25"
The connection example given here is used to self-hold the start signal (forward rotation, reverse rotation). * Connected to the STOP signal to disable forward or reverse rotation if forward or reverse rotation and stop are turned on at the same time.
Forward rotation Reverse rotation (Wiring example for sink logic) * STOP Stop SD

STF STR

35

WIRING

How to use the input signals (assigned terminals DI1 to DI4, STR) 1.11.14 Control mode changing (MC signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "26"
By setting Pr. 800 "control system selection", change the control mode between speed, torque and position. Refer to page 182 for details.

1.11.15 Torque restriction selection (TL signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "27"
By setting Pr. 815 "torque restriction level 2", you can change the torque restriction value. Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details.

1.11.16 Start time tuning (X28 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "28"
You can perform online tuning before turning on (during stop) the start signals (STF, STR) to prevent a start time delay due to tuning. POINT Perform offline auto tuning (page 132) and set "1" in Pr. 95 (start time tuning). You can perform start time tuning by X28 signal when the Y39 signal is off. It takes 500ms maximum for start time tuning to complete.

Speed (r/min)

Time(h) X28 signal Start time tunig ON In execution Completion

Y39 signal Start signal

REMARKS
Start time tuning is also performed with the LX signal on and a start signal by the speed command less than the starting speed (e.g. zero speed command) on. The Y39 signal is kept on while the second magnetic flux remains after a motor stop. The X28 signal is not made valid while the Y39 signal is on. The STF, STR and LX signals are made valid after completion of start time tuning. During tuning, only the output signals below are valid IPF, THP, PU, Y12, RY, ER, LF, MT, DA1, DA2, ABC. Invalid during V/F control.

1.11.17 Torque bias selection 1 (X42 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "42" Torque bias selection 2 (X43 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "43"
When using the torque bias function, you can combine the on/off of the X42 and X43 signals to select the torque bias amount. Refer to page 189 for details. Related parameters
Pr. 840 "torque bias selection", Pr. 841 "torque bias 1", Pr. 842 "torque bias 2", Pr. 843 "torque bias 3", Pr. 844 "torque bias filter", Pr. 845 "torque bias operation time", Pr. 846 "torque bias balance compensation", Pr. 847 "fall-time torque bias No. 3 bias", Pr. 848 "falltime torque bias No. 3 gain" (Refer to page 189.)

36

How to use the input signals (assigned terminals DI1 to DI4, STR) 1.11.18 P control selection (P/PI control switchover) (X44 signal): Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 setting "44"
By turning the X44 signal on/off during speed control operation under vector control, you can select whether to add integral time (I) or not when performing gain adjustment with P gain and integral time using the X44 signal. When the X44 signal is off: PI control When the X44 signal is on: P control Since speed deviation occurs according to the load, you can use the machine-coupled device to suppress the hunting of the control system. Related parameters
Pr. 820 "speed control P(proportional) gain 1" Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1" Pr. 830 "speed control P(proportional) gain 2" Pr. 831 "speed control integral time 2" Refer to page 48 for details.

Speed command Speed + command -

Speed proportional operation

+ + X44 OFF Speed integral operation

Torque control

Motor

Encoder

0 X44 ON

Integration cleared to 0

1 WIRING
37

How to use the output signals (assigned terminals DO1 to DO3, ABC) (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195)

1.12 How to use the output signals (assigned terminals DO1 to DO3, ABC) (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195)
The output terminals DO1, DO2, DO3, ABC vary in functions with the Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 settings.
Parameter
190
Terminal Symbol

Name
DO1 terminal function selection DO2 terminal function selection DO3 terminal function selection ABC terminal function selection

Factory Setting
0

Factory-Set Terminal Function

Inverter running

Setting Range

Remarks

RUN

191

SU

Up to speed Instantaneous power failure, undervoltage Alarm output

192

IPF

0 to 8, 10 to 16, 20, 25 to 27, 30 to 37, 39, 40 to 44, 96 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 125 to 127, 130 to 137, 139, 140 to 144, 196 to 199, 9999

Extended mode

195

A, B, C

99

<Setting>
Refer to the following table for the settings of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195.
Setting
Positive logic Negative logic Signal Name

Function

Operation
Output when the start command is input. For V/F control, this signal is output during operation when the inverter output speed rises to or above the starting speed. During DC injection brake, 0 speed control or servo lock, this signal is not output. Refer to Pr. 41 "up-to-speed sensitivity" (page 108). Output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage. Output when torque or speed restriction is activated. For V/F control, this signal is output while the stall prevention function is activated. Refer to Pr. 42, Pr. 43 (speed detection) (page 108). Refer to Pr. 50 "second speed detection" (page 108). Refer to Pr. 116 "third speed detection" (page 108). Output when 85% of the regenerative brake duty set in Pr. 70 is reached. Output when the electronic thermal relay function cumulative value reaches 85% of the preset level. Output when the PU operation mode is selected. Output when the inverter can be started by switching the start signal on or while it is running. Refer to Pr. 150 and 151 (output current detection) (page 159). Refer to Pr. 152 and 153 (zero current detection) (page 160).

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 25 26 27 30 31

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 120 125 126 127 130 131

RUN SU IPF OL FU FU2 FU3 RBP THP PU RY Y12 Y13 FDN FUP RL BOF FAN FIN ORA Y30 Y31

Inverter running Up to speed Instantaneous power failure or undervoltage Overload alarm Output speed detection Second output speed detection Third output speed detection Regenerative brake prealarm Electronic thermal relay function prealarm PU operation mode Inverter operation ready Output current detection Zero current detection PID lower limit PID upper limit PID forward-reverse rotation output Brake opening request Fan fault output Fin overheat prealarm Orientation in-position Forward rotation output Reverse rotation output

Refer to Pr. 128 to 134 (PID control) (page 152).

Refer to Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 (brake sequence function) (page 118). Output at the time of a fan fault. Output when the heatsink temperature reaches about 85% of the fin overheat protection activating temperature. When orientation is valid

For vector control

38

How to use the output signals (assigned terminals DO1 to DO3, ABC) (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195)
Setting
Positive logic Negative logic

Signal Name

Function
Regenerative status For vector control output Operation ready 2 Low speed output Torque detection In-position Maintenance timer output Start time tuning completion Trace status Speed detection Second speed detection Third speed detection

Operation

32 33 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43

132 133 134 135 136 137 139 140 141 142 143

Y32 RY2 LS TU Y36 MT Y39 Y40 FB FB2 FB3

Output on completion of pre-excitation. Turned on at an output start when preexcitation is not made. Output when the speed falls to or below any preset low speed. Output when the motor torque rises above the predetermined value (Pr.864). (Refer to page 194.)

Acts as an in-position signal.

Refer to Pr. 890 to Pr. 892 (maintenance output function) (page 199). Output on completion of start time tuning Acts as a trace completion signal.

Output when the motor output speed (feed back value) exceeds the preset speed. Perform in the same way as FU, FU2 and FU3 under V/F control. Output during forward operation or the reverse signal is ON. Output at deceleration even during forward rotation or the reverse signal is OFF. (Does not output during pre-excitation LX is ON.) Output during the orientation command signal (X22) is ON. Switched ON when the servo is ON (LX-ON) under position cotrol. (Switched OFF when the servo is OFF. (LX-OFF)
Refer to Pr. 495 to Pr.497 (page 181).

44

144

RUN2 Inverter running 2

96 97 98 99 9999

196 197 198 199

REM ER LF ABC

Remote output Minor fault output 2 Minor fault output Alarm output No function

At occurrence of a major fault, the base circuit is shut off immediately. At occurrence of a minor fault, the base circuit is shut off after deceleration to a stop.
Output when a minor fault (fan fault or communication error alarm) occurs. Output when the inverter's protective function is activated to stop the output (major fault).

0 to 99: Positive logic, 100 to 199: Negative logic

1 WIRING
39

Design information to be checked

1.13 Design information to be checked

1) When performing commercial power supply-inverter switchover operation for the motor other than the vector control dedicated motor, securely provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for the MC1 and MC2 used for commercial power supply-inverter switchover. When the wiring is wrong or there is a commercial power supply-inverter switchover circuit as shown below, the inverter will be damaged by a sneak current from the power supply due to arcs generated at the time of switchover or chattering caused by a sequence error. If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's primary circuit and also make up a sequence that will not turn on the start signal. If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the power is restored. When the power supply used with the control circuit is different from the one used with the main circuit, make up a circuit which will switch off the main circuit power supply terminals R, S, T when the control circuit power supply terminals R1, S1 are switched off. Since the input signals to the control circuit are on a low level, use two parallel low-level signal contacts or a twin contact for contact inputs to prevent poor contact. Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit. Do not apply a voltage directly to the alarm output terminals (A, B, C). Always apply a voltage to these terminals via a relay coil, lamp, etc. Fully make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
Low-level signal contacts

2)

3)

4)

5) 6)

7)

Commercial power supply-inverter switchover (other than the vector control dedicated motor)
MC1 Interlock Power supply R S T U V W Inverter MC2 IM

Sneak current

Low-level signal contacts

Twin contact

40

Using the second motor

1.14 Using the second motor

1.14.1 Wiring diagram (second motor)
Vector control with encoder is not enabled with the second motor. CAUTION 1. Provide interlocks to prevent the MC1 and MC2 from being turned on simultaneously. 2. For the second motor (motor without encoder), use Pr. 452 "second electronic thermal O/L relay" or provide an external thermal relay. 3. *: Give one external thermal relay signal to across OH-SD. Related parameters
Second electronic thermal relay function setting (Pr. 452 "second electronic thermal O/L relay" (Refer to page 93.))
Motor without encoder (Second motor) MC2 U V W E Inverter MC1 U V W U V W E IM

Motor with encoder (First motor)

IM

OH SD PA PAR PB PBR PZ PZR PG SD Encoder

1.14.2
Param eter

Second motor setting parameters

Name Factory Setting
0 Standard motor 3 to 8 10 Constant torque motor 13 to 18

Setting Range
Inverter internal constant Offline auto tuning Inverter internal constant Offline auto tuning Inverter internal constant Offline auto tuning Inverter internal constant Offline auto tuning Refer to page 123.

1 WIRING

450

Second applied motor

9999

20 23, 24 30

SF-JR (4P)-1.5kW (2HP) or less (under vector control)

Vector control dedicated motor 33, 34 9999 10 11 451 Second motor control method selection 9999 12 20 V/F control 9999 Function invalid Set the rated motor current. 0 to 500A (Refer to page 93.) 9999 Function invalid Function invalid

vector control without encoder

Speed control Torque control Speed control-torque control switchover Speed control

452

Second electronic thermal O/L relay

9999

41

Using the second motor

Param eter
453 454 456 457 463

Name
Second motor capacity Number of second motor poles Rated second motor voltage Rated second motor frequency Second auto tuning setting/status

Factory Setting

Setting Range

Inverter Set the motor capacity. capacity 0.4 to 55kW (0.5 to 75HP) Set the number of motor poles. 4 2, 4, 6P Set the rated voltage 575V 0 to 100V Set the rated frequency 60Hz 20 to 200Hz 0 : Without auto tuning 0 1 : Tuning without running the motor 101 : Tuning with running the motor

Setting can be made when Pr. 450 "9999"

Turn on/off the RT signal to switch between the first and second motors using contacts information of the magnetic contactor (MC). (Use the RT signal after setting it to any of the DI1 to DI4 signals using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection). By setting values other than "9999" in Pr. 451 when Pr. 450="9999" (factory setting), the control system of the first motor can be changed by switching the RT terminal on and off. (In this case, turning the RT signal on makes the second function of Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 452, Pr. 456, Pr. 457, Pr. 463, and Pr. 830 to Pr. 837 valid.

42

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER

This chapter explains the basic "adjustment for vector control with encoder" for use of this product. Always read the instructions and other information before using the equipment.

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7

What is vector control? ........................................44 Speed control ........................................................46 Fine adjustment of gains for speed control........47 Torque control .......................................................53 Fine adjustment for torque control......................54 Gain adjustment for torque control .....................55 Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494) .........................................................................57

6
43

What is vector control?

2.1 What is vector control?

Vector control is one of the control techniques for driving an induction motor. To help explain vector control, the fundamental equivalent circuit of an induction motor is shown below:
iM

r1

r1 : Primary resistance r2 : Secondary resistance 1 : Primary leakage inductance

2
r2 S

id

iq

M S id iq im

: Secondary leakage inductance : Mutual inductance : Slip : Excitation current : Torque current : Motor current

In the above diagram, currents flowing in the induction motor can be classified into a current id (excitation current) for making a magnetic flux in the motor and a current iq (torque current) for causing the motor to develop a torque. . In vector control, the voltage and output frequency are iq motor current im calculated to control the motor so that the excitation current and torque current (as shown in the left figure) flow to the optimum as described below:
torque current

(1) The excitation current is controlled to place the internal magnetic flux of the motor in the optimum status.
excitation current

id

(2) Derive the torque command value so that the difference between the motor speed command and the actual speed obtained from the encoder connected to the motor shaft is zero.

Motor-generated torque (TM), slip angular velocity (s) and the motor's secondary magnetic flux (2) can be found by the following calculation: TM 2 iq 2 = M id Vector control provides the following advantages: (1) Excellent control characteristics when compared to V/F control and other control techniques, achieving the control characteristics equal to those of DC machines. (2) Applicable to high-response applications with which induction motors were previously regarded as difficult to use. Applications requiring a wide variablespeed range from extremely low speed to high speed, frequent acceleration/deceleration operations, continuous four-quadrant operations etc. (3) Allows torque control. (4) Allows servo-lock torque control which generates a torque at zero speed (i.e. status of motor shaft = stopped).

iq s = r2 L2 id where, L2 = secondary inductance L2 = 2 + M

44

What is vector control?

IM

Encoder PWM modulation

magnetic flux control

id* + id

pre-excitation Vd current control torque current control

output voltage conversion 0

* + FB FB

speed control + + s

iq*

+ iq

Vq

0 id iq slip calculation 2 magnetic id flux conversion iq current conversion

(1) Speed control Speed control operation is performed to zero the difference between the speed command (*) and actual rotation detection value (FB). At this time, the motor load is found and its result is transferred to the torque current controller as a torque current command (iq*). (2) Torque current control A voltage (Vq) is calculated to start a current (iq*) which is identical to the torque current command (iq) found by the speed controller. (3) Magnetic flux control The magnetic flux ( 2) of the motor is derived from the excitation current (id). The excitation current command (id*) is calculated to use that motor magnetic flux ( 2) as a predetermined magnetic flux. (4) Excitation current control A voltage (Vd) is calculated to start a current (id) which is identical to the excitation current command (id*) found by magnetic flux control. (5) Output frequency calculation Motor slip (s) is calculated on the basis of the torque current value (iq) and magnetic flux ( 2). The output frequency (w0) is found by adding that slip (s) to the feedback (FB) found by a feedback from the encoder. The above results are used to make PWM modulation and run the motor.

45

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

Speed control
This inverter can control a motor under speed, torque or position control. (As required, set "1" (extended function parameters valid) in Pr. 160 "extended function selection".) Refer to page 163 for details of Pr. 160 "extended function selection". (Since the factory setting of Pr. 77 is "0", perform parameter write in the PU mode or during a stop.)

2.2 Speed control

2.2.1 Outline of speed control

The basics of speed control are explained in the Instruction Manual (basic).
Set any of "0 (speed control), 2 (speed-torque switchover), 4 (speed-position switchover)" in Pr. 800 "control system selection" to make speed control valid. Pr. 800 is factory-set to 0 (speed control) (Refer to page 182.)

Set the motor. (Refer to page 8)

Set the operation command. (Refer to page 129.)

Test run
As required 1) Gain adjustment Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).)
To achieve faster responsiveness to the speed command change (when faster responsiveness is desired)

Perform model adaptive control/speed feed forward control. (Refer to page 51.)
For further fine adjustment of gains

Perform manual input gain adjustment. (Refer to page 48.) 2) Set the torque restriction value.

Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for the connection diagram, test run and easy gain tuning.

2.2.2

Easy gain tuning function block diagram

Automatic setting
Load inertia moment

Command

+ -

Speed control/position loop gain Model speed control gain Pr.820, Pr.821, Pr.828, Pr.422

Detector + Current control Motor Encoder

Turn on with the Pr. 819 setting "1 or 2" Torque command Turn on with the Pr. 819 setting "1" Gain table Load inertia ratio Pr.880 Load inertia ratio estimation section Actual speed

Speed/position feedback Easy gain tuning response level setting (Pr.818) Easy gain tuning selection (Pr.819)

46

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control

2.3 Fine adjustment of gains for speed control

If easy gain tuning does not provide high accuracy, refer to the next page and make adjustment. Make adjustment when vibration, noise or any other unfavorable phenomenon occurs due to large load inertia or gear backlash, for example, or when you want to exhibit the best performance that matches the machine.

2.3.1

Control block diagram

Speed Pr.902 Speed setting "speed setting No. 2 bias" signal Operation No.1 terminal at Pr.903 Maximum, minimum mode setting Pr.868="0" "speed setting No. 2 gain" Pr.73 speeds Pr.79 4,14 No.1 Pr.1 Speed No.2
+ + 0,10

FWD STF

REV STR
Starting speed

Pr.2

Pr.832 1 : Servo lock

RH RM RL REX

Option
PU04V DU04--1
Speed feed forward/model adaptive speed control selection

RT OFF

Speed feed Speed feed forward Pr.877 Load inertia Speed feed torque control forward filter ratio forward gain 1 Pr.881 Pr.880 Speed feed forward control Pr.878 Pr.879 2 + Model speed control gain Pr.828 Model speed calculation 1 Js J (Pr.880) Torque factor RT + -

Torque bias Pr.840 to Pr.848 Torque restriction input method selection Pr.810 + 0 Torque restriction Pr. 22, Pr.812 to Pr.817 (Torque control) Current control of iq IM

Model adaptive speed control 2 0 ON 1

Pr.877 1

2 + +

control OFF Speed P gain 1 ON Pr.820

X44 OFF Speed control X44 ON Speed control 0 Integration cleared to 0 P gain 2

integral time 1

Pr.821

Encoder

Pr.830
X44 OFF integral time 2 X44 ON 0 Integration cleared to 0
Speed control

Pr.831

1 Speed detection filter Pr.823 RT OFF ON

No.3 RT Pr.826 Torque setting filter Pr.836 Pr.904 Torque command No. 3 bias Pr.905 Torque command No. 3 gain

Pr.833

: Parameters automatically tuned when tuning is selected in Pr.819 "easy gain tuning". Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details.

47

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

Speed setting filter

Override Pr.902 "speed setting No. 2 bias" Pr.903 "speed setting No. 2 gain" RT OFF Pr.822 ON

jump Pr.31 to Pr.36

Acc/dec processing

Pr.13 LX

Pre-excitation

Pr.802 0 : 0 speed control

* Pr.7, Pr.8

Pr.29, Pr.20, Pr.21 Pr.44, Pr.45 RT ON Pr.140 to Pr.143 Pr.110, Pr.111 X9 ON Pr.380 to Pr.383 Pr.16 Jog acceleration/ deceleration

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control 2.3.2

1)

Concept of adjustment of manual input speed control gains

Speed control P gain 1 Pr. 820 = 60% is equivalent to 120rad/s (speed responce of the motor alone). (factory setting) Increasing the proportional gain increases the response level. However, a too high gain will produce vibration and/or unusual noise. 2) Speed control integral time Pr. 821 = 0.333s (factory setting) Decreasing the integral time shortens the return time taken at a speed change. However, a too short time will generate an overshoot. When there is load inertia, the actual speed gain is as given below.

Proportional gain 200rad/s 120rad/s Pr.820 setting

60% 100% (Factory setting)

Load variation

Speed Since increasing the proportional gain increases the response level, this speed variation decreases. Decreasing the integral time shortens this return time.

Also, when there is load inertia, the actual speed gain decreases as indicated below. Actual speed gain = speed gain of motor without load JM JM+J JM : Inertia of motor JL : Motor shaft-equivalent load inertia

2.3.3

Speed control gain adjustment procedure (Pr. 820, Pr. 821)

Set "0" in Pr. 819 "easy gain tuning". (Easy gain tuning is not performed.) Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for easy gain tuning. Refer to the following for manually input gain adjustment.

Manuall input gain adjustment

Pr. 820 "speed control P (proportional) gain 1", Pr. 830 "speed control P (proportional) gain 2" Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1", Pr. 831 "speed control integral time 2" Make adjustment when any of such phenomena as unusual machine vibration/noise, low response level and overshoot has occurred. 1) First check the conditions and simultaneously change Pr. 820 "speed control P gain 1" value. 2) If you cannot make proper adjustment, change Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1" value and repeat step (1). CAUTION Pr. 830 "speed control P(proportional) gain 2" and Pr. 831 "speed control integral time 2" are made valid when the RT terminal is switched on. Make adjustments in the same way as Pr. 820 and Pr. 821.
No. Phenomenon/Condition Adjustment Method
Set the Pr. 820 and Pr. 821 values a little higher. When a speed rise is slow, increase the value 10% by 10% until just before Pr. 820 vibration/noise is produced, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. If an overshoot occurs, double the value until an overshoot does not occur, and Pr. 821 set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Set the Pr. 820 value a little lower and the Pr. 821 value a little higher. Decrease the value 10% by 10% until just before vibration/noise is not produced, Pr. 820 and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. If an overshoot occurs, double the value until an overshoot does not occur, and Pr. 821 set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Set the Pr. 820 value a little higher. When a speed rise is slow, increase the value 5% by 5% until just before Pr. 820 vibration/noise is produced, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.

Large load inertia

Vibration/noise generated from mechanical system

Slow response

48

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control

No.
4

Phenomenon/Condition
Long return time (response time) Overshoot or unstable phenomenon occurs.

Adjustment Method
Set the Pr. 821 value a little lower. Decrease the value by half until just before an overshoot or the unstable phenomenon does not occur, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Set the Pr. 821 value a little higher. Double the value until just before an overshoot or the unstable phenomenon does not occur, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.

REMARKS
You can switch between PI control and P control under speed control using the X44 signal. (Refer to page 37.)

2.3.4

Troubleshooting
Phenomenon Cause
(1) The motor or encoder wiring is wrong.

Corrective Action
(1) Check the wiring. * Choose V/F control (Pr. 800 = 20) and check the rotation direction of the motor and the speed monitor output from the DA1 output terminal. When the forward rotation signal is input, the motor running in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the motor shaft is normal. (If it runs in the clockwise direction, the phase sequence of the inverter secondary side wiring is incorrect.) (2) Check the encoder specifications. Check the positions of the 5V/12V/24V/External and differential/complimentary jumper connectors. (3) Check that FWD is displayed when running the motor in the counter-clockwise direction from outside during a stop of the inverter. If REV is displayed, the encoder phase sequence is wrong. Perform the correct wiring or match the Pr. 852 "encoder rotation direction" setting.

Motor does not rotate.

(2) The encoder specifications (jumper connector setting) are wrong. (3) The encoder wiring is wrong.

Pr. 852 Setting

Relationship between the motor and encoder

CW

A Encoder Forward rotation is clockwise rotation when viewed from A.

1 (factory setting)

A Encoder

CCW

Forward rotation is counterclockwise rotation when viewed from A.

(4) The Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" setting and the number of encoder used are different. Motor does not run at (1) The speed command from the correct speed. command device is incorrect. (Speed command does The speed command is not match actual speed) compounded with noise. (2) The speed command value does not match the inverter-recognized value. (3) The number of encoder pulses setting is incorrect.

(4) The motor will not run if the parameter setting is smaller than the number of encoder pulses used. Set Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" correctly. (1) Check that a correct speed command comes from the command device. Decrease the PWM carrier frequency in Pr. 72. (2) Readjust the speed command bias and gain in Pr. 902, Pr. 903, Pr. 917, and Pr. 918. (3) Check the setting of the number of encoder pulses in Pr. 851.

49

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control

Phenomenon
Speed does not rise to the speed command. 3 (2) Only P (proportional) control is selected. Motor speed is unstable. (1) The speed command varies.

Cause
(1) Insufficient torque. Torque restriction is actuated. (1)-1

Corrective Action
Increase the torque restriction value. ( Refer to the torque restriction of speed control in the Instruction Manual (basic).) Insufficient capacity When the load is heavy, speed deviation will occur under P (proportional) control. Select PI control. Check that a correct speed command comes from the command device. (Take measures against noises.) Decrease the PWM carrier frequency in Pr. 72. Increase the speed setting filter in Pr. 822. Increase the torque restriction value. ( Refer to the torque restriction of speed control in the Instruction Manual (basic).) Return the excitation ratio in Pr. 854 to the factory setting (100%). Perform easy gain tuning. Adjust Pr. 820 and Pr. 821. (Refer to gain adjustment.) Perform speed feed forward control and model adaptive speed control. Perform easy gain tuning. Decrease Pr. 820 and increase Pr. 821. Perform speed feed forward control and model adaptive speed control. Decrease Pr. 824. (Refer to page 55.) Check wiring. Check Pr. 852 setting for the encoder rotation direction. Increase the torque restriction value. ( Refer to the torque restriction of speed control in the Instruction Manual (basic).) Return the excitation ratio in Pr. 854 to the factory setting. Perform speed feed forward control. Set the acceleration/deceleration time that meets the load. Perform easy gain tuning. Adjust Pr. 820 and Pr. 821. (Refer to page 48.) Perform speed feed forward control and model adaptive speed control. Change the acceleration/deceleration time to an optimum value.

(1)-2 (2)

(1)-1

(1)-2 (1)-3 (2)-1

(2) Insufficient torque. 4

(2)-2 (3) The speed control gains do not match the machine. (machine resonance) (3)-1 (3)-2 (3)-3 Motor or machine hunts (vibration/noise is produced). 5 (1)The speed control gain is high. (1)-1 (1)-2 (1)-3 (2) (3)

(2) High torque control gain. (3) Motor wiring and encoder wiring are not correct. Acceleration/ deceleration time does not match the setting. (1) Insufficient torque.

(1)-1

6 (2) Large load inertia. Machine operation is unstable 7 (2) Slow response because of improper acceleration/ deceleration time of the inverter. (1) Adverse effect of high carrier frequency. (2) Adverse effect of weak excitation. (3) Low speed control gain. (1) The speed control gains do not match the machine.

(1)-2 (1)-3 (2) (1)-1 (1)-2 (1)-3 (2)

Speed fluctuates at low speed. 8

(1) Decrease the PWM carrier frequency in Pr. 72. (2) Return the excitation ratio in Pr. 854 to the factory setting. (3) Increase Pr. 820 "speed control P gain".

Related parameter reference pages

Pr. 71 "applied motor" (Refer to page 123.) Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" (Refer to page 124.) Pr. 800 "control system selection" (Refer to page 182.) Pr. 820 "speed control P gain 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 822 "speed setting filter 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" (Refer to page 10.) Pr. 854 "excitation ratio" (Refer to page 193.) Pr. 902 "speed setting No. 2 bias" (Refer to page 202.) Pr. 903 "speed setting No. 2 gain" (Refer to page 202.) Pr. 917 "No. 1 terminal bias (speed)" (Refer to page 202.) Pr. 918 "No. 1 terminal gain (speed)" (Refer to page 202.)

50

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control 2.3.5 Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control (Pr. 877 to Pr. 881)

By making parameter setting, select the speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control. The speed feed forward control enhances the trackability of the motor in response to a speed command change. The model adaptive speed control enables individual adjustment of speed trackability and motor disturbance torque response.
Parameter
828 877 878 879 880 881

Name
Model speed control gain Speed feed forward control/model adaptive speed control selection Speed feed forward filter Speed feed forward torque restriction Load inertia ratio Speed feed forward gain

Factory Setting
60% 0 0s 150% 7 0%

Setting Range
0 to 1000% 0,1,2 0 to 1s 0 to 400% 0,1 to 200 times 0 to 1000%

POINT When model adaptive speed gain is selected, the data obtained from easy gain tuning is used for Pr. 828 "model speed control proportional gain". Perform easy gain tuning also (simultaneously). (Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).)

Load inertia ratio 1 Js Pr.880 Speed feed forward gain Pr.881

Pr.879 Speed feed Pr.878 forward torque Speed feed restriction forward filter

Model adaptive speed control 2 + Model speed control gain Pr.828

1 Js J Torque factor (J : Pr.880) Pr.877 1 2 Model speed operation

Speed command

2 + 0 1 Pr.877 Speed control P gain 1 Pr.820 Actual speed controller Speed control integral time 1 Pr.821 + + + iq current control IM

Encoder

51

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control

Pr. 877 Setting
0

Description
Normal speed control is exercised. Speed feed forward control is exercised. Calculate required torque in responce to the acceleration/deceleration command for the inertia ratio set in Pr. 880 and generate torque immediately. When inertia ratio estimation has been made by easy gain tuning, the inertia ratio estimation result is used as the Pr. 880 setting, from which the speed feed forward is calculated. When the speed feed forward gain is 100%, the calculation result of the speed feed forward in 1) is reflected as-is. If the speed command changes suddenly, large torque is generated due to the speed feed forward calculation. The maximum value of the speed feed forward is restricted using Pr. 879. Using Pr. 878, the speed feed forward result can be dulled by the primary delay filter. Model adaptive speed control is enabled. At this time, the motor's model speed is calculated to feed back the model side speed controller. This model speed is also used as the actual speed controller command. The inertia ratio in Pr. 880 is used for calculation of the torque current command value given by the model side speed controller. When inertia ratio estimation has been made by easy gain tuning, Pr. 880 is overwritten by the inertia ratio estimation result, and that value is used to calculate the torque current command value. The torque current command value of the model side speed controller is added to the output of the actual speed controller, and the result is used as the iq current control input. Pr. 828 is used for model side speed control (P control), and the first gain in Pr. 820 is used for the actual speed controller. The model adaptive speed control is valid for the first motor only. When Pr. 877 = 2, switching to the second motor handles the second motor as Pr. 877 = 0.

CAUTION The adequate gain value for the model and actual loop parts are set according to the responce setting of easygain tuning under model adaptive speed control. To increase the responce level, Pr. 818 "responce setting"needs to be changed (increased). The following table indicates the relationships between the speed feed forward control and easy gain tuning function.
Easy Gain Tuning Selection (Pr. 819) Setting 1
Inertia ratio estimation value found by easy gain tuning is displayed. Manual input enabled only during a stop. Tuning results are displayed. Write disabled. Manual input

0
Load inertia ratio (Pr. 880) Model speed control gain (Pr. 828) Speed feed forward gain (Pr. 881)

Manual input

Manual input

Manual input Manual input

Tuning results are displayed. Write disabled. Manual input

For details of easy gain tuning, refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details. Related parameters
Pr. 820 "speed control P gain 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 830 "speed control P gain 2" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 831 "speed control integral time 2" (Refer to page 187.)

52

Torque control

2.4 Torque control

2.4.1 Outline of torque control

The basics of torque control are explained in the Instruction Manual (basic).
Set any of "1 (torque control), 2 (speed-torque switchover), 5 (position-torque switchover)" in Pr. 800 "control system selection" to make torque control valid. (The parameter is factory-set to enable speed control. Set "1" in Pr. 800 to make torque control valid.) (Refer to page182.)

Set the motor. (Refer to page 8.)

Set the speed restriction value.(Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic)

Test run
Set online auto tuning (adaptive magnetic flux observer) as required.

Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for the details of connection diagram, test run, and online auto tuning.

53

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

Set the torque command. (terminal 3) When using the parameter or communication to input the torque command, refer to Pr. 804 "torque command right" (page 184). When giving the torque command from the option (FR-A5NC, FR-V5AH, FR-A5AX, FR-V5AP), refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding option.

Fine adjustment for torque control

2.5 Fine adjustment for torque control

Current loop gain parameter for adjusting torque control operation state is available with the FR-V500 series. Stable operation is possible with the factory-set parameter. Refer to the next page and adjust the parameters when torque pulsation or any other unfavorable phenomenon occurs depending on the machine and operating conditions or when you want to exhibit the best performance that matches the machine.

2.5.1

Control block diagram

Torque command right selection Pr.804
Speed feedback < speed restriction Constant output value + 0 region torque characteristic selection

RT Torque OFF control

p gain 1 Pr. 824

+ IM
Torque control integral time 1 Pr. 825 Torque control integral time 2 Pr. 835

No. 3 RT Pr.826 Torque setting filter Pr.836 OFF ON Pr. 904, torque command No. 3 bias Pr. 905, torque command No. 3 gain
Parameter

Pr.803 ON

Torque control p gain 2 Pr. 834

+ +

Encoder

Torque detection filter

RT

Pr.805 torque command value/RAM Pr.806 torque command value/E2PROM

Pr.827 Pr.837

OFF ON

FR-V5AP Pulse train option

Pr.432 pulse train torque command bias Pr.433 pulse train torque command gain Pr.805 torque command value/RAM Pr.806 torque command value/E2PROM

FR-A5NC option

Pr.447 digital torque command bias FR-A5AX digital input option Pr.448 digital torque command gain
Pr.902 speed setting No. 2 bias Pr.903 speed setting No. 2 gain

speed restriction selection Pr. 807

Max./min. speed 0 External No. 2

PU

Pr.1 Pr.2 Pr.79

Acc/dec processing

+ -

Speed control

2 No. 1

PU/external

Speed feedback speed restriction value

Pr. 917 No. 1 terminal bias Pr. 918 No. 1 terminal gain RT OFF ON RH RM RL REX PU
Pr. 808 forward rotation speed restriction Pr. 809 reverse rotation speed restriction

Speed setting filter

Pr.7, Pr.8 Pr.29, Pr.20, Pr.21 Pr.44, Pr.45 RT ON Pr.140 to Pr.143 Pr.110, Pr.111 X9 ON Pr.380 to Pr.383 Pr.16 Jog acceleration/ deceleration

Pr.822 Pr.832 0 1

Speed restriction direct setting

54

Gain adjustment for torque control

2.6 Gain adjustment for torque control

When exercising torque control, do not perform easy gain tuning. Easy gain tuning produces no effects. If torque accuracy is necessary, perform online auto tuning. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).)

2.6.1

Concept of torque control gains

(1) Torque control P gain 1 2000rad/s when Pr. 824 = 100% (factory setting). (2) Torque control integral time 1 Pr. 825 = 5ms (factory setting)

2.6.2

Gain adjustment procedure

Refer to the following table for manual input gain adjustment. CAUTION Normally, the current loop gains in Pr. 824 and Pr. 825 need not be changed. Fully note that unnecessarily changing the settings of the current loop gains will result in unstable phenomena and/or reduced response level.

Manual input gain adjustment

Pr. 824 "torque control P gain 1", Pr. 834 "torque control P gain 2" Pr. 825 "torque control integral time 1", Pr. 835 "torque control integral time 2" Make adjustment when any of such phenomena as unusual machine vibration/noise and overcurrent has occurred. (1) First check the conditions and simultaneously change Pr. 824 "torque control P gain 1" value. (2) If you cannot make proper adjustment, change Pr. 825 "torque control integral time 1" value and repeat step (1). CAUTION Pr. 834 "torque control P gain 2" and Pr. 835 "toruque control integral time 2" are made valid when the RT terminal is switched on. Make adjustments in the same way as Pr. 824 and Pr. 825.
No. Phenomenon/Condition Adjustment Method
Set Pr. 824 a little lower and Pr. 825 a little higher. First lower Pr. 824 and check the motor for unusual vibration/noise and overcurrent. If the problem still persists, increase Pr. 825. Decrease the value 10% by 10% until just before the phenomenon on the left is improved, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Pr. 824 Note that a too low value will produce current ripples, causing the motor to generate synchronous sound. Double the value until just before the phenomenon on the left is improved, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Pr. 825 Note that a too high value will produce current ripples, causing the motor to generate synchronous sound. Set Pr. 824 a little lower and Pr. 825 a little higher. First lower Pr. 824 and check the motor for unusual vibration/noise and overcurrent. If the problem still persists, increase Pr. 825. Decrease the value 10% by 10% until just before an overcurrent does not occur, Pr. 824 and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Double the value until just before the phenomenon on the left is improved, and Pr. 825 set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.

Unusual noise generated from motor Unusual current flowing

Overcurrent occurs.

55

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

Gain adjustment for torque control 2.6.3 Troubleshooting

Phenomenon
Torque control is not exercised normally.

Cause
(1) The phase sequence of the motor or encoder wiring is wrong. (2) The control mode selection, Pr. 800, setting is improper. (3) The speed restriction value is not input.

Corrective Action
(1) Check the wiring. (Refer to page 4.)

(2) Check the Pr. 800 setting. (The factory setting is speed control) (3) Set the speed restriction value. (If the speed restriction value is not input, the motor will not rotate since the speed restriction value is regarded as 0r/min.) (4) Check that the command device gives a correct torque command. Decrease the PWM carrier frequency in Pr. 72. Increase the torque setting filter in Pr. 826. (5) Set the adaptive magnetic flux observer in Pr. 95.

(4) The torque command varies.

When the torque command is small, the motor rotates in the direction opposite to the start signal. Normal torque control cannot be exercised during acceleration/ deceleration. The motor vibrates.

(5) Torque variation due to the change in the motor temperature. (6) The torque command does not match the inverter-recognized value. The offset calibration of the torque command does not match.

(6) Recalibrate the torque command bias and gain in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905. Recalibrate the torque command bias in Pr. 904.

Output torque is not linear in response to the torque command.

Since the speed restriction value changes with the setting of the acceleration/deceleration time in Pr. 7, Pr. 8, the speed restriction may be activated. (When the speed restriction is activated, torque control cannot be exercised.) Insufficient torque.

Reduce the acceleration/deceleration time. Alternatively, set the acceleration/deceleration time to 0. (Speed restriction during acceleration/deceleration is speed restriction during constant speed)

Return the excitation ratio to the factory setting.

Related parameter reference pages

Pr. 7 "acceleration time" (Refer to page 91.) Pr. 8 "deceleration time" (Refer to page 91.) Pr. 800 "control system selection" (Refer to page 182.) Pr. 802 "pre-excitation selection" (Refer to page 95.) Pr. 810 "torque restriction input method selection" (Refer to page 100.) Pr. 826 "torque setting filter 1" (Refer to page 188.) Pr. 904 "torque command No. 3 bias" (Refer to page 202.) Pr. 905 "torque command No. 3 gain" (Refer to page 202.)

For online auto tuning, refer to the Instruction Manual (basic)

56

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494)

2.7 Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494)
This inverter is allowed to perform position control by setting conditional position feed by contact input or the position control option (FR-V5AP, FR-V5NS). And the position loop gain that adjusts this position control status is provided for the inverter. It is not used independently but is used with the speed loop parameter to determine the value. Therefore, first adjust the speed loop gain and then adjust the position loop gain parameter.

2.7.1

Position control step

Conditional position command by parameter setting Position command from the PLC Fit the FR-V5AP (option) and refer to the instruction manual of the FR-V5AP. Fit the FR-V5NS (option) and refer to the instruction manual of the FR-V5NS.

Set Pr. 419 "position command right selection" (Refer to page 59.)

Set parameters for position feed data setting (Pr. 465 to Pr. 494). (Refer to page 60.)

Test run
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. As required Set the electronic gear. (Refer to page 61.) Set Pr. 426 "in-position width". (Refer to page 63.) Pr. 427 "excessive level error" (Refer to page 63.) Pr. 430 "pulse monitor selection" (Refer to page 63.) Perform gain adjustment. (Refer to page 63.)

57

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

Position command from the motion controller (SSCNET)

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494) 2.7.2 Control block diagram

RH RM RL REX STF STR Command pulse

Position command right selection Pr.4 to 6 MultiPr.24 to 27 Pr.465 to Pr.494 Pr.419 speed Pr.232 to 239 Travel communication 2 Position command acceleration/ deceleration time constant Electronic Pr.424 gear Pr.420 Pr.421

Position feed forward command filter Position feed forward gain Pr.425 Pr.423

Pr.7 Pr.8 (Pr.44, Pr.110)(Pr.45, Pr.111) Command pulse selection Pr.428 Positioning option 0

Position loop gain Pr.422 Deviation counter Pr.429 Clear signal selection

Speed control IM

Differentiation Encoder

2.7.3

Parameter

Set the following parameters when exercising position control with the inverter.
Parameter
419 420 421 422 423 424 425

Name
Position command right selection Command pulse scaling factor numerator Command pulse scaling factor denominator Position loop gain Position feed forward gain Position command acceleration/ deceleration time constant Position feed forward command filter

Factory Setting
0 1 1 25 0% 0s 0s

Setting Range
0, 1 0 to 32767

Description
Set position command input.

Set the electronic gear. 0 to 32767 0 to 150s-1 0 to 100% 0 to 50s 0 to 5s Enter the primary delay filter in response to the feed forward command. The in-position signal turns on when the droop pulses become less than the setting. An error becomes excessive when the droop pulses exceed the setting. Display the number of pulses. Set the gain of the position loop. Function to cancel a delay caused by the droop pulses of the deviation counter.

426

In-position width

100 pulses

0 to 32767 pulses

427 430 464

Excessive level error Pulse monitor selection Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time

40K 9999 0

0 to 400K, 9999 0 to 5, 9999 0 to 360.0s

58

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494)
(1) Position command right selection (Pr. 419)
Pr. 419 Setting
0 (factory setting) 1

Description
Conditional position control function by contact input. (using parameters) Position command by pulse train input (when the FR-V5AP is fitted). (Refer to the instruction manual of the option for details.)

(2) Operation
The speed command given to rotate the motor is calculated to zero the difference between the number of internal command pulse train pulses (when Pr. 419=0, the number of pulses set by parameter (Pr. 465 to Pr. 494) is changed to the command pulses in the inverter) and the number of pulses fed back from the motor end encoder. 1) When a pulse train is input, pulses are accumulated in the deviation counter and these droop pulses act as position control pulses to give the speed command. 2) As soon as the motor starts running under the speed command of the inverter, the encoder generates feed back pulses and the droop of the deviation counter is counted down. The deviation counter maintains a given droop pulse value to keep the motor running. 3) When the command pulse input stops, the droop pulses of the deviation counter decrease, reducing the speed. The motor stops when there are no droop pulses. 4) When the number of droop pulses has fallen below the value set in Pr.426 (in-position width), it is regarded as completion of positioning and the in-position signal (Y36) turns on.
Motor speed Command pulse frequency Droop pulse value

Motor speed Pulse distribution

[r/min]

[PPS]
Acceleration Time Deceleration

Stop settling time

Pulse train LX signal Servo on STF (STR) Forward (reverse) rotation stroke end Y36 signal in-position signal

Rough

Fine

Rough

For conditional position control function by contact input, the STF and STR terminals provide the forward (reverse) command signal. The motor can run only in the direction where the forward (reverse) signal is on. Opening STF-SD disables the forward rotation, and opening STR-SD disables the reverse rotation. The pulse train is rough during acceleration and fine at the maximum speed. During deceleration the pulse train is rough and at last there are no pulses. The motor stops shortly after the command pulses stop. This time lag is necessary for maintaining the stop accuracy and called stop setting time. Related parameters
Servo on (LX) signal Set "23" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 163.) In-position signal (Y36) Set "36" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.192 and Pr.195 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 165.)

59

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494) 2.7.4 Conditional position feed function by contact input (Pr. 419=0)

Inputting the number of pulses (positions) in the parameters and setting multi-speed and forward (reverse) commands enable position control during servo operation. This position feed function does not return to the home position.

(1) Setting position command using parameters

Set position command using any two of Pr. 465 to Pr. 494 (position feed amount). Resolution of encoder speed 4

To stop the motor after 100 rotations when the encoder resolution is 2048 (pulse/rev) 2048 (pulse/rev) 100 (speed) 4 = 819200 (feed amount)

Setting the first amount 819200 Pr. 466 (upper digits)= 0 0 8 1 Pr. 465 (lower digits)= (decimal numeration) 9 2 0 0
<Position feed data setting parameters> Factory setting :0 Setting range : 0 to 9999 Minimum setting range : 1
Parameter
465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494

Name
First position feed amount Second position feed amount Third position feed amount Fourth position feed amount Fifth position feed amount Sixth position feed amount Seventh position feed amount Eighth position feed amount Ninth position feed amount Tenth position feed amount Eleventh position feed amount Twelfth position feed amount Thirteenth position feed amount Fourteenth position feed amount Fifteenth position feed amount (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits)

Selection Method REX RH RM RL

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

Position Feed Speed

High speed, Pr. 4 Middle speed, Pr. 5 Low speed, Pr. 6 Speed 4, Pr. 24 Speed 5, Pr. 25 Speed 6, Pr. 26 Speed 7, Pr. 27 Speed 8, Pr. 232 Speed 9, Pr. 233 Speed 10, Pr. 234 Speed 11, Pr. 235 Speed 12, Pr. 236 Speed 13, Pr. 237 Speed 14, Pr. 238 Speed 15, Pr. 239

60

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494)
(2) Operation by position command using parameters
Sudden stop when STF turns off Feed speed Pr.4 Speed Pr.7 (Pr. 44, Pr. 110) Servo on (LX) RH RM STF STR Y36 Pr.8 (Pr. 45, Pr. 111) Pr.5 Pr. 464 Shaded part is the travel Feed amount pulses Pr.466 10000 Pr.465

Position feed is effected by sending run command by contact input.

Acceleration/deceleration time is 0.1s minimum and 360s maximum. Acceleration/deceleration reference speed (Pr. 20) is clamped at a minimum of 500r/min. Deceleration time can be set in Pr. 464 "digital position control sudden stop deceleration time". At this time, the acceleration/deceleration patterns are all linear acceleration and the setting of Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern" is invalid. (Refer to page 102 for Pr. 29.) CAUTION Information on multi-speed command (position command) is determined at rising of the forward (reverse) command to perform position control. Therefore, set forward (reverse) command after multi-speed command (position command). Position feed is invalid if the multi-speed command is given after forward (reverse) command.

2.7.5

Setting the electronic gear

Adjust the ratio of the machine side gear and the motor side gear. The position resolution (travel per pulse [mm]) is determined by the travel per motor revolution s [mm] and the feedback pulses Pf [pulse/rev] of the detector, and is represented by the following expression.

Pf

:Travel per pulse [mm] :Travel per motor revolution [mm] Pf :Number of feedback pulses [pulse/rev] (the number of pulses after multiplying the number of encoder pulses by 4)

Using the parameters, the travel per command pulse can be set separately to set the travel per command pulse without a fraction.

Pf

Pr. 420 Pr. 421

The relationship between the motor speed and internal command pulse frequency is as follows.

fo

Pr. 420 = Pf Pr. 421

No 60

fo: Internal command pulse frequency [pps] No:Motor speed [r/min]

CAUTION Set the electronic gear in the range of 1/50 to 20.

61

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

In-position

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494)
"Setting example 1" The travel per pulse is = 0.01 (mm) in a drive system where the ballscrew pitch PB = 10 (mm) and the reduction ratio 1/n = 1 and the electronic gear ratio is s = 10 (mm) when the number of feedback pulses Pf = 4000 (pulse/rev). According to the following expression,

Pr. 420 Pr. 421

Pf

Pr. 420 Pr. 421 Pf 4000 10 4 1

0.01

Therefore, set "4" in Pr. 420 and "1" in Pr. 421. "Setting example 2" Find the internal command pulse frequency of the SF-V5R rated speed. Note that the command pulse scaling factor Pr. 420/Pr. 421 = 1. Assuming that the number of encoder pulses is 2048 (pulses/rev) (feedback pulse Pf = 2048 4),

fo

2048

No 60

Pr. 421 Pr. 420

204800 Therefore, the internal command pulse frequency is 204800 (pps).

<Relationship between position resolution and overall accuracy> Since overall accuracy (positioning accuracy of machine) is the sum of electrical error and mechanical error, normally take measures to prevent the electrical system error from affecting the overall error. As a guideline, refer to the following relationship.

1 to 1 5 10

: Positioning accuracy

<Stopping characteristic of motor> When parameters are used to run the motor, the command pulse frequency and motor speed have the relationship as shown in the chart on page 59, and as the motor speed decreases, pulses are accumulated in the deviation counter of the inverter. These pulses are called droop pulses () and the relationship between command frequency (fo) and position loop gain (Kp: Pr. 422) is as represented by the following expression.

fo [pulse] Kp

204800 [pulse] 25

(motor rated speed)

When the factory setting of Kp is 25s-1, the droop pulses () are 8192 pulses. Since the inverter has droop pulses during running, a stop settling time (ts) is needed from when the command has zeroed until the motor stops. Set the operation pattern in consideration of the stop settling time.

ts

1 [s] Kp

When the factory setting of Kp is 25s-1, the stop settling time (ts) is 0.12s. The positioning accuracy is (5 to 10) = [mm]

Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (Pr. 424)

1) 2) When the electronic gear ratio is large (about 10 or more times) and the speed is low, rotation will not be smooth, resulting in pulse-wise rotation. At such a time, set this parameter to smooth the rotation. When acceleration/deceleration time cannot be provided for the command pulses, a sudden change in command pulse frequency may cause an overshoot or error excess alarm. At such a time, set this parameter to provide acceleration/deceleration time. Normally set 0.

62

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494) 2.7.6 In-position width (Pr. 426)

The Y36 terminal signal acts as an in-position signal. The in-position signal turns on when the number of droop pulses becomes less than the setting.

2.7.7

Excessive level error (Pr. 427)

A position error becomes excessive when the droop pulses exceed the Pr. 427 setting. Error (E.OD) is displayed and the motor stops. When you decreased the position loop gain (Pr. 422) setting, increase the error excessive level setting. Also decrease the setting when you want to detect an error slightly earlier under large load. When Pr. 472="9999", an excessive position error (E.OD) is not output regardless of the droop pulses.
Parameter
427

Name
Excessive level error

Factory Setting
40

Setting Range
0 to 400, 9999

Remarks
9999: function invalid

2.7.8

Pulse monitor selection (Pr. 430)

The states of various pulses during operation are displayed in terms of the number of pulses. Set "6" in Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection" to display output frequency monitor.
Pr. 430
0 1 2 3 4 5 9999

Description
The cumulative command pulse value is displayed. The cumulative feedback pulse value is displayed. The droop pulses are monitored. The frequency monitor is displayed. (factory setting)

Display Range (FR-DU04-1)

Lower 4 digits Upper 4 digits Lower 4 digits Upper 4 digits Lower 4 digits Upper 4 digits

Display Range (FR-PU04V)

Lower 5 digits Upper 5 digits Lower 5 digits Upper 5 digits Lower 5 digits Upper 5 digits

REMARKS Count the number of pulses when the servo is on. The cumulative pulse value is cleared when the base is shut off or the clear signal is turned on. Related parameters
Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection" (Refer to page 110.)

2.7.9

Concept of position control gains

Easy gain tuning is available as an easy tuning method. For easy gain tuning, refer to the Instruction Manual (basic). If it does not produce any effect, make fine adjustment by using the following parameters. Set "0" in Pr. 819 "easy gain tuning" before setting the parameters below.

(1) Pr. 422 "position loop gain" (factory setting 25s-1)

Make adjustment when any of such phenomena as unusual vibration, noise and overcurrent of the motor/ machine occurs. Increasing the setting improves trackability for the position command and also improves servo rigidity at a stop, but oppositely makes an overshoot and vibration more liable to occur. Normally set this parameter within the range about 5 to 50.
No.
1

Phenomenon/Condition
Increase the Pr. 422 value. Slow response Overshoot, stop-time vibration or other instable phenomenon occurs. Pr. 422

Adjustment Method
Increase the value 3s-1 by 3s-1 until just before an overshoot, stop-time vibration or other instable phenomenon occurs, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Decrease the Pr. 422 value. Pr. 824 Decrease the value 3s-1 by 3s-1 until just before an overshoot, stop-time vibration or other instable phenomenon occurs, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.

(2) Pr. 423 "position feed forward gain" (factory setting 0)

This function is designed to cancel a delay caused by the droop pulses of the deviation counter. When a tracking delay for command pulses poses a problem, increase the setting gradually and use this parameter within the range where an overshoot or vibration will not occur. This function has no effects on servo rigidity at a stop. Normally set this parameter to 0.

63

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494) 2.7.10 Troubleshooting
Phenomenon
1

Cause

Corrective Action
(1) Check the wiring. (Refer to page 4)

Motor does not rotate. (1) The phase sequence of the motor or encoder wiring is wrong. (2) The control mode selection, Pr. 800, setting is improper. (3) The servo on signal or start signal (STF, STR) is not input. (4) The command pulses are not input correctly. (FR-V5AP)

(2) Check the Pr. 800 setting. (Factory setting is speed control) (3) Check that the signals are input normally. (4)-1 Check that the command pulses are input normally. (Check the cumulative command pulse value in Pr. 430.) (4)-2 Check the command pulse form and command pulse selection, Pr. 428, setting. (5) Check the position command right selection in Pr. 419.

Position shift occurs.

(5) The position command right selection, Pr. 419, setting is not correct. (6) When the position command right selection, Pr. 419, setting is 0, the position feed amount, Pr. 465 to Pr. 494, settings are not correct. (1) The command pulses are not input correctly.

(6) Check the position feed amounts in Pr. 465 to Pr. 494.

Motor or machine hunts. Machine operation is unstable.

(2) The command is affected by noise or the encoder feedback is compounded with noise. (1) The position loop gain is high. (2) The speed loop gain is high. (1) The acceleration/deceleration time setting has adverse effect.

Check the command pulse form and command pulse selection, Pr. 428, setting. (1)-2 Check that the command pulses are input normally. (Check the cumulative command pulse value in Pr. 430.) (2)-1 Decrease the PWM carrier frequency in Pr. 72. (2)-2 Change the shielded cable grounding place or raise the cable. (1) Decrease Pr. 422. (2)-1 Perform easy gain tuning. (2)-2 Decrease Pr. 820 and increase Pr. 821. (1) Decrease Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.

(1)-1

Related parameter reference pages

Pr. 800 "control system selection" (Refer to page 182.) Pr. 802 "pre-excitation selection" (Refer to page 95.) Pr. 820 "speed control P gain 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 7 "acceleration time" (Refer to page 91.) Pr. 8 "deceleration time" (Refer to page 91.) Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" (Refer to page 124.) Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1" (Refer to page 187.)

64

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494) 2.7.11 Position control is not exercised normally
(1) Position control

Position control is not exercised normally.

Have you checked the speed control items?

N
Check the speed control techniques.

Y
Does a position shift occur?

Y N
Set the electronic gear (Pr. 420, Pr. 421).

Have you made the electronic gear setting?

Y
Has the forward (reverse) rotation stroke end signal turned off before completion of positioning?

Y
Do not turn off the forward (reverse) rotation stroke end signal before completion of positioning.

Is the motor or machine hunting?

N
Is the position loop gain (Pr. 422) high?

N
Perform easy gain tuning. The speed control gain is high. Decrease the speed control P gain (Pr. 820). Increase the speed control integral time (Pr. 821).

Y
Decrease the position loop gain (Pr. 422). Is machine operation unstable?

Y
Torque is insufficient. Increase the excitation ratio (Pr. 854).

N
Please contact your sales representative.

REMARKS
The speed command of position control relates to speed control. Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details.

65

VECTOR CONTROL WITH ENCODER 2

MEMO

66

VECTOR CONTROL WITHOUT ENCODER

This chapter explains the basic "adjustment for vector control" for use of this product. Always read the instructions and other information before using the equipment.

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

Speed control (without encoder) .........................68 Fine adjustment of gains for speed control (without encoder) ..................................................69 Torque control (without encoder) ........................73 Fine adjustment for torque control (without encoder) .................................................................74 Gain adjustment for torque control (without encoder) .................................................................75

6
67

Speed control (without encoder)

This inverter can control a motor under speed or torque control. (As required, set "1" (extended function parameters valid) in Pr. 160 "extended function selection".) Refer to page 163 for details of Pr. 160 "extended function selection". (Since the factory setting of Pr. 77 is "0", perform parameter write in the PU mode or during a stop.)

3.1 Speed control (without encoder)

3.1.1 Outline of speed control

The basics of speed control are explained in the Instruction Manual (basic).
Set either of "10 (speed control) or 12 (speed-torque switchover)" in Pr. 800 "control system selection" to make speed control valid. Pr. 800 is factory-set to 0 (speed control, vector control with encoder) (Refer to page 182.)

Set the motor. (Refer to page 8.)

Perform offline auto tuuning.(Refer to page 132.)

Perform online auto tuuning. (start time tuning) (Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).)

Set the operation command. (Refer to page 129.)

Test run
As required (1) Gain adjustment 1) Perform easy gain tuning (Pr.819=2). (Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).)
To achieve faster responsiveness to the speed command change (when faster responsiveness is desired)

2) Perform speed feed forward control. (Refer to page72)

For further fine adjustment of gains.

3) Perform manual input gain adjustment. (Refer to page 70) (2) Set the torque restriction value.

For details of connection diagram, test run, and easy gain tuning, refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).

68

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control (without encoder)

3.2 Fine adjustment of gains for speed control (without encoder)

Make adjustment when vibration, noise or any other unfavorable phenomenon occurs due to large load inertia or gear backlash, for example, or when you want to exhibit the best performance that matches the machine.

3.2.1

Control block diagram

Speed Pr.902 Speed setting "speed setting No. 2 bias" signal Operation No.1 terminal at Pr.903 Maximum, minimum mode setting Pr.868="0" "speed setting No. 2 gain" Pr.73 speeds Pr.79 4,14 No.1 Pr.1 Speed No.2
+ + 0,10

FWD STF

REV STR
Starting speed

Pr.2

Speed setting filter

Override Pr.902 "speed setting No. 2 bias" Pr.903 "speed setting No. 2 gain" RT OFF Pr.822 ON Pr.832

jump Pr.31 to Pr.36

Acc/dec processing

Pr.13 LX

Pre-excitation

Pr.802 0 : 0 speed control 1 : Servo lock

* Pr.7, Pr.8

RH RM RL REX

Pr.29, Pr.20, Pr.21 Pr.44, Pr.45 RT ON Pr.140 to Pr.143 Pr.110, Pr.111 X9 ON Pr.380 to Pr.383 Pr.16 Jog acceleration/ deceleration

Option
PU04V DU04--1
Speed feed forward/model adaptive speed control selection

RT OFF

Speed feed Speed feed forward Pr.877 Load inertia Speed feed torque control forward filter forward gain ratio 1 Pr.881 Pr.880 Speed feed forward control Pr.878 Pr.879 RT 0
control OFF Speed P gain 1 ON Pr.820

Torque bias Pr.840 to Pr.848 Torque restriction input method selection Pr.810 + + + 0 Torque restriction Pr. 22, Pr.812 to Pr.817 (Torque control) Current control of iq IM

ON

+ -

X44 OFF Speed control X44 ON Speed control 0 Integration cleared to 0 P gain 2

integral time 1

Pr.821

Pr.830
X44 OFF integral time 2 X44 ON 0 Integration cleared to 0
Speed control

Pr.831

No.3 RT Pr.826 Torque setting filter Pr.836 Pr.904 Torque command No. 3 bias Pr.905 Torque command No. 3 gain
Speed estimator

: Parameters automatically tuned when tuning is selected in Pr.819 "easy gain tuning". Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details.

69

VECTOR CONTROL WITHOUT ENCODER 3

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control (without encoder) 3.2.2

1)

Concept of adjustment of manual input speed control gains

Proportional gain 200rad/s 120rad/s Pr.820 setting

Speed control P gain 1 Pr. 820 = 60% is equivalent to 120rad/s (speed responce of the motor alone). (factory setting) Increasing the proportional gain increases the response level. However, a too high gain will produce vibration and/or unusual noise. 2) Speed control integral time Pr. 821 = 0.333s (factory setting) Decreasing the integral time shortens the return time taken at a speed change. However, a too short time will generate an overshoot. When there is load inertia, the actual speed gain is as given below.

60% 100% (Factory setting)

Load variation

Speed Since increasing the proportional gain increases the response level, this speed variation decreases. Decreasing the integral time shortens this return time.

Also, when there is load inertia, the actual speed gain decreases as indicated below. Actual speed gain = speed gain of motor without load JM JM+J JM : Inertia of motor JL : Motor shaft-equivalent load inertia

3.2.3

Speed control gain adjustment procedure (Pr. 820, Pr. 821)

Set "0" in Pr. 819 "easy gain tuning". (Easy gain tuning is not performed.) Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for easy gain tuning. Refer to the following for manually input gain adjustment.

Manual input gain adjustment

Pr. 820 "speed control P (proportional) gain 1", Pr. 830 "speed control P (proportional) gain 2" Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1", Pr. 831 "speed control integral time 2" Make adjustment when any of such phenomena as unusual machine vibration/noise, low response level and overshoot has occurred. 1) First check the conditions and simultaneously change Pr. 820 "speed control P gain 1" value. 2) If you cannot make proper adjustment, change Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1" value and repeat step (1). CAUTION Pr. 830 "speed control P(proportional) gain 2" and Pr. 831 "speed control integral time 2" are made valid when the RT terminal is switched on. Make adjustments in the same way as Pr. 820 and Pr. 821.
No. Phenomenon/Condition Adjustment Method
Set the Pr. 820 and Pr. 821 values a little higher. When a speed rise is slow, increase the value 10% by 10% until just before Pr. 820 vibration/noise is produced, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. If an overshoot occurs, double the value until an overshoot does not occur, and Pr. 821 set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Set the Pr. 820 value a little lower and the Pr. 821 value a little higher. Decrease the value 10% by 10% until just before vibration/noise is not produced, Pr. 820 and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. If an overshoot occurs, double the value until an overshoot does not occur, and Pr. 821 set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Set the Pr. 820 value a little higher. When a speed rise is slow, increase the value 5% by 5% until just before Pr. 820 vibration/noise is produced, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Set the Pr. 821 value a little lower. Decrease the value by half until just before an overshoot or the unstable phenomenon does not occur, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Set the Pr. 821 value a little higher. Double the value until just before an overshoot or the unstable phenomenon does not occur, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.

Large load inertia

Vibration/noise generated from mechanical system

Slow response Long return time (response time) Overshoot or unstable phenomenon occurs.

70

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control (without encoder) 3.2.4 Troubleshooting
Phenomenon Cause Corrective Action
(1) Check that a correct speed command comes from the command device. Decrease the PWM carrier frequency in Pr. 72. (2) Readjust the speed command bias and gain in Pr. 902, Pr. 903, Pr. 917, and Pr. 918. (1)-1 Increase the torque restriction value. ( Refer to the torque restriction of speed control in the Instruction Manual (basic).) Insufficient capacity When the load is heavy, speed deviation will occur under P (proportional) control. Select PI control. Check that a correct speed command comes from the command device. (Take measures against noises.) Decrease the PWM carrier frequency in Pr. 72. Increase the speed setting filter in Pr. 822. Increase the torque restriction value. ( Refer to the torque restriction of speed control in the Instruction Manual (basic).) Return the excitation ratio in Pr. 854 to the factory setting (100%). Adjust Pr. 820 and Pr. 821. (Refer to page 48.) Perform speed feed forward control. Decrease Pr. 820 and increase Pr. 821. Perform speed feed forward control. Decrease Pr. 824. (Refer to page 55.) Increase the torque restriction value. ( Refer to the torque restriction of speed control in the Instruction Manual (basic).) Return the excitation ratio in Pr. 854 to the factory setting. Perform speed feed forward control. Set the acceleration/deceleration time that meets the load. Adjust Pr. 820 and Pr. 821. (Refer to page 70.) Perform speed feed forward control. Change the acceleration/deceleration time to an optimum value.

Motor does not run at (1) The speed command from the correct speed. command device is incorrect. (Speed command does The speed command is not match actual speed) compounded with noise. (2) The speed command value does not match the inverter-recognized value. Speed does not rise to (1) Insufficient torque. the speed command. Torque restriction is actuated.

2 (2) Only P (proportional) control is selected. Motor speed is unstable. (1) The speed command varies.

(1)-2 (2)

(1)-1 (1)-2 (1)-3 (2)-1

(2)-2 (3) The speed control gains do not match the machine. (machine resonance) (1)The speed control gain is high. (3)-1 (3)-2 (1)-1 (1)-2 (2) (1)-1

Motor or machine hunts (vibration/noise is produced).

Acceleration/ deceleration time does not match the setting. 5

(2) High torque control gain. (1) Insufficient torque.

(1)-2 (1)-3 (2) (1)-1 (1)-2 (2)

(2) Large load inertia. Machine operation is unstable 6 (1) The speed control gains do not match the machine. (2) Slow response because of improper acceleration/ deceleration time of the inverter. (1) Adverse effect of high carrier frequency. (2) Adverse effect of weak excitation. (3) Low speed control gain. The error between R1 of the motor and R1 of the inverter is excessive. (E.11 error)

Speed fluctuates at low speed. 7

(1) Decrease the PWM carrier frequency in Pr. 72. (2) Return the excitation ratio in Pr. 854 to the factory setting. (3) Increase Pr. 820 "speed control P gain". Perform offline auto tuning again and perform start time tuning.

Motor does not decelerate

Related parameter reference pages

Pr. 71 "applied motor" (Refer to page 123.) Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" (Refer to page 124.) Pr. 800 "control system selection" (Refer to page 182.) Pr. 820 "speed control P gain 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 822 "speed setting filter 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" (Refer to page 10.) Pr. 854 "excitation ratio" (Refer to page 193.) Pr. 902 "speed setting No. 2 bias" (Refer to page 202.) Pr. 903 "speed setting No. 2 gain" (Refer to page 202.) Pr. 917 "No. 1 terminal bias (speed)" (Refer to page 202.) Pr. 918 "No. 1 terminal gain (speed)" (Refer to page 202.)

71

VECTOR CONTROL WITHOUT ENCODER 3

(2) Insufficient torque.

Fine adjustment of gains for speed control (without encoder) 3.2.5 Speed feed forward control (Pr. 877 to Pr. 881)

By making parameter setting, select the speed feed forward control. The speed feed forward control enhances the trackability of the motor in response to a speed command change.
Parameter
877 878 879 880 881

Name
Speed feed forward control/model adaptive speed control selection Speed feed forward filter Speed feed forward torque restriction Load inertia ratio Speed feed forward gain

Factory Setting
0 0s 150% 7 0%

Setting Range
0,1,2 0 to 1s 0 to 400% 0,1 to 200 times 0 to 1000%

Load inertia ratio 1 J S Pr.880 Speed feed forward gain Pr.881

Pr.879 Speed feed Pr.878 forward torque Speed feed restriction forward filter

Speed command 0 1 Pr.877

+ -

Speed control P gain 1 Pr.820 Actual speed controller Speed control integral time 1 Pr.821

+ + iq current control IM

Speed estimator

Pr. 877 Setting

0

Description
Normal speed control is exercised. Speed feed forward control is exercised. Calculate required torque in responce to the acceleration/deceleration command for the inertia ratio set in Pr. 880 and generate torque immediately. When inertia ratio estimation has been made by easy gain tuning, the inertia ratio estimation result is used as the Pr. 880 setting, from which the speed feed forward is calculated. When the speed feed forward gain is 100%, the calculation result of the speed feed forward in 1) is reflected as-is. If the speed command changes suddenly, large torque is generated due to the speed feed forward calculation. The maximum value of the speed feed forward is restricted using Pr. 879. Using Pr. 878, the speed feed forward result can be dulled by the primary delay filter. Function is invalid.

For details of easy gain tuning, refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details. Related parameters
Pr. 820 "speed control P gain 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 830 "speed control P gain 2" (Refer to page 187.) Pr. 831 "speed control integral time 2" (Refer to page 187.)

72

Torque control (without encoder)

3.3 Torque control (without encoder)

3.3.1 Outline of torque control

The basics of torque control are explained in the Instruction Manual (basic).
Set any of "11 (torque control) and 12 (speed-torque switchover)" in Pr. 800 "control system selection" to make torque control valid. (The parameter is factory-set to enable speed control. Set "11" in Pr. 800 to make torque control valid.) (Refer to page182.)

Set the motor. (Refer to page 8.)

Perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 99)

Perform online auto tuning (start time tuning).(Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic))

Set the speed restriction value.(Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic)

Test run
Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for the details of connection diagram, test run, and online auto tuning.

73

VECTOR CONTROL WITHOUT ENCODER 3

Set the torque command. (terminal 3) When using the parameter or communication to input the torque command, refer to Pr. 804 "torque command right" (page 184). When giving the torque command from the option (FR-A5NC, FR-V5AH, FR-A5AX, FR-V5AP), refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding option.

Fine adjustment for torque control (without encoder)

3.4 Fine adjustment for torque control (without encoder)

Current loop gain parameter for adjusting torque control operation state is available with the FR-V500 series. Stable operation is possible with the factory-set parameter. Refer to the next page and adjust the parameters when torque pulsation or any other unfavorable phenomenon occurs depending on the machine and operating conditions or when you want to exhibit the best performance that matches the machine.

3.4.1

Control block diagram

Speed estimated value < speed restriction value

Torque command right selection Pr.804 No. 3 RT Pr.826 Torque setting filter Pr.836 OFF ON Pr. 904, torque command No. 3 bias Pr. 905, torque command No. 3 gain
Parameter

Constant output region torque characteristic selection

+ -

RT Torque OFF control

p gain 1 Pr. 824

+ IM
Torque control integral time 1 Pr. 825 Torque control integral time 2 Pr. 835

Pr.803 ON

Torque control p gain 2 Pr. 834

+ +

Torque detection filter

RT

Pr.805 torque command value/RAM Pr.806 torque command value/E2PROM

Pr.827 Pr.837

OFF ON

FR-V5AP Pulse train option

Pr.432 pulse train torque command bias Pr.433 pulse train torque command gain Pr.805 torque command value/RAM Pr.806 torque command value/E2PROM

FR-A5NC option

Pr.447 digital torque command bias FR-A5AX digital input option Pr.448 digital torque command gain
Pr.902 speed setting No. 2 bias Pr.903 speed setting No. 2 gain

speed restriction selection Pr. 807

Max./min. speed 0 External No. 2

PU

Pr.1 Pr.2 Pr.79

Acc/dec processing

+ -

Speed control

2 No. 1

PU/external

Speed estimated value speed restriction value

Pr. 917 No. 1 terminal bias Pr. 918 No. 1 terminal gain RT OFF ON RH RM RL REX PU
Pr. 808 forward rotation speed restriction Pr. 809 reverse rotation speed restriction

Speed estimator

Speed setting filter

Pr.7, Pr.8 Pr.29, Pr.20, Pr.21 Pr.44, Pr.45 RT ON Pr.140 to Pr.143 Pr.110, Pr.111 X9 ON Pr.380 to Pr.383 Pr.16 Jog acceleration/ deceleration

Pr.822 Pr.832 0 1

Speed restriction direct setting

74

Gain adjustment for torque control (without encoder)

3.5 Gain adjustment for torque control (without encoder)

When exercising torque control, perform online auto tuning (start time tuning "Pr. 95 = 1"). (Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).)

3.5.1

Concept of torque control gains

(1) Torque control P gain 1 2000rad/s when Pr. 824 = 100% (factory setting). (2) Torque control integral time 1 Pr. 825 = 5ms (factory setting)

3.5.2

Gain adjustment procedure

Refer to the following table for manual input gain adjustment. CAUTION Normally, the current loop gains in Pr. 824 and Pr. 825 need not be changed. Fully note that unnecessarily changing the settings of the current loop gains will result in unstable phenomena and/or reduced response level.

Manual input gain adjustment

Pr. 824 "torque control P gain 1", Pr. 834 "torque control P gain 2" Pr. 825 "torque control integral time 1", Pr. 835 "torque control integral time 2" Make adjustment when any of such phenomena as unusual machine vibration/noise and overcurrent has occurred. (1) First check the conditions and simultaneously change Pr. 824 "torque control P gain 1" value. (2) If you cannot make proper adjustment, change Pr. 825 "torque control integral time 1" value and repeat step (1). CAUTION Pr. 834 "torque control P gain 2" and Pr. 835 "torque control integral time 2" are made valid when the RT terminal is switched on. Make adjustments in the same way as Pr. 824 and Pr. 825.
No. Phenomenon/Condition Adjustment Method
Set Pr. 824 a little lower and Pr. 825 a little higher. First lower Pr. 824 and check the motor for unusual vibration/noise and overcurrent. If the problem still persists, increase Pr. 825. Decrease the value 10% by 10% until just before the phenomenon on the left is improved, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Pr. 824 Note that a too low value will produce current ripples, causing the motor to generate synchronous sound. Double the value until just before the phenomenon on the left is improved, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Pr. 825 Note that a too high value will produce current ripples, causing the motor to generate synchronous sound. Set Pr. 824 a little lower and Pr. 825 a little higher. First lower Pr. 824 and check the motor for unusual vibration/noise and overcurrent. If the problem still persists, increase Pr. 825. Decrease the value 10% by 10% until just before an overcurrent does not occur, Pr. 824 and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value. Double the value until just before the phenomenon on the left is improved, and Pr. 825 set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.

Unusual noise generated from motor Unusual current flowing

Overcurrent occurs.

75

VECTOR CONTROL WITHOUT ENCODER 3

Gain adjustment for torque control (without encoder) 3.5.3 Troubleshooting

Phenomenon
Torque control is not exercised normally.

Cause
(1) The phase sequence of the motor or encoder wiring is wrong. (2) The control mode selection, Pr. 800, setting is improper. (3) The speed restriction value is not input.

Corrective Action
(1) Check the wiring. (Refer to page 4.)

(2) Check the Pr. 800 setting. (The factory setting is speed control) (3) Set the speed restriction value. (If the speed restriction value is not input, the motor will not rotate since the speed restriction value is regarded as 0r/min.) (4) Check that the command device gives a correct torque command. Decrease the PWM carrier frequency in Pr. 72. Increase the torque setting filter in Pr. 826. (5) Set start time tuning of Pr. 95.

(4) The torque command varies.

When the torque command is small, the motor rotates in the direction opposite to the start signal. Normal torque control cannot be exercised during acceleration/ deceleration. The motor vibrates.

(5) Torque variation due to the change in the motor temperature. (6) The torque command does not match the inverter-recognized value. The offset calibration of the torque command does not match.

(6) Recalibrate the torque command bias and gain in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905. Recalibrate the torque command bias in Pr. 904.

Output torque is not linear in response to the torque command.

Since the speed restriction value changes with the setting of the acceleration/deceleration time in Pr. 7, Pr. 8, the speed restriction may be activated. (When the speed restriction is activated, torque control cannot be exercised.) Insufficient torque.

Reduce the acceleration/deceleration time. Alternatively, set the acceleration/deceleration time to 0. (Speed restriction during acceleration/deceleration is speed restriction during constant speed)

Return the excitation ratio to the factory setting.

Related parameter reference pages

Pr. 7 "acceleration time" (Refer to page 91.) Pr. 8 "deceleration time" (Refer to page 91.) Pr. 800 "control system selection" (Refer to page 182.) Pr. 802 "pre-excitation selection" (Refer to page 95.) Pr. 810 "torque restriction input method selection" (Refer to page 100.) Pr. 826 "torque setting filter 1" (Refer to page 188.) Pr. 904 "torque command No. 3 bias" (Refer to page 202.) Pr. 905 "torque command No. 3 gain" (Refer to page 202.)

For online auto tuning, refer to the Instruction Manual (basic)

76

PARAMETERS

This chapter explains the "parameters" for use of this product. Always read the instructions and other information before using the equipment.

The following marks indicate availability of parameters under each control.

with Encoder without Encoder

Speed
with Encoder without Encoder

: Available under speed control in the vector control with encoder system and vector control without encoder system : Available under speed control in the vector control with encoder : Available under speed control in the vector control without encoder : Available under torque control in the vector control with encoder system and vector control without encoder system : Available under torque control in the vector control with encoder : Available under torque control in the vector control without encoder : Available under position control Conditional . . . Conditional positioning control by parameter setting PLC . . . . . . . . . Positioning control from the PLC SSC . . . . . . . . . Positioning control from the motion controller (SSCNET) : Available under position control by parameter settings

Speed
with Encoder without Encoder

Speed
with Encoder without Encoder

Torque
with Encoder

without Encoder

Torque
with Encoder without Encoder

Torque
Conditional PLC SSC

Position

Condi- PLC SSC tional

Position

6
77

Parameter lists

4.1 Parameter lists

PARAMETERS
The inverter is factory-set to display only the simple mode parameters. Set Pr. 160 "extended function selection" as required.
Parameter
160

Name
Extended function selection

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0 1

Remarks
Accessible to only the simple mode parameters. Accessible to all parameters.

CAUTION The blacked out parameters in the table below indicate simple mode parameters. The shaded parameters in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (factory setting) is set in Pr. 77 (parameter write disable selection). *: Accessible when Pr. 77 = 801.

Function

Parameter No.

Name

Setting Range

Minimum Setting Increments 0.1% 1r/min 1r/min 0.01Hz 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 0.1s/0.01s

Factory Setting 3%/2%/1% (2.2K/ 3.7K, 7.5K/ 15K or more) 1800r/min 0r/min 60Hz 1800r/min 750r/min 150r/min 5s/15s (3.7K or less /7.5K or less) 5s/15s (3.7K or less /7.5K or less) Rated inverter output current 15r/min 0.5s 1% 15r/min 150r/min 0.5s 0 9999 1800r/min 0 150% 9999 9999 9999 9999 0

Refer To 89 89 89 90 90 90 90 91

Custo mer Setting

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Standard operation functions

Torque boost (manual) Maximum speed Minimum speed Base frequency Multi-speed setting (high speed) Multi-speed setting (middle speed) Multi-speed setting (low speed) Acceleration time Deceleration time Electronic thermal O/L relay DC injection brake operation speed DC injection brake operation time DC injection brake voltage Starting speed Jog speed setting Jog acceleration/deceleration time MRS input selection Base frequency voltage

0 to 30% 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min 20 to 200Hz 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600s/0 to 360s 0 to 3600s/0 to 360s 0 to 500A 0 to 1500r/min, 9999 0 to 0.5s 0 to 30% 0 to 1500r/min 0 to 1500r/min 0 to 3600s/0 to 360s 0, 2 0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999

Basic functions

0.1s/0.01s 0.01A 0.1r/min 0.1s 0.1% 0.1r/min 0.1r/min 0.1s/0.01s 1 0.1V 1r/min 1 0.1% 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 1

91 93 95 95 95 97 98 98 98 90 91 91 100 90 90 90 90 101

11 12 13 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28

Operation selection functions

Acceleration/deceleration reference 1 to 3600r/min speed Acceleration/deceleration time increments 0, 1 0 to 400% Torque restriction level Multi-speed setting (speed 4) Multi-speed setting (speed 5) Multi-speed setting (speed 6) Multi-speed setting (speed 7) Multi-speed input compensation
0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0, 1

78

Parameter lists
Function Parameter No. Name Setting Range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0, 1, 2 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0, 1 to 9998 0 to 100% 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600s/0 to 360s 0 to 3600s/0 to 360s, 9999 0 to 3600r/min 0, 5 to 12, 17 to 20, 23, 24, 32 to 35, 38, 100 0 to 3, 5 to 12, 17, 18 1 to 3, 5 to 12, 17, 18, 21, 32 to 34, 36 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 500A 0, 0.1 to 5s, 9999 0 to 60s 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 7, 8 0 to 5 0 to 10, 101 to 110 0 to 10s 0 0 to 15%/0 to 30%/0% 0, 3 to 8, 10, 13 to 18, 30, 33, 34 1 to 6 0, 4, 10, 14 0 to 3, 14 to 17 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 2 0 to 4, 6 to 8 0.4 to 55kW 2, 4, 6 0 to , 9999 0 to 1000V 20 to 200Hz 0 to , 9999 0 to , 9999 0 to , 9999 0 to , 9999 0 to , 9999 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 101 1 1 0.1V 0.01Hz Minimum Setting Increments 1 1 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 1 0.1% 1r/min 1r/min 0.1s/0.01s 0.1s/0.01s 1r/min 1 1 1 1r/min 0.01A 0.1s 0.1s 1 1 1 1 0.1s 1 0.1% 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01kW 1 Factory Setting 0 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 10% 300r/min 9999 5s 9999 750r/min 0 1 1 1800r/min Inverter rated output current 9999 1.0s 0 0 0 0 1s 0 0% 30 1 0 14 0 0 0 Inverter capacity 4 9999 575V 60Hz 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 0 Refer To 102 105 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 108 108 108 101 101 108 110 110 110 113 113 114 114 116 118 121 121 121 121 105 123 124 125 127 128 129 129 132 132 136 132 132 136 136 136 136 136 139 132
Custo mer Setting

29 30 31 32
Operation selection functions

Acceleration/deceleration pattern Regenerative function selection Speed jump 1A Speed jump 1B Speed jump 2A Speed jump 2B Speed jump 3A Speed jump 3B Speed display Up-to-speed sensitivity Speed detection Speed detection for reverse rotation Second acceleration/deceleration time Second deceleration time Second speed detection DU/PU main display data selection PU level display data selection DA1 terminal function selection Speed monitoring reference Current monitoring reference Restart coasting time Restart cushion time Remote setting function selection Intelligent mode selection Retry selection Number of retries at alarm occurrence Retry waiting time Retry count display erasure Special regenerative brake duty Applied motor PWM frequency selection Speed setting signal Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection Parameter write disable selection Reverse rotation prevention selection Operation mode selection Motor capacity Number of motor poles Motor excitation current (no load current) * Rated motor voltage Rated motor frequency Motor constant R1 * Motor constant R2 * Motor constant L1 * Motor constant L2 * Motor constant X * Online auto tuning selection Auto tuning setting/status

33 34 35 36 37 41 42 43

Output terminal functions

Second functions Output terminal function

44 45 50 52 53

Display functions

54 55 56

Automatic restart Additional function

57 58 59 60 65 67 68 69 70

Operation selection functions

71 72 73 75 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 90 91 92 93 94 95 96

Motor constants

Motor constants

79

PARAMETERS 4

PARAMETERS

Parameter lists
Function Parameter No. Name Setting Range 0 to 3600/0 to 360s 0 to 3600/0 to 360s, 9999 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 31 48, 96, 192 0, 1, 10, 11 0, 1, 2 0 to 10, 9999 0 to 999.8s, 9999 0 to 150ms, 9999 0, 1, 2 10, 11, 30, 31 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1 to 3600s, 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 0 to 100% 0.01 to 10s, 9999 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 360s 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 360s 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 0 to 200% 0 to 10s 0 to 200.0% 0 to 1s 0 to 31, 100, 101 0 to 25s, 9999 1 to 3, 5 to 12, 17, 18, 21, 32 to 34, 36 0, 1 0, 1, 10 0 to 20s 0 to 100% 0 to 200% Minimum Setting Increments 0.1s/0.01s 0.1s/0.01s 1r/min 1 1 1 1 1 0.1s 1ms 1 1 0.1% 0.1s 0.1% 0.1% 0.01% 0.01s 1r/min 0.1s 1r/min 0.1s 1 0.1% 0.1s 0.1% 0.01s 1 0.1s 1 1 1 0.1s 0.1% 0.1% Factory Setting 5s 9999 1800r/min 0 192 1 2 1 9999 9999 1 10 100% 1s 9999 9999 0% 9999 30r/min 0.5s 30r/min 0.5s 0 150% 0 5.0% 0.5s 1 0 1 0 0 0s 0% 150% Refer To 91 91 108 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 102 102 102 102 106 159 159 160 160 161 162 110 163 114 114 114 114
Custo mer Setting

PARAMETERS

110
Third functions

Third acceleration/deceleration time Third deceleration time Third speed detection Communication station number Communication speed Stop bit length/data length Parity check presence/absence Number of communication retries Communication check time interval Waiting time setting CR, LF presence/absence selection PID action selection PID proportional band PID integral time Upper limit Lower limit PID action set point for PU operation PID differential time Backlash acceleration stopping speed Backlash acceleration stopping time Backlash deceleration stopping speed Backlash deceleration stopping time Speed setting switchover Parameter for the option (FR-PU04V). Output current detection level Output current detection period Zero current detection level Zero current detection period Stall prevention operation selection OL signal output timer DA2 terminal function selection Extended function selection Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection First cushion time for restart First cushion voltage for restart Restart current restriction level

111
Output terminal function

116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 128 129 130

Communication functions

PID control

Backlash

Display functions

Current detection

Sub functions

131 132 133 134 140 141 142 143 144 145 150 151 152 153 156 157 158 160

Display functions

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Maintenance functions Initial monitor

162 163 164 165 168 169 171 180 181 182 183 187 190 191 192 195

Maker setting parameters. Do not make setting. Actual operation hour meter clear DI1 terminal function selection DI2 terminal function selection DI3 terminal function selection DI4 terminal function selection STR terminal function selection DO1 terminal function selection DO2 terminal function selection DO3 terminal function selection ABC terminal function selection Multi-speed setting (speed 8) Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
0 0 to 3, 5, 8 to 12, 14 to 16, 20, 22 to 28, 42 to 44, 9999 0 to 8, 10 to 16, 20, 25 to 27, 30 to 37, 39, 40 to 44, 96 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120,125 to 127, 130 to 137, 139, 140 to 144, 196 to 199, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1r/min 1r/min 0 0 1 2 3 9999 0 1 165 2 99 9999 9999 90 90 163 163

Terminal assignment functions

Multi-speed operation

232 233

80

Parameter lists
Function Parameter No. Name Setting Range 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0, 1 0, 1 0 to 100s, 9999 0, 1 0 to 200% 0 to 200% 0, 1 0 to 600r/min 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600/0 to 360s 0 to 3600/0 to 360s, 9999 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 900r/min 0 to 200% 0 to 2s 0 to 5s 0 to 900r/min 0 to 5s 0, 1 0 to 900r/min, 9999 0 to 100.0% 0.00 to 1.00s 0, 1, 2 0, 1 0, 1, 2, 9999 0 to 1000r/min 0 to 16383 0 to 8192 0, 1, 2 to 127 0 to 16383 0.1 to 100 0 to 4200r/min 0 to 50% 0 to 50% 0 to 50% 0 to 50% 1, 2, 10, 11, 12 0 to 1000% 0 to 20.0s 0 to 100.0% 0 to 1000 0, 1 0 to 32767 Minimum Setting Increments 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 1r/min 1 1 0.1s 1 0.1% 0.1% 1 1r/min 1r/min 0.1s/0.01s 0.1s/0.01s 1r/min 1r/min 0.1% 0.1s 0.1s 1r/min 0.1s 1 1r/min 0.01% 0.01s 1 1 1 1r/min 1 1 1 1 0.1 1r/min 1% 1% 1% 1% 1 1 0.001 0.1 1 1 1 Factory Setting 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 0 9999 1 50% 150% 0 90r/min 1800r/min 5s 9999 1800r/min 20r/min 130% 0.3s 0.3s 25r/min 0.3s 0 9999 0% 0.3s 0 0 9999 200r/min 0 11 0 0 10 4200r/min 0% 0% 0% 0% 0 60% 0.333s 1% 20 0 1 Refer To 90 90 90 90 90 90 124 167 167 168 169 169 169 169 169 169 169 169 118 118 118 118 118 118 118 118 171 171 171
Custo mer Setting

234 235
Multi-speed operation

Multi-speed setting (speed 10) Multi-speed setting (speed 11) Multi-speed setting (speed 12) Multi-speed setting (speed 13) Multi-speed setting (speed 14) Multi-speed setting (speed 15) Soft-PWM setting Cooling fan operation selection Stop selection Output phase failure protection selection Override bias Override gain Power failure stop selection Subtracted speed at deceleration start Subtraction starting speed Power-failure deceleration time 1 Power-failure deceleration time 2 Power-failure deceleration time switchover speed Brake opening speed Brake opening current Brake opening current detection time Brake operation time at start Brake operation speed Brake operation time at stop Deceleration detection function selection Overspeed detection speed Droop gain Droop filter constant Droop function activation selection E2PROM write selection Stop position command selection Orientation switchover speed Internal stop position command Orientation in-position zone External position command selection Position shift Orientation position loop gain Overspeed detection level Acceleration S pattern 1 Deceleration S pattern 1 Acceleration S pattern 2 Deceleration S pattern 2 Orientation selection Orientation speed gain (P term) Orientation speed integral time Orientation speed gain (D term) Orientation deceleration ratio Position command right selection Command pulse scaling factor numerator

236 237 238 239

Sub functions Stop selection function Operation selection function Additional functions

240 244 250 251 252 253 261 262 263

Power failure stop functions

264 265 266 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285

Brake sequence

Droop Additional function

286 287 288 342 350 351 356 357 360 361 362 374 380 381 382 383 393 396 397 398 399 419 420

172 172 172 172 172 172 172 179 102 102 102 102 172 172 172 172 172 58 58

Orientation

Control system function

S-pattern C

Orientation

Position control

81

PARAMETERS 4

141

PARAMETERS

Parameter lists
Function Parameter No. Name Setting Range 0 to 32767 0 to 150s-1 0 to 100% 0 to 50s 0 to 5s 0 to 32767 pulses 0 to 400K, 9999 0 to 5, 9999 0, 3 to 8,10, 13 to 18, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 9999 10, 11, 12, 20, 9999 0 to 500A, 9999 0.4 to 55kW (0.5 to 75HP) 2, 4, 6 0 to , 9999 0 to 1000V 20 to 200Hz 0 to , 9999 0 to , 9999 0 to , 9999 0 to , 9999 0 to , 9999 0, 1, 2 0.1V 0.01Hz Minimum Setting Increments 1 1s-1 1% 0.001s 0.001s 1 pulse 1K 1 1 1 0.01A 0.01kW (0.01HP) 1 Factory Setting 1 25s-1 0% 0s 0s 100 pulses 40K 9999 9999 9999 9999 Inverter capacity 4 9999 575V 60Hz 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 Refer To 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 41 41 93 41 41 41 41 41 135 135 135 135 135 132
Custo mer Setting

PARAMETERS

421 422 423

Position control

424 425 426 427 430 450 451 452 453

Command pulse scaling factor denominator Position loop gain Position feed forward gain Position command acceleration/ deceleration time constant Position feed forward command filter In-position width Excessive level error Pulse monitor selection Second applied motor Second motor control method selection Second electronic thermal O/L relay Second motor capacity Number of second motor poles Second exciting current Rated second motor voltage Rated second motor frequency Second motor constant (R1) Second motor constant (R2) Second motor constant (L1) Second motor constant (L2) Second motor constant (X) Second auto tuning setting/status

Motor constants

454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463

82

Parameter lists
Function Parameter No. Name Setting Range 0 to 360.0s 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0, 1 0 to 4095 0 to 4095 0 to 5, 20 0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0 to 4 600 to 1400% Minimum Setting Increments 0.1s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1% 1% 1 1r/min 1r/min Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1000% 1000% 0 1800r/min 9999 Refer To 58 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 181 181 181 182 182 95 100 184 184 184 185 185 185
Custo mer Setting

464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 800 801 802 803
Operation selection functions

Position control

Remote output

804 805 806 807 808 809

Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time First position feed amount lower 4 digits First position feed amount upper 4 digits Second position feed amount lower 4 digits Second position feed amount upper 4 digits Third position feed amount lower 4 digits Third position feed amount upper 4 digits Fourth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fourth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fifth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fifth position feed amount upper 4 digits Sixth position feed amount lower 4 digits Sixth position feed amount upper 4 digits Seventh position feed amount lower 4 digits Seventh position feed amount upper 4 digits Eighth position feed amount lower 4 digits Eighth position feed amount upper 4 digits Ninth position feed amount lower 4 digits Ninth position feed amount upper 4 digits Tenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Tenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Eleventh position feed amount lower 4 digits Eleventh position feed amount upper 4 digits Twelfth position feed amount lower 4 digits Twelfth position feed amount upper 4 digits Thirteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Thirteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fourteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fourteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fifteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fifteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Remote output selection Remote output data 1 Remote output data 2 Control system selection Torque characteristic selection Pre-excitation selection Constant output region torque characteristic selection Torque command right selection Torque command value (RAM)

Torque command value (RAM, E2PROM) 600 to 1400% 0, 1, 2 Speed restriction selection 0 to 3600r/min Forward rotation speed restriction Reverse rotation speed restriction
0 to 3600r/min, 9999

83

PARAMETERS 4

PARAMETERS

Parameter lists
Function Parameter No. Name Setting Range 0, 1 0 to 400%, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999 1 to 15 0, 1, 2 0 to 1000% 0 to 20s 0 to 5s+ 0 to 0.1s 0 to 200% 0 to 500ms 0 to 5s 0 to 0.1s 0 to 1000% 0 to 1000%, 9999 0 to 20s, 9999 0 to 5s, 9999 0 to 0.1s, 9999 0 to 200%, 9999 0 to 500ms, 9999 0 to 5s, 9999 0 to 0.1s, 9999 0 to 3, 9999 600 to 1400%, 9999 600 to 1400%, 9999 600 to 1400%, 9999 0 to 5s, 9999 0 to 5s, 9999 0 to 10V, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999 0 to 200% 0, 1 0 to 4096 0, 1 0 to 100% 0 to , 9999 0 to , 9999 0 to 31 0 to 3 0 to 400% 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 400% 0 to 5s 0, 1, 2, 5, 9999 0 to 1500r/min, 9999 0 to 100s 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 200% 0, 1 0, 1 Minimum Setting Increments 1 0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 1 1 1% 0.001s 0.001s 0.001s 1% 0.1ms 0.001s 0.001s 1% 1% 0.001s 0.001s 0.001s 1% 0.1ms 0.001s 0.001s 1 1% 1% 1% 0.001s 0.01s 0.1V 1% 1% 0.1% 1 1 1 1% 1 1 1 1 0.1% 1r/min 0.1% 0.001s 1 1r/min 0.1s 1r/min 0.1% 1 1 Factory Setting 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 2 0 60% 0.333s 0s 0.001s 100% 5ms 0s 0s 60% 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 100% 0 1024 1 100% 9999 9999 0 0 150% 45r/min 150% 0.05s 0 9999 12s 600r/min 150% 0 0 Refer To 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 187 187 187 187 187 188 188 188 188 189 51 187 187 187 188 188 188 188 189 189 189 189 189 189 189 189 189 189 205 95 10 10 193 136 132 193 193 194 194 113 195 195 196 196 197 197 198 93
Custo mer Setting

PARAMETERS

Control system functions

810 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 840 841 842

Torque restriction input method selection Torque restriction level (regeneration) Torque restriction level (3rd quadrant) Torque restriction level (4th quadrant) Torque restriction level 2 Acceleration torque restriction level Deceleration torque restriction level Easy gain tuning response level setting Easy gain tuning selection Speed control P gain 1 Speed control integral time 1 Speed setting filter 1 Speed detection filter 1 Torque control P gain 1 Torque control integral time 1 Torque setting filter 1 Torque detection filter 1 Model speed control gain Speed control P gain 2 Speed control integral time 2 Speed setting filter 2 Speed detection filter 2 Torque control P gain 2 Torque control integral time 2 Torque setting filter 2 Torque detection filter 2 Torque bias selection Torque bias 1 Torque bias 2 Torque bias 3 Torque bias filter Torque bias operation time Torque bias balance compensation Fall-time torque bias No. 3 bias Fall-time torque bias No. 3 gain Analog input offset adjustment * Brake operation selection for vector control without encoder Number of encoder pulses Encoder rotation direction Excitation ratio Torque current * Second torque current Notch filter frequency Notch filter depth Torque detection Low speed detection Torque monitoring reference DA1 output filter No. 1 terminal function assignment Speed deviation level Speed deviation time Speed restriction OLT level setting Fault definition Thermal relay protector input

Torque biases

843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 854 859 860 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 870

Additional functions

Display functions Terminal assignment function

Protective functions

Operation selection functions

871 873 874 875 876

84

Parameter lists
Function Parameter No. Name Setting Range 0, 1, 2 0 to 1s 0 to 400% 0, 1 to 200 times 0 to 1000% 0 to 9998, 9999 0 to 9998 0 Minimum Setting Increments 1 0.01s 0.1% 0.1 1% 10hr 10hr 1 Factory Setting 0 0s 150% 7 0% 9999 0 0 Refer To 51 51 51 51 51 199 199 199 200 200 0 to 10V, 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 10V, 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 10V, 0 to 400% 0 to 10V, 0 to 400% 0 to 10V, 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 10V, 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 10V, 0 to 400% 0 to 10V, 0 to 400% 0, 1 0.1r/min 1r/min 0.1% 0.1% 0.1r/min 1r/min 0.1% 0.1% 1 0V, 0r/min 10V, 1800r/min 0V, 0% 10V, 150% 0V, 0r/min 10V, 1800r/min 0V, 0% 10V, 150% 1 202 202 202 202 202 202 202 202 205
Custo mer Setting

877
Control system functions

Maintenance functions

878 879 880 881 890 891 892 900 901 902 903 904

Speed feed forward control/model adaptive speed control selection Speed feed forward filter Speed feed forward torque restriction Load inertia ratio Speed feed forward gain Maintenance output setting time Maintenance output timer Maintenance output signal clear DA1 terminal calibration DA2 terminal calibration Speed setting No. 2 bias Speed setting No. 2 gain Torque command No. 3 bias Torque command No. 3 gain No. 1 terminal bias (speed) No. 1 terminal gain (speed) No. 1 terminal bias (torque/magnetic flux) No. 1 terminal gain (torque/magnetic flux) PU buzzer control Parameter for the option (FR-PU04V).

Calibration functions

905 917 918 919 920

Additional functions

990 991

85

PARAMETERS 4

PARAMETERS

At-a-glance guide to functions

4.2 At-a-glance guide to functions

....Usable function, ..... Unusable function
Control Vector with encoder
Position Torque Speed

Vector without encoder

Torque Speed

Category

Function

Applicable encoder (standard, Motor constant torque)"

*: This function can be usable under position control by parameter setting.

"Motor with

Vector control dedicated motor

Pr. number Speed restriction Torque restriction Offline auto tuning Online auto tuning (start time) Pr.95=1 Online auto tuning (adaptive magnetic flux observer) Pr.95=2 Easy gain tuning (with load estimation) Pr.819=1 Easy gain tuning (load manual input (Pr.880)) Pr.819=2 Gain adjustment Machine analyzer (notch filter) 0 speed control Servo lock Variable excitation Speed feed-forward, model adaptive speed control P/PI switchover Speed feedback filter Extended function display Maximum speed Minimum speed Acceleration time Basic functions Acceleration/deceleration pattern Jog operation mode PWM frequency selection Operation mode (PU/external/combined) Switchover mode PU operation interlock mode Operation mode external signal switchover mode Start command (2-wire, 3-wire) Parameter write disable selection Starting speed DC injection brake Second, third functions Multi-speed setting Remote setting Speed jump Application functions PID control Stop selection Power failure stop PU stop Reset selection Forward/reverse rotation prevention Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Cooling fan on/off control Retry function Inverter RS485 communication Droop control (with zero limit) Pr. 288=0, 1 Droop control (without zero limit) Pr. 288=2 Pr. 807 to Pr. 809, Pr.873, Pr. 902, Pr. 903, Pr. 917, Pr. 918 Pr. 22, Pr. 803, Pr. 810 to Pr. 817, Pr. 904, Pr. 905, Pr.919, Pr.920 Pr. 9, Pr. 71, Pr. 80 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96, Pr. 859 Pr. 95 Pr. 95 Pr. 818, Pr. 819 Pr. 818, Pr. 819, Pr. 880 Pr. 820 to Pr. 827, Pr. 830 to Pr. 837 Pr. 862, Pr. 863 Pr. 802 Pr. 802 Pr. 854 Pr. 877 to Pr. 881, Pr. 820, Pr. 821, Pr. 828 Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 Pr. 823, Pr. 833 Pr. 160 Pr. 1 Pr. 2 Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111 Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143, Pr. 380 to Pr. 383 Pr. 15, Pr. 16 Pr. 72, Pr. 240 Pr. 79 Pr. 79 Pr. 79, Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 Pr. 79, Pr. 180 to Pr.183, Pr. 187 Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 Pr. 77 Pr. 13 Pr. 10, Pr. 11, Pr. 12 Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 28, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Pr. 59 Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 Pr. 128 to Pr. 134, Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 Pr. 250 Pr. 261 to Pr. 266 Pr. 75 Pr. 75 Pr. 78 Pr. 57, Pr. 58 Pr. 244 Pr. 65, Pr. 67, Pr. 68, Pr. 69 Pr. 117 to Pr. 124 Pr. 286 to Pr. 288 Pr. 286 to Pr. 288 X14

Terminal terminal 2 (1), multi-speed terminal 3 (1)

X44 signal

Control

*
X12 X16 STOP

RT, X9

86

At-a-glance guide to functions

Control Vector with encoder
Position Torque Speed

Vector without encoder

Torque Speed

Category

Function

Applicable encoder (standard, Motor constant torque)"

*: This function can be usable under position control by parameter setting.

"Motor with

Vector control dedicated motor

Pr. number Brake sequence Torque bias Application functions Regenerative function selection Soft-PWM Torque characteristic selection Encoder rotation direction Number of encoder pulses Conditional position control by contact input Direct display and direct setting of motor constants Speed setting/display unit switchover Electronic gear Input functions Multi-function input terminal assignment Analog input assignment/calibration Analog command filter time constant Override, polarity reversible Output stop Multi-function output terminal assignment Speed restriction output Inverter running signal Up-to-speed signal Overload alarm signal Speed detection signal Regenerative brake prealarm signal Electronic thermal relay function prealarm signal PU operation mode signal Operation ready signal Output current detection signal, zero current detection signal Fan fault output signal Fin overheat prealarm signal Forward, reverse rotation output signal Regenerative status output signal Operation ready 2 signal Low speed detection signal Torque detection signal Maintenance output Remote output Instantaneous power failure (undervoltage) signal Fault definition Minor fault output signal Alarm output signal DU/PU display data selection DA1, DA2 output/calibration DA1 output filter Speed monitor Output current monitor/output current peak value monitor Output voltage monitor Preset speed monitor Output frequency monitor Motor torque monitor Converter output voltage monitor, converter output voltage peak value monitor Monitor functions Pr. 60, Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187, Pr. 840 to Pr. 848, Pr. 904, Pr. 905 Pr. 30, Pr. 70 Pr. 240 Pr. 801 Pr. 852 Pr. 851 Pr. 465 to Pr. 494 Pr. 71, Pr. 82, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 859 Pr. 37, Pr. 144, Pr. 81, Pr. 454 Pr. 420, Pr. 421 Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 Pr. 868 / Pr. 902 to Pr. 920 Pr. 822, Pr. 826, Pr. 832, Pr. 836 Pr. 73, Pr. 252, Pr. 253 Pr. 17, Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 13, Pr.190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 41,Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 42, Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116, Pr.190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 150, Pr. 151, Pr. 152, Pr. 153, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195, Pr. 865 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195, Pr. 864 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195, Pr. 890 to Pr. 892 Pr. 190 to Pr.192, Pr. 195, Pr. 495 to Pr. 497 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195, Pr. 875 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 Pr. 52, Pr. 53 Pr. 54 to Pr. 56, Pr. 866, Pr. 158, Pr. 900, Pr. 901 Pr. 867 Pr. 52 to Pr. 55, Pr.158 Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 56, Pr. 158 Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158 Pr. 52 to Pr. 55, Pr. 158 Pr. 52 to Pr. 55, Pr. 158 Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 866 Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158

Terminal

X42, X43

terminals 1, 2, 3

MRS SL RUN SU OL FU, FU2, FU3 FB, FB2, FB3 RBP THP PU RY Y12, Y13 FAN FIN Y30, Y31 Y32 RY2 LS TU MT REM IPF ER LF ABC

Output functions

DA1, DA2 DA1

87

PARAMETERS 4

At-a-glance guide to functions

Control Vector with encoder
Position Torque Speed

Vector without encoder

Torque Speed

Category

Function

Applicable encoder (standard, Motor constant torque)"

*: This function can be usable under position control by parameter setting.

"Motor with

Vector control dedicated motor

Pr. number Input terminal monitor, output terminal monitor Load meter monitor Motor excitation current monitor Cumulative operation time monitor Actual operation time monitor Motor load factor Orientation status Option fitting status monitor Terminal assignment status monitor Motor output monitor Feedback pulse monitor Torque command/torque current command Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection Electronic thermal O/L relay Fin overheat Brake transistor alarm Ground fault overcurrent protection External thermal relay <OHT> Motor overload (OLT) Option alarm Parameter error Disconnected PU detection Output phase failure protection CPU error 12/24VDC power supply short circuit protection Operation panel power supply short circuit protection Overspeed occurrence Speed deviation large Encoder no-signal Encoder A no-signal Position error large Output short circuit protection Encoder phase error (E. EP) PU language changing PU buzzer control PU contrast adjustment 12-bit digital input "A5AX" Digital setting of torque command "A5AX" Machine end orientation "V5AM" Pulse position control "V5AP" Encoder output "V5AY" Extension analog input "V5AX" Extension contact input "V5AX" Digital output "A5AY, V5AY" Extension analog output "A5AY" Relay output "A5AR" Pulse train input "A5AP" SSCNET "V5NS" Ethernet "V5NE" RS485 communication "A5NR" CC-Link "A5NC" Profibus DP "A5NPA" DeviceNet "A5ND" 16-bit digital input "V5AH" Trace (plug-in option) PU Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 866 Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 56 Pr. 52 Pr. 52, Pr. 171 Pr. 52 Pr. 52 Pr. 52 Pr. 52 Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 866 Pr. 9 Pr. 30, Pr. 70 Pr. 876 Pr. 865, Pr. 874 Pr. 75 Pr. 251 Pr. 374 Pr. 870, Pr. 871 Pr. 427 Pr. 145 Pr. 990 Pr. 991 Pr. 300 to Pr. 305, Pr. 329 Pr. 447, Pr. 448, Pr. 804 Pr. 350 to Pr. 369, Pr. 390 to Pr. 396 Pr. 419 to Pr. 431 Pr. 410 to Pr. 413 Pr. 406 Pr. 400 to Pr. 405 Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 / Pr. 410 to Pr. 413 Pr. 306 to Pr. 312 Pr. 320 to Pr. 322, Pr. 330 Pr. 384 to Pr. 386 Pr. 79=9, Pr. 117, Pr. 338 to Pr. 342, Pr. 499 Pr. 434 to Pr. 438 Pr. 331 to Pr. 342 Pr. 338 to Pr. 342 Pr. 338 to Pr. 342 Pr. 338 to Pr. 342, Pr. 345 to Pr. 348 Pr. 300 to Pr. 305, Pr. 329 Pr. 520 to Pr. 536

Terminal

Monitor functions

OH

Protective functions

Thermistor secondary resistance compensation "V5AX" Pr. 407, Pr. 925

Options

88

Basic functions (Pr. 0 to Pr. 9)

4.3 Basic functions (Pr. 0 to Pr. 9)

4.3.1 Torque boost (Pr. 0)

Use this parameter for V/F control only. Motor torque in the low speed region can be adjusted according to the load to increase the starting motor torque.
Parameter
0

Name
Torque boost (manual)

Factory Setting
3%/2%/1% (2.2K/3.7K, 7.5K/15K or more)

Setting Range
0 to 30%

Remarks
Extended mode

<Setting>
Increase the setting when the distance between the inverter and motor is long or when the motor torque in the low speed region is insufficient (when the stall prevention protective function is activated), for example. Assuming that the base frequency voltage is 100%, set the 0Hz voltage in %. CAUTION If the setting is too large, the motor may result in overheat or overcurrent trip. The guideline for maximum value is about 10%.

4.3.2

Maximum and minimum speed settings (Pr. 1

with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder

Speed

Torque

without Encoder

Conditional PLC SSC

Position

, Pr. 2

with Encoder

without Encoder

with Encoder

Speed

Torque

without Encoder

You can limit the maximum (minimum) speed. Speed control The maximum setting is placed on the running speed. The minimum setting is placed on the preset speed. Torque control The maximum and minimum settings are made on the speed restriction commands. (Restriction is not placed on the running speed.) Position control The maximum setting is valid for the speed command obtained from the droop pulses. The minimum setting is invalid.
Parameter
1 2

Output speed (r/min)

Pr.1 Pr.2 0 Set speed 10V

Maximum speed Minimum speed

1800r/min 0r/min

0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min

Simple mode Simple mode

<Setting> Speed control

When the upper limit of the output speed is set in Pr. 1, the output speed is clamped at the maximum speed even if the speed command entered is higher than the speed set in Pr.1. (This also applies to the minimum speed setting.)

CAUTION
When the Pr. 2 setting is higher than Pr. 13 "starting speed" value, note that the motor will run at the preset speed by merely turning the start signal on, even if the command speed has not been entered. Related parameters
Starting speed setting Pr. 13 "starting speed" (Refer to page 97.) Speed restriction command selection for torque control Pr. 807 "speed restriction selection" (Refer to page 185.) External (example: terminal 2-5 connection) speed setting potentiometer adjustment Pr. 902 "speed setting No. 2 bias" (Refer to page 202.), Pr. 903 "speed setting No. 2 gain" (Refer to page 202.)

89

PARAMETERS 4

Name

Factory Setting

Setting Range

Remarks

Basic functions (Pr. 0 to Pr. 9) 4.3.3 Base frequency, base frequency voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19)

Use this parameter for V/F control only. This parameter matches the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating.
Parameter
3 19

Name
Base frequency Base frequency voltage

Factory Setting
60Hz 9999

Setting Range
20 to 200Hz 0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999

Remarks
Extended mode Extended mode 8888: 95% of power supply voltage 9999: Same as power supply voltage

<Setting>
Use Pr. 3 to set the base frequency (rated motor frequency). Use Pr. 19 to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage). The motor whose rated voltage is lower than the power supply voltage of the inverter can be used optimally. REMARKS
If vector control is disabled due to an encoder fault, setting "20" in Pr. 800 "control system selection" enables operation under V/F control. (Refer to page 182.)

Related parameters
Motor setting Pr. 71 "applied motor", Pr. 450 "second applied motor" (Refer to page 123.)

4.3.4

Multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

Condi- PLC SSC tional

Position

Can be used to change between the predetermined running speeds by switching from one terminal to another. Any speed can be selected by merely turning on-off the contact signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals). Using these parameters with Pr. 1 "maximum speed" and Pr. 2 "minimum speed" allows the setting of up to 17 speeds. POINT Valid in the external operation mode or in the combined operation mode that is made available by setting "3 or 4" in Pr. 79. Valid when "0" is set in Pr. 59.

Output speed (r/min)

Output speed (r/min)

Speed 1 (high speed)

Speed 5 Speed 2 (middle speed) Speed 6 Speed 4 Speed 3 (low speed) Speed 7

Speed 10 Speed 11 Speed 9 Speed 8 Speed 12 Speed 13 Speed 14 Speed 15

Time ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

Time ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

RH RM RL

RH RM RL REX

Priority: RL > RM > RH

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

90

Basic functions (Pr. 0 to Pr. 9)

Parameter
4 5 6 24 to 27 232 to 239

Name
Multi-speed setting (high speed) Multi-speed setting (middle speed) Multi-speed setting (low speed) Multi-speed setting (speeds 4 to 7) Multi-speed setting (speeds 8 to 15)

Factory Setting
1800r/min 750r/min 150r/min 9999 9999

Setting Range
0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999

Remarks
Simple mode Simple mode Simple mode "9999" No setting "9999" No setting

<Setting>
Set the running speeds in the corresponding parameters. Each speed can be set as desired in the range 0 to 3600r/min during inverter operation. With any multi-speed setting parameter being read, press In this case, press Pressing
SET

to change the setting.

SET

to store the preset speed. (This is also enabled in the external mode.)

reflects the preset speed.

REMARKS
Press WRITE when the FR-PU04V (option) is used. Use Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 to assign the terminals used for signals RH, RM, RL, and REX. (*) *Changing terminal assignment using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 may affect the other functions. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. The priorities of the external terminals for speed commands are as follows. Jog > pulse train input (option FR-A5AP) > digital setting (option FR-A5AX) > multi-speed operation > PID > terminal 2

CAUTION 1. The multi-speed settings override the main speed (across terminals 2-5). 2. The multi-speeds can also be set in the PU or external operation mode. 3. For 3-speed setting, if two or more speeds are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the preset speed of the lower signal. (RL > RM > RH) 4. Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them. 5. The settings can also be changed during operation. 6. When the jog signal is used with multi-speed signals, the jog signal has priority. Related parameters
Maximum, minimum speed setting Pr. 1 "maximum speed", Pr. 2 "minimum speed" (Refer to page 89.) Signal RH, RM, RL, REX terminal assignment Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection) (Refer to page 163.) External operation mode setting Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" (Refer to page 129.) Extended mode/simple mode setting Pr. 160 "extended function selection" (Refer to page 163.)

4.3.5

Acceleration and deceleration times (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

Condi- PLC SSC tional

Position

Set the acceleration/deceleration time of the motor during speed control and position control by parameter setting. Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/ decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease. Under torque control, the speed restriction value varies with the acceleration/deceleration time.

Output speed (r/min)

Pr.20 Running speed (speed restriction value)

Constant Acceleration speed Deceleration

Time Pr.8 Pr.45 Pr.111

Pr.7 Pr.44 Acceleration Deceleration Pr.110 time time

91

PARAMETERS 4

Basic functions (Pr. 0 to Pr. 9)

Parameter
7

Name
Acceleration time

Factory Setting
5s/15s (3.7K or less/7.5K or more) 5s/15s (3.7K or less/7.5K or more) 1800r/min

Setting Range
0 to 3600s 0 to 360s 0 to 3600s 0 to 360s 1 to 3600 r/min 0, 1 0 to 3600s Simple mode Simple mode

Remarks

Deceleration time Acceleration/ deceleration reference speed Acceleration/ deceleration time increments Second acceleration/ deceleration time Second deceleration time Third acceleration/ deceleration time Third deceleration time

20

Extended mode 0: 0 to 3600s 1: 0 to 360s Pr. 21 = 0 Pr. 21 = 1 Pr. 21 = 0 Pr. 21 = 1 Acceleration time = deceleration time Pr. 21 = 0 Pr. 21 = 1 Pr. 21 = 0 Pr. 21 = 1 Acceleration time = deceleration time Extended mode

21

Extended mode

44

5s

0 to 360s 0 to 3600s 0 to 360s 9999

45

9999

Extended mode

110

5s

111

9999

0 to 3600s 0 to 360s 0 to 3600s 0 to 360s 9999

Extended mode

Extended mode

<Setting> Use Pr. 21 to set the acceleration/deceleration time and minimum setting range. Value "0" (factory setting) 0 to 3600s (minimum setting increments: 0.1s) Value "1" 0 to 360s (minimum setting increments: 0.01s) Changing the Pr. 21 value changes the setting of Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110 and Pr. 111. CAUTION Changing the Pr. 21 setting changes the acceleration/deceleration setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 16, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111) <Example> When Pr. 21 = "0", setting "5.0" s in Pr. 7 and "1" in Pr. 21 changes the Pr. 7 setting to "0.5" s. Use Pr. 7, Pr. 44 and Pr. 110 to set the acceleration time taken to reach the speed set in Pr. 20 from 0r/min. Use Pr. 8, Pr. 45 and Pr. 111 to set the deceleration time taken to reach 0r/min from the speed set in Pr. 20. Use Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 to assign the terminals used to input the RT and X9 signals. CAUTION Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on. When the RT signal is on, the other second functions (Pr. 450 to Pr. 463, Pr. 815, Pr. 830 to Pr. 837) are also valid. Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 are valid when the X9 signal is on. When the X9 signal is on, Pr. 820 to Pr. 827 are also valid. When both RT and X9 are on, Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 are valid. Switching the RT and X9 signals during operation does not change the acceleration/deceleration time imediately when position control is exercised with the conditional position control function (Pr. 419 = "0") by the contact input. REMARKS
Changing the Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference speed" setting does not adjust the speed gain setting signal. To adjust the gain, adjust the calibration function (Pr. 903). When the setting of Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110 or Pr. 111 is "0" under V/F control, the acceleration/deceleration time is 0.04s. However short the acceleration/deceleration time setting is, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the shortest acceleration/deceleration time that is determined by the mechanical system J (inertia moment) and the motor torque.

Related parameters
Jog acceleration/deceleration time Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time" (Refer to page 98.) RT signal, X9 signal setting Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection) (Refer to page 163.)

92

Basic functions (Pr. 0 to Pr. 9) 4.3.6 Motor overheat protection (Pr. 9, Pr. 452, Pr. 876
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

When an external thermal relay is not used, protect the motor from overheat by integration processing of the inverter output current. This feature provides the optimum protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed.
Parameter
9 452 876

Name
Electronic thermal O/L relay Second electronic thermal O/L relay Thermal relay protector input

Factory Setting
Rated inverter output current 9999 0

Setting Range
0 to 500A

Remarks

Simple mode Extended mode 9999: Without second 0 to 500A, 9999 electronic thermal relay function 0, 1 Extended mode

<Setting>
When not using an external thermal relay, set the rated current value [A] of the motor in Pr. 9 (Pr. 452) to make the electronic thermal relay function valid. Setting "0" in Pr. 9 (Pr. 452) deactivates the electronic thermal relay function (motor protective function). (The inverter's output transistor protective function is activated.) When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor Set "10" in Pr. 71 "applied motor" to select the 100% continuous torque characteristic in the low speed range. Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay". The electronic thermal relay function of the second motor (Pr. 452 "second electronic thermal O/L relay" is made valid by: Turning on the RT signal; and Setting other than 9999 in Pr. 450. (The value set in Pr. 9 is valid when Pr. 452 = 9999.)

Selection for whether to use an external thermal relay or not (Pr. 876 "thermal relay protector input")
Pr. 876 Setting
0 1 (factory setting)

Motor with encoder (e.g. SF-JR)

When thermal relay etc. is not used (thermal relay protector input invalid) When thermal relay etc. is used (thermal relay protector input valid)

U V W

IM

IM

OH SD

Not used

OH SD

OHT error occurs when terminals OH-SD are open.

CAUTION When two or more motors are connected to the inverter under V/F control, they cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Install an external thermal relay to each motor. When a difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay. A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use an external thermal relay.

93

PARAMETERS 4

Set value 0

Set value 1

Basic functions (Pr. 0 to Pr. 9)

REMARKS
When running two motors with one inverter, you can set the electronic thermal relay function of each inverter.

Pr. 450 "second applied motor"

Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay"

Pr. 452 "second electronic thermal O/L relay"

9999 0 0.01 to 500 9999

First Motor Electronic Thermal Relay Function RT = OFF RT = ON

Second Motor Electronic Thermal Relay Function RT = OFF RT = ON

9999

9999

Other than 0

0 0.01 to 500 9999

Other than 9999

0 0.01 to 500 9999

Other than 9999

Other than 0

0 0.01 to 500

... Output current value is used to perform integration processing. ... Output current is assumed as 0A to perform integration processing. (cooling processing) ... Electronic thermal relay function is not activated. It is valid for controlling one motor with one inverter in two different control systems. It is valid for controlling the first motor with an external thermal relay and the second motor with an electronic thermal relay function.

Related parameters
When constant-torque motor is used Pr. 71 "applied motor", Pr. 450 "second applied motor" (Refer to page 123.) Use of second motor Pr. 450 "second applied motor" (Refer to page 123.) RT signal setting Set "3" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 163.)

94

Standard operation functions (Pr. 10 to Pr. 16)

4.4 Standard operation functions (Pr. 10 to Pr. 16)

4.4.1 DC injection brake operation (Pr. 10, Pr.11 Pr. 12
with Encoder without Encoder
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed
without Encoder

Torque
Conditional PLC SSC

,
with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

, Pr.802

with Encoder

Speed

Position

, Pr. 850

Speed

By setting the DC injection brake voltage (torque) at a stop, operation time and operation starting speed, the stopping accuracy of positioning operation, etc. or the timing of applying the DC injection brake to stop the motor is adjusted according to the load.
Parameter
10 11 12

Name
DC injection brake operation speed DC injection brake operation time DC injection brake voltage Pre-excitation selection Brake operation selection for vector control without encoder

Factory Setting
15r/min 0.5s 1%

Setting Range
0 to 1500 r/min, 9999 0 to 0.5s 0 to 30%

Remarks
9999: Operated at or below Pr. 13 value.

802

0, 1

Use during V/F control and vector control without encoder. Use during speed control under vector control with encoder.

Extended mode

850

0, 1

Use during speed control under vector control without encoder

<Setting>
Use Pr. 10 to set the speed at which the DC injection brake application is started. By setting "9999", the brake is operated at or below the speed set in Pr. 13. When stopping the motor by using a STOP key or turning the STF/STR off, the DC injection brake application is started at the speed set in Pr.10. When stopping the motor by setting speed to 0r/min (with PU or Volume), the DC injection brake application is started at the speed set in Pr.13. Use Pr. 11 to set the duration period the brake is applied. During this period, DC injection brake operation is exercised. When this period has elapsed, the motor is coasted to a stop. Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage to the power supply voltage. (Use this parameter only during V/F control.)

1) Vector control with encoder

Select either 0 speed control or servo lock control for brake operation when pre-excitation is performed with the LX signal using Pr.802. Turning on the LX signal enables the pre-excitation operation. (valid only during speed control)
Parameter Name Description
0: 0 speed control (factory setting) Even under load, an attempt is made to maintain 0r/min to keep the motor shaft stopped. Note that if the shaft is overcome and turned by external force, it does not return to the original position. Position control is not exercised and only speed control is carried out to perform operation. 1: Servo lock Even under load, an attempt is made to maintain the motor shaft position. Note that if the shaft is turned by external force, it returns to the original position after the external force has gone away. Since position control is exercised, you can adjust this position loop gain using Pr. 422 "position loop gain".

802

Pre-excitation selection

95

PARAMETERS 4

Standard operation functions (Pr. 10 to Pr. 16)

The control block diagram during pre-excitation
Pr.802 = 0

0r/min speed command 0rad position command Position control

Speed control Pr.802 = 1

Motor

Timing chart

Speed LX pre-excitation STF

DC injection brake operation speed (Pr. 10)

Pre-excitation operation Normal operation 0 speed control or servo lock DC injection brake time (Pr.11) is made invalid.

Pre-excitation operation 0 speed control or servo lock DC injection brake time (Pr.11) is made invalid.

* When the LX (pre-excitation) terminal is off, the pre-excitation operation functions for the time set in the DC injection brake operation time (Pr. 11). CAUTION The DC injection brake functions during speed restriction under speed control or torque control. (It does not function under position control.)

2) Vector control without encoder

For brake operation during deceleration to a stop at the speed less than Pr.10 "DC injection brake operation speed", select either zero speed control for vector control with encoder or DC brake operation for magnetic flux vector control. CAUTION This setting is made invalid when the start signal is turned on with the set speed less than Pr. 13 "starting speed" and brake operation under 0 speed control is performed.
Parameter Name Description
0: DC injection brake with current control (factory setting) When the speed has reached the DC injection brake operation speed (Pr. 10), brake operation is performed by applying the voltage set in Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage" against input voltage for the period set in Pr. 11 "DC injection brake voltage". 1: 0 speed control Same control as for vector control with encoder. (servo lock is not enabled)

850

Brake operation selection for vector control without encoder

Relationship between DC injection brake operation and pre-excitation operation in each control mode
Operation LX terminal OFF LX terminal ON (Deceleration to stop) Pre-excitation Pre-excitation Pre-excitation Pre-excitation selection selection selection selection Pr. 802 = 0 Pr. 802 = 1 Pr. 802 = 0 Pr. 802 = 1
DC injection brake 0 speed control 0 speed control No operation DC injection brake Servo lock 0 speed control No operation No operation 0 speed control 0 speed control Servo lock No operation Servo lock 0 speed control Servo lock

Control Mode

V/F control Speed control (vector control with encoder) Speed control (vector control without encoder) Position control (vector control with encoder)

96

Standard operation functions (Pr. 10 to Pr. 16)

CAUTION
Install a mechanical brake. After the machine stops fully and the mechanical brake is applied, switch the LX signal (preexcitation) off. Related parameters
DC injection brake operation speed when Pr. 10 = 9999 Pr. 13 "starting speed" (Refer to page 97.) Motor setting when using constant-torque motor Pr. 71 "applied motor", Pr. 450 "second applied motor"(Refer to page 123.) Setting control mode Pr. 800 "control system selection" (Refer to page 182.) LX signal terminal assignment Set "23" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 163.)
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

4.4.2

Starting speed (Pr. 13

Speed

Torque

)
Speed setting is 1800r/min Output speed (r/min) 1800

You can set the starting speed at which the start signal is turned on.

Operation pattern after input of speed setting signal depends on Pr. 29 " acceleration/deceleration pattern".

Setting range Pr.13 0 Forward (reverse) rotation ON Time

Parameter
13

Name
Starting speed

Factory Setting
15r/min

Setting Range
0 to 1500r/min

Remarks
Extended mode

CAUTION
When the Pr. 13 setting is equal to or less than Pr. 2 "minimum speed" value, note that the motor will start running at the preset speed by merely turning the start signal on, even if the command speed has not been entered. Related parameters
Minimum speed setting Pr. 2 "minimum speed" (Refer to page 89.) Acceleration/deceleration pattern setting Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern" (Refer to page 102.) Adjustment for analog voltage command Pr. 902 "speed setting No. 2 bias" (Refer to page 202.)

97

PARAMETERS 4

CAUTION If the speed setting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 13 "starting speed", the operation is either 0 speed or servo lock. For example, when 150r/min is set in Pr. 13, the motor will start running when the speed setting signal reaches 150r/min. When the analog voltage command (example: across 2-5) is used as speed for operation, too low of a setting of the rotation speed at a start may start the motor running by merely entering the start signal although the voltage command is zero. In this case, adjustment can be made using the calibration function, Pr. 902.

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37) 4.4.3 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

To start/stop jog operation in the external operation mode, choose the jog operation function in input terminal function selection, turn on the jog signal, and turn on/off the start signal (STF, STR). When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04V), choose the jog operation mode and use FWD or REV to perform jog operation. (When the FR-PU04V is connected, these parameters can be read as the basic parameters.) Perform PU JOG operation using PU (FR-DU04-1, FRPU04V) in the PU-JOG operation mode.

Output speed (r/min) Pr.20 Jog speed Pr.15 setting range

Forward rotation Reverse rotation

Time

Pr.16 Jog signal Forward rotation, STF Reverse rotation, STR ON ON ON

Set the speed and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation.

Parameter
15 16

Name
Jog speed setting Jog acceleration/ deceleration time

Factory Setting
150r/min 0.5s

Setting Range
0 to 1500r/min 0 to 3600s 0 to 360s

Remarks
When Pr. 21=0 When Pr. 21=1 Extended mode

REMARKS
For the operation method from the operation panel (FR-DU04-1), refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).

CAUTION The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for jog operation. Pr. 15 "jog speed setting" value should be equal to or higher than Pr. 13 "starting speed" setting. Assign the jog signal to any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection). The priorities of the external terminals for speed commands are: Jog > multi-speed operation > No. 2 terminal During jog operation, the RT and X9 signals cannot be used to switch to the second and third acceleration/deceleration time. Under torque control, the jog speed acts as the speed restriction value by turning on the jog signal. Jog operation is invalid under position control. Related parameters
Jog signal terminal assignment Set "5" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection) (Refer to page 163.) S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern" (Refer to page 102.) Pr. 16 setting range, minimum setting increments condition setting Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration time increments" (Refer to page 91.)

4.5 Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37)

4.5.1 Inverter output stop (MRS) (Pr. 17
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

The setting of this parameter needs to be changed to: Stop the motor with a mechanical brake (e.g. electromagnetic brake); Provide interlocks to prevent the inverter from running if the start signal is input to the inverter; or Coast the motor to a stop.

Motor is coasted to stop.

Output speed Start at starting speed

About 20ms When Pr. 17=0 Across MRS-SD When Pr. 17=2 Across MRS-SD Across STF-SD (STR) ON ON OFF ON

About 20ms

ON

Parameter
17

Name
MRS input selection

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0 2

MRS Signal Specifications

Output stops when MRS signal turns on. Output stops when MRS signal turns off. (b contact input specifications)

Remarks
Extended mode

98

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37)

<Wiring example> For sink logic
Setting 0 Output stop (factory setting) Inverter MRS SD Setting 2 Output stop Inverter MRS SD

REMARKS
Set the MRS signal using the input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187). The setting cannot be changed during operation. Refer to page 218 for inverter reset.

CAUTION When the operation mode is the NET mode and Pr. 338 = 0, the MRS signal is used as both the external terminal and communication-based signals, and the output stops when either signal turns on. At the Pr. 17 setting of 2, the output stops when either signal turns off. (Oppositely, at the Pr. 17 setting of 2, both the external terminal and communication-based signals should turn on to make a start.) Related parameters
Starting speed setting Pr. 13 "starting speed" (Refer to page 97.) MRS signal terminal assignment Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection) (Refer to page 163.)

Pr. 19

Refer to Pr. 3 (page 90) Refer to Pr. 7, Pr. 8 (page 91)

Pr. 20, Pr. 21

99

PARAMETERS 4

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37) 4.5.2 Torque restriction (Pr. 22 Pr. 803
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed
Conditional PLC SSC

Position

,
with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

without Encoder

Speed

Torque
with Encoder without Encoder

Position
Conditional PLC SSC

, Pr. 810 )

Speed

Position

Pr. 812 to Pr. 817

Speed

Position

Used to restrict the output torque to the predetermined value during speed control. For details of the setting method, refer to the torque restriction of the Instruction Manual (basic).
Parameter Name
Torque restriction level (*1) Constant output region torque characteristic selection

Factory Setting

Setting Range
When Pr. 810 = 0, 0 to 400%

Remarks
1 quadrant Pr. 22 2 quadrant Pr. 812 3 quadrant Pr. 813 4 quadrant Pr. 814 Constant output restriction (torpue current restricyion and control) Constant torque restriction (torpue restricyion and control(*3)) Internal torque restriction Parameter-set torque restriction operation is performed. External torque restriction Speed restriction based on the analog voltage from the terminal 3 Valid in the regeneration mode when Pr. 810 = 0. 9999: Pr. 22 value is used for restriction. Valid in the reverse rotation driving mode when Pr. 810 = 0. 9999: Pr. 22 value is used for restriction. Valid in the regeneration mode when Pr. 810 = 0. 9999: Pr. 22 value is used for restriction. When the torque restriction selection (TL) signal is on, Pr. 815 is used as the torque restriction value regardless of Pr. 810. Valid when torque restriction selection (TL) terminal input is provided. 9999: Depending on Pr. 22 setting Set the torque restriction value during acceleration. 9999: Same torque restriction as at constant speed Set the torque restriction value during deceleration. 9999: Same torque restriction as at constant speed

22

150%

0 0 1 0

803

810

Torque restriction input method selection

0 1

813 814

Torque restriction level (3rd quadrant) Torque restriction level (4th quadrant)

9999 9999

0 to 400%, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999

815

Torque restriction level 2

9999

0 to 400%, 9999

816

Acceleration torque restriction level (*2)

9999

0 to 400%, 9999

817

Deceleration torque restriction level (*2)

9999

0 to 400%, 9999

CAUTION *1.Output current level (stall prevention function) is activated to prevent the inverter from alarm stop due to overcurrent etc. during V/F control. When "0" is set in Pr. 22, stall prevention function is invalid. *2.Pr. 816 "acceleration torque restriction level" and Pr. 817 "deceleration torque restriction level" are invalid during position control. *3.For torque restriction and torque control, torque is restricted and controled not by magnetic flux.

<Details>
Torque restriction is activated so that the output torque does not exceed the predetermined value during speed control. The block diagram is shown below. The output of speed control is suppressed within the torque restriction value.
Torque restriction Speed control Speed command IM Iq current control

Encoder

At this time, set Pr. 810 to select the way to make torque restriction.

100

Extended mode

812

Torque restriction level (regeneration)

9999

0 to 400%, 9999

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37)

<Setting>
Pr. 810 Setting
0 1

Torque Restriction Input Method

Internal torque restriction External torque restriction

Operation
Parameter-set torque restriction operation is performed. Changing the torque restriction parameter value by communication enables torque restriction to be adjusted by communication. Torque restriction using the analog voltage from the terminal 3 is made valid.

REMARKS
Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details of the other parameters.

CAUTION Whether the torque restriction in the constant output range is set to constant torque restriction or constant output restriction in the torque restriction setting depends on the setting of Pr. 803 "constant output range torque characteristic selection". Related parameters
Torque command bias adjustment Pr. 904 "torque command No. 3 bias" (Refer to page 202.) Torque command gain adjustment Pr. 905 "torque command No. 3 gain" (Refer to page 202.)

Pr. 24 to Pr. 27

Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 (page 90)

with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

4.5.3

RH, RM, RL signal input compensation (Pr. 28

Speed

Torque

By entering 0 to 10V into terminal 1 (speed setting auxiliary terminal), the speeds of the RH, RM and RL signals (command speeds for multi-speed operation) can be compensated for.
Parameter
28

Name
Multi-speed input compensation

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0 1

Description
Without compensation With compensation

Remarks
Extended mode

High speed Output speed (r/min) Middle speed Low speed

Time

CAUTION When "4 or 14" is set in Pr. 73, the compensation signal is input from terminal 2, not from terminal 1. (Override function) Since terminal 1 is a multi-function selection terminal, its function varies with the Pr. 868 setting. Set "0" in Pr. 868. Refer to Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 for calibration of the terminal 1. Related parameters
Multi-speed setting Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 (multi-speed setting) (Refer to page 90.) RH, RM, RL signals Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection) (Refer to page 163.) Speed compensation using terminal 2 Pr. 73 "speed setting signal" (Refer to page 125.) Function assignment to terminal 1 Set "0" in Pr. 868 "No. 1 terminal function assignment" (Refer to page 195.) Pr. 59 "remote setting function selection" Refer to page 116. Calibration of terminal 1 Pr. 902 "speed setting No. 2 bias", Pr. 903 "speed setting No. 2 gain" (Refer to page 202)

101

PARAMETERS 4

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37) 4.5.4 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration curve (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143, Pr. 380 to Pr. 383
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

When you have changed the preset speed during start, acceleration, deceleration, stop, or operation, you can change the running speed by acceleration/deceleration to make adjustment to reach the preset speed. Set the acceleration/deceleration pattern in Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern".
Parameter Name Factory Setting Setting Range
0 1 2 3 4 140 141 142 143 380 381 382 383 Backlash acceleration stopping speed Backlash acceleration stopping time Backlash deceleration stopping speed Backlash deceleration stopping time Acceleration S pattern 1 Deceleration S pattern 1 Acceleration S pattern 2 Deceleration S pattern 2 30r/min 0.5s 30r/min 0.5s 0% 0% 0% 0% 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 360s Accessible when Pr. 29 = 3 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 360s 0 to 50% 0 to 50% 0 to 50% 0 to 50%

Remarks
Linear acceleration/deceleration S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B Backlash compensation acceleration/ deceleration S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C Extended mode

29

Acceleration/ deceleration pattern

Accessible when Pr. 29 = 4

102

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37)

<Setting>
Pr. 29 Setting

Function

Description

Operation
[Linear acceleration /deceleration]

Linear acceleration/ deceleration (factory setting)

Acceleration/deceleration is made linearly up/down to the preset speed .

Output speed (r/min) Time

S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration A (torque variation technique)

The motor torque is utilized effectively to make fast acceleration/deceleration in a large motor-generated torque area and smooth acceleration/deceleration in a small motor-generated torque area. In this acceleration/deceleration pattern, the base frequency is the inflection point of an S shape, and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time according to the reduction in motor torque in the constant-output operation range at higher than the rated speed. This function is valid for V/F control only. For other than V/F control, linear acceleration/deceleration is made.

[S-pattern acceleration /deceleration A] Output speed (r/min) Base frequency Time

CAUTION
As the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time taken to reach Pr. 3 "base frequency", not Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference speed".

Prevention of cargo collapse on conveyor, etc. S-pattern This setting always provides S-pattern acceleration/ acceleration/ deceleration from s2 (current speed) to s1 (preset deceleration B speed), easing an acceleration/deceleration shock and (shock absorption) producing an effect on the prevention of cargo collapse, etc. Backlash compensation for reduction gear, etc. This function stops a speed change temporarily during acceleration/deceleration, reducing a shock generated when a reduction gear backlash is eliminated suddenly. Use Pr. 140 to Pr. 143 to set the stopping times and stopping speed in accordance with the chart on the right. The acceleration/deceleration time is increased by the stopping time. REMARKS Output speed is retained for the time for the starting speed (Pr. 13) and s1 (Pr. 140) time at a start and accelerate again after t1 time has elapsed. Speed reaches or below s2 (Pr. 142) is retained for t2 (Pr. 143) time at a start of deceleration and decelerate again after t2 time has elapsed.

Output speed (r/min)

Set value 2 [S-pattern acceleration /deceleration B] s1 s2 Time

[Backlash compensation function] Output speed (r/min) s2 Pr.142 Time Pr.143

Backlash compensation acceleration/ deceleration

t1

Pr.141

t2

S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration C

See next page.

See next page.

REMARKS
For the acceleration/deceleration time, turning on the RT signal makes Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time" and Pr. 45 "second deceleration time" valid (turning on the X9 signal makes Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 valid). Refer to page 91.

103

PARAMETERS 4

s1 Pr.140

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37)

Pr. 29 = 4 (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C)
The S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switch signal (X20) changes an acceleration/deceleration curve.
Pr.382 Pr.381

Pr.382 Pr.380 Pr.380 Pr.381 Pr.383 Pr.383

CAUTION Change the S pattern acceleration/ deceleration C switch (X20) after the speed becomes constant. S pattern operation before switching continues even if the X20 is changed during acceleration or deceleration.

Set speed ON S-pattern C switch (X20) OFF ON

OFF

Operation X20 Signal

OFF ON

During Acceleration Pr. 380 "acceleration S pattern 1" Pr. 382 "acceleration S pattern 2"

During Deceleration Pr. 381 "deceleration S pattern 1" Pr. 383 "deceleration S pattern 2"

As the acceleration/deceleration time during acceleration/deceleration, set the percentage to the acceleration/ deceleration time T in Pr. 380 to Pr. 383. Parameter setting (%) = Ts / T 100%
S-pattern acceleration

Linear acceleration

Ts T

Ts

REMARKS
At a start, the motor starts at Pr. 13 "starting speed" when the start signal turns on. If there is a difference between the speed command and speed at a start of deceleration due to torque restriction operation etc., the speed command is matched with the speed to make deceleration.

Related parameters
Base frequency setting (acceleration/deceleration time setting) Pr. 3 "base frequency" (Refer to page 90.) X20 signal setting when Pr. 29 = 4 (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration switch) Pr. 180 to Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection) (Refer to page 163.) Starting speed setting Pr. 13 "starting speed" (Refer to page 97.) Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference speed" Refer to page 91.

104

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37) 4.5.5 Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

When making frequent starts/stops in a 15K or less inverter, use the external high-duty brake resistor to increase the regenerative brake duty.
Parameter Name Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0 1 2 0 to 15% 0 to 30%

Remarks
When using built-in brake resistor or brake unit (FR-BU-C) When using the high-duty brake resistor Maker setting value. Do not make setting. 1.5K 2.2K or more

30

Regenerative function selection Special regenerative brake duty

Extended mode

70

0%

<Setting>
1) When using the built-in brake resistor, brake unit or power regeneration converter Set "0" in Pr. 30. The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid. At this time, the regenerative brake duty is as follows. FR-V560-7.5K or less ................... 2% FR-V560-15K or more................... 0% 2) When using the high-duty brake resistor Set "1" in Pr. 30. Set Pr.70 "special regenerative brake duty" as follows: 7.5K or less . . . .10% 11K or more . . .6%

WARNING
The value set in Pr. 70 must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the resistor can overheat. REMARKS
1. The Pr. 70 setting is invalid for the inverter of 22K or more. 2. Pr. 70 "regenerative brake duty" indicates the %ED of the built-in brake transistor operation.

105

PARAMETERS 4

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37) 4.5.6 Speed jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

)
Speed jump

When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow resonance occurrence speeds to be jumped. Up to three areas may be set, with the jump speeds set to either the top or bottom point of each area. The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation is performed at this speed.

Pr.36 Pr.35 Running speed Pr.34 (r/min) Pr.33 Pr.32 Pr.31 1B 1A Set speed 2B 2A

3B 3A

Parameter
31 32 33 34 35 36

Name
Speed jump 1A Speed jump 1B Speed jump 2A Speed jump 2B Speed jump 3A Speed jump 3B

Factory Setting
9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999

Setting Range
0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min, 9999

Remarks

9999: Function invalid Extended mode

<Setting>
To fix the speed at 600r/min between Pr. 33 and Pr. 34 (600r/min and 700r/min), set 600r/min in Pr. 33 and 700r/min in Pr. 34. To jump to 700r/min between 600r/min and 700r/min, set 700r/ min in Pr. 33 and 600r/min in Pr. 34.
Pr.34:700r/min Pr.33:600r/min

Pr.33:700r/min Pr.34:600r/min

CAUTION During acceleration/deceleration, the running speed within the set area is valid.

REMARKS
If the speed jump setting ranges overlap, a write disable error "
with Encoder without Encoder

" appears.
with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

4.5.7

Speed display (Pr. 37, Pr. 144

Speed

Torque

Position

The units of the running speed monitor display of the PU (FR-DU04-1/FR-PU04V), the running speed/ frequency setting in the PU operation mode, and the parameter setting unit used for frequency setting can be changed from the frequency to the motor speed or machine speed.
Parameter
37 144

Name
Speed display Speed setting switchover

Factory Setting
0 0

Setting Range
0 1 to 9998 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Output speed

Remarks

Extended mode Number of motor poles

106

Operation selection functions 1 (Pr. 17 to Pr. 37)

<Setting>
To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 1800r/min operation. To display the motor frequency, set the number of motor poles (2, 4, 6, 8, 10) in Pr. 144. When the running speed monitoring has been selected, the parameter setting unit and the running speed setting in the PU operation mode depend on the combination of the Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 settings as indicated below:
Pr. 37 Pr. 144
0 0 2 to 10 0 1 to 9998 2 to 10

Running Speed Monitor

r/min Hz Pr. 144 Machine speed Pr. 37 Machine speed Pr. 37

Preset Speed Monitor

r/min Hz Pr. 144 Machine speed Pr. 37 Machine speed Pr. 37

Output Frequency Monitor

Hz Pr. 81, Pr. 454 Hz Pr. 144 Hz Pr. 81, Pr. 454 Hz Pr. 81, Pr. 454

Running Speed Setting/Pr. Setting r/min Hz Pr. 144 r/min Machine speed Pr. 37

CAUTION 1. When Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 are combined to select the Hz setting, the number of poles set in Pr. 144 is used to calculate the frequency, independently of the number of motor poles (Pr. 81, Pr. 454) used for control. Note this when the number of motor poles (Pr. 81, Pr. 454) differs from Pr. 144. 2. When the speed setting has been selected, operation is performed at the synchronous speed. When 4 poles and 60Hz are set, operation is performed at 1800r/min. For V/F control, the output frequency is 60Hz. 3. To change the PU main monitor (PU main display) or PU level meter (PU level display), refer to Pr. 52 and Pr. 53. 4. As the operation panel display is 4 digits, " " is displayed when the monitored value exceeds "9999".

CAUTION
Make sure that the settings of the running speed and number of motor poles are correct. Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine. Related parameters

107

PARAMETERS 4

PU main monitor changing Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection" (Refer to page 110.) PU level meter changing Pr. 53 "PU level display data selection" (Refer to page 110.) Setting of number of motor poles Pr. 81 "number of motor poles", Pr. 454 "number of second motor poles" (Refer to page 132.)

Output terminal functions (Pr. 41 to Pr. 50)

4.6 Output terminal functions (Pr. 41 to Pr. 50)

4.6.1 Up-to-speed sensitivity (Pr. 41
with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

)
Running speed Output speed (r/min) Time Output signal (SU) Start signal OFF ON ON OFF OFF Adjustable range Pr.41

You can adjust the ON range of the up-to-speed signal (SU) output when the output speed reaches the running speed. This parameter can be used to confirm that the running speed has been reached and used as the operation start signal etc. for related equipment. Under vector control with encoder: Actual motor speed (feedback value) is adjusted. Under vector control without encoder: Speed estimated valued is adjusted.
Parameter
41

Name
Up-to-speed sensitivity

Factory Setting
10%

Setting Range
0 to 100%

Remarks
Extended parameter

REMARKS
Assign functions to the terminals DO1 to DO3 and ABC to use the SU signal. The SU signal is assigned to the terminal DO2 when shipped from the factory. Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 to change the terminal functions. Changing the terminal assignment with any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 may affect the other functions. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. (Refer to page 165.) For V/F control, the motor runs at the speed converted from the output frequency.

Related parameters
SU signal terminal assignment Set "1" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) (Refer to page 165.)
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

4.6.2

Speed detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116

Speed

Torque

Position

When the speed reaches or exceeds the setting, the output speed detection signal (FU, FU2, FU3 signal) or speed detection signal (FB, FB2, FB3 signal) is output. This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc. You can also set speed detection used exclusively for reverse rotation. This function is effective for changing the timing of electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation, etc. The FU signal is output when the speed has reached the output speed. The FB signal is output when the speed has reached the detected actual motor speed (feedback value). (the estimated speed of the actual motor speed for vector control without encoder)
Parameter 42 43 50 116 Name Speed detection Speed detection for reverse rotation Second speed detection Third speed detection Factory Setting 300r/min 9999 750r/min 1800r/min Setting Range 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min Remarks 9999: Same as Pr. 42 setting Extended
parameters

(1) Signal operation

The FU, FU2 and FU3 signals function under speed/V/F control. They do not function under torque/position control.
Compared signals
FU/FB signal FU2/FB2 signal FU3/FB3 signal

FU Speed command value

FB Actual motor speed

Forward rotation: On when speed is equal to or higher than in Pr. 42 Reverse rotation: On when speed is equal to or higher than in Pr. 43 On when speed is equal to or higher than in Pr. 50 (both forward and reverse) Off when speed is lower than in Pr. 50 (both forward and reverse) On when speed is equal to or higher than in Pr. 116 (both forward and reverse) Off when speed is lower than in Pr. 116 (both forward and reverse)

REMARKS
For V/F control, on/off control is exercised at the speed converted from the output frequency. (The detection actions of the FU and FB signals are the same.)

108

Output terminal functions (Pr. 41 to Pr. 50)

Forward rotation Pr.116 Pr.50 Motor speed (r/min) Pr.42 Time Pr.43 Pr.50 Pr.116 Reverse rotation Output signal FU/FB FU2/FB2 FU3/FB3 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF

REMARKS
The speed command value indicates the last speed command value given after acceleration/deceleration processing.

CAUTION Assign functions to the terminals DO1 to DO3 and ABC to use the FU, FU2, FU3 and FB, FB2, FB3 signals. Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 to change the terminal functions. Changing the terminal assignment with Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 may affect the other functions. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. The speed detection signal turns off when an inverter alarm occurs or when the reset terminal (MRS, RES signal) turns on. When any parameter setting is "0", the corresponding signal turns on as soon as the start signal turns on. Related parameters
FB, FB2, FB3, FU, FU2, FU3 signal terminal assignment Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) (Refer to page 165.)

Pr. 44, Pr. 45 Pr. 50

Refer to Pr. 7, Pr. 8 (page 91)

Refer to Pr. 42, Pr. 43 (page 108)

109

PARAMETERS 4

Display functions 1 (Pr. 52 to Pr. 56)

4.7 Display functions 1 (Pr. 52 to Pr. 56)

4.7.1 Monitor display/DA1, DA2 terminal function selection (Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

During operation, you can select the signals shown on the operation panel (FR-DU04-1)/parameter unit (FRPU04V) main display screen and on the parameter unit (FR-PU04V) level meter and the signals output to the DA1 and DA2 terminals. There are two analog output DA1 and DA2 terminals. Select the signals using Pr. 54 and Pr. 158.
Parameter
52 53 54 158

Name
DU/PU main display data selection PU level display data selection DA1 terminal function selection DA2 terminal function selection

Factory Setting
0 1 1 1

Setting Range
0, 5 to 12, 17 to 20, 23, 24, 32 to 35, 38, 100 (5 to 12 are invalid for FR-PU04V)

Remarks

0 to 3, 5 to 12, 17, 18 1 to 3, 5 to 12, 17, 18, 21, 32 to 34, 36 1 to 3, 5 to 12, 17, 18, 21, 32 to 34, 36

Extended mode

<Setting>
Any of the following signals can be monitored by parameter setting. The signals marked cannot be selected for monitoring.
Parameter Settings Pr. 52 Pr. 53 Pr. 54 Pr. 158
DU LED PU main PU level monitor meter DA1 DA2 terminal terminal 12 bits 12 bits (10V) (+10V)

Signal Type

Display Unit

Full-Scale Value of the Level Output Meter Connected to DA1 and DA2

Description

No display

When "0" is set in Pr. 53, the level meter of the parameter unit is not displayed.
Vector control with encoder

Speed feedback value from encoder

Speed

0.1 r/min

0/100

0/100

Pr. 55

Vector control without encoder V/F control

Speed estimation value Speed calculated from output frequency

Output current Output voltage Alarm display Set speed Output frequency

0.01A 0/100 0.1V 0.1 r/min 0.01 Hz 0/100 0/100 5

0/100 0/100 0/100 *2

2 3 5

2 3 5

Pr. 56 1000V Pr. 55

The output current is displayed as effective value. The output voltage is displayed as effective value. Under speed control, the current speed setting is displayed. 0r/min under position control.

*2

The frequency converted from Pr. The output frequency is displayed. 55

110

Display functions 1 (Pr. 52 to Pr. 56)

Parameter Settings Pr. 52 Pr. 53 Pr. 54 Pr. 158
DU LED PU main PU level monitor meter DA1 DA2 terminal terminal 12 bits 12 bits (10V) (+10V)

Signal Type

Display Unit

Full-Scale Value of the Level Output Meter Connected to DA1 and DA2

Description

Motor torque

0.1%

*2

Pr. 866

The output torque is displayed. The ratio to the rated torque is displayed. When the DA1 output monitor is used, a positive voltage is output during forward driving and reverse regeneration and a negative voltage is output during reverse driving and forward regeneration. DC bus voltage is displayed. The brake resistor duty is displayed. The thermal relay load factor is displayed. The peak value of the output voltage is displayed as effective value. The peak value of DC bus voltage is displayed.

Converter output voltage Regenerative brake duty Electronic overcurrent protection load factor Output current peak value Converter output voltage peak value Input terminal status Output terminal status Load meter *1 Motor excitation current Position pulse
Cumulative operation time Reference voltage output

0.1V 0.1%

8 9

*2 *2

8 9

8 9

1000V Pr. 70 Thermal relay operation level

0.1%

10

*2

10

10

0.01A

11

*2

11

11

Pr. 56

0.1V

12

*2

12

12

1000V

*2

0.1% 0.01A

17 18 19

*2 17 18 19

17 18

17 18

Pr. 866 Pr. 56

The load meter is output. Pre-excitation current is displayed.

1h

20

20

21

The voltage of DA1 and DA2 at fullscale is output The inverter running time is accumulated. (The time during a stop is not accumulated.) It is cleared using Pr. 171 "actual operation hour meter clear". The load factor to the rated motor capacity is displayed. The torque command value is displayed. The torque current command value is displayed. The machine output of the motor shaft end is displayed.

Actual operation time

1h

23

23

Motor load 0.1% factor Torque 0.1% command*1 Torque current 0.1% command*1 0.01 Motor kW output *1 (0.01 HP)

24 32 33

24 32 33

32 33

Pr. 866 Pr. 866

34

34

34

Rated motor current

111

PARAMETERS 4

The position of the motor output shaft is monitored. Cumulative operation time since the inverter shipment (power on time) is displayed. (Minimum increment is Hr)

Display functions 1 (Pr. 52 to Pr. 56)

Parameter Settings Pr. 52 Pr. 53 Pr. 54 Pr. 158
DU LED PU main PU level monitor meter DA1 DA2 terminal terminal 12 bits 12 bits (10V) (+10V)

Signal Type

Display Unit

Full-Scale Value of the Level Output Meter Connected to DA1 and DA2

Description

Feedback pulse

35

35

Torque monitor (driving/ regenerative polarity switchover) *1

36

Pr. 866

Trace status

38

38

The number of pulses feed back during 1 sampling is displayed. Display range is 0 to 99999 pulses. Sampling time for the following number of encoder pulses are: 1.0s for 1500 pls/rev or less; 0.5s for 1501 to 3200 pls/rev; and 0.25s for 3201 to 4096 pls/rev. The output torque is monitored. When the DA1 output monitor is used, a positive voltage is output during forward and reverse driving and a negative voltage is output during forward and reverse regeneration. The trace status is displayed. 0: Stop 1: During pre-trigger 2: Waiting for trigger 3: During trace 4: Trace completion 101: During data output 102: Data output completion

CAUTION *1 When DA1 (Pr. 54) is selected, high responce output is available. When DA2 (Pr. 158) is selected, average value is output. *2 Select this monitor in "Others" of the FR-PU04V (option). When "100" is set in Pr. 52, the monitored values during stop and during operation differ as indicated below. (The LED on the left of r/min flickers during stop, and is lit during operation.)
Pr.52 0 During operation/ during stop
Speed Output current Output voltage Alarm display Speed

100 During stop

Set speed Output current Output voltage Alarm display

During operation
Speed

REMARKS
During a reset, the values are the same as at a stop. During offline auto tuning, the tuning status monitor has priority. By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of output speed to alarm display can be selected in sequence by the SHIFT key. *Speed setting to output terminal status on the PU main monitor are selected by "other monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04V). When Pr. 52 = any of "17, 18 and 24", the output current monitor changes to the set monitored data. When Pr. 52 = any of "19, 20, 23 and 32 to 35, 38", the output voltage monitor changes to the set monitored data.

CAUTION 1. The cumulative operation time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0. When the operation panel (FR-DU04-1) is used, more than 9999h is displayed as " ". Use the parameter unit (FR-PU04V) to confirm more than 9999h. 2. The cumulative operation time and actual operation time is not accumulated unless the inverter is run continuously for more than one hour. 3. When the operation panel (FR-DU04-1) is used, the display unit is r/min, V or A only.

112

Display functions 1 (Pr. 52 to Pr. 56)

REMARKS
Where to monitor the data set in Pr. 52 varies with the setting. Factory setting * The monitor displayed at powering on is the first monitor. To set the first monitor, press
Power-on monitor (First monitor)
FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

SET

for more than 1.5s.

Second monitor
FR-DU04-1
SET
CONTROL PANEL

Third monitor
FR-DU04-1
SET
CONTROL PANEL

Alarm monitor
With alarm
SET

FR-DU04-1

CONTROL PANEL

r/min A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

r/min A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

r/min A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

r/min A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

Output speed monitor

1)

Output current monitor 2)

1)

Output voltage monitor 1) 3)

SET

1)

Setting is any of "5 to 12" (Displayed in the third monitor position)

First monitor Output speed monitor
SET

Second monitor Output current monitor

SET

Third monitor Setting "5 to 12" monitor

2)

Setting is any of "17, 18 and 24" (Displayed instead of output current monitor)
First monitor
SET

Second monitor
Setting "17, 18, 24" monitor

SET

Third monitor
Output voltage monitor

Output speed monitor

3)

Setting is any of "19, 20, 23, 25" (Displayed instead of output voltage monitor)
First monitor
Output speed monitor
SET

Second monitor
Output current monitor

SET

Third monitor
Setting "19, 20, 23, 25" monitor

Related parameters
Speed monitoring reference setting Pr. 55 (Refer to page 113.) Current monitoring reference setting Pr. 56 (Refer to page 113.) Torque monitoring reference setting Pr. 866 (Refer to page 113.) Output filter of terminal DA1 Pr. 867 (Refer to page 195.)
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

4.7.2

Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 866

Speed

Torque

Position

) PARAMETERS 4

Set the value that is referenced when the output speed or output current is selected for the DA1 and DA2 terminals and PU level meter display.
Output or display

10VDC (terminal DA1) 10VDC (terminal DA2)

Pr.55 Pr.56 Pr.866

Parameter
55 56 866

Name

Factory Setting

Setting Range
0 to 3600r/min 0 to 500A 0 to 400%

Remarks
Extended mode

Speed monitoring reference 1800r/min Current monitoring reference Inverter rated output current Torque monitoring reference 150%

113

Automatic restart (Pr. 57, Pr. 58)

4.8 Automatic restart (Pr. 57, Pr. 58)

4.8.1 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165

with Encoder

without Encoder

with Encoder

without Encoder

Speed

Torque

You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor (with the motor coasting) when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure.
Parameter 57 58

Name
Restart coasting time Restart cushion time Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection First cushion time for restart First cushion voltage for restart Restart current restriction level

Factory Setting Setting Range

9999 1.0s 0 0.1 to 5s 9999 0 to 60s 0 1 10 0s 0% 150% 0 to 20s 0 to 100% 0 to 200% Valid for V/F control Set to 0.1s.

Remarks

162

9999: No restart Valid for V/F control 0: With speed search Valid for vector control 1: Without speed search without encoder and V/F control ("10" is 10: Speed search valid for vector control initiated per start with encoder also)

Extended mode

163 164 165

<When vector control with encoder is exercised>

(The Pr. 162 setting "0, 1" is invalid under vector control with encoder.) Instantaneous power failure (power failure) time
Power supply (R, S, T) Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output speed f (r/min) Pr.57 Pr.7 * 0r/min when search speed is 15r/min or less. Pr.58 is invalid under vector control

<When vector control without encoder is exercised>

Pr. 162 = 0 (with speed search) Instantaneous power failure (power failure) time Power supply (R, S, T) Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output frequency (Hz) Inverter output voltage E (V) Pr.57 + Speed search time Pr. 162 = 1 (without speed search) Instantaneous power failure (power failure) time Power supply (R, S, T) Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output frequency (Hz) Inverter output voltage E (V) Coasting time Pr. 57 setting

Pr.7

<When V/F control is exercised>

Pr. 162 = 0 (with speed search) Instantaneous power failure (power failure) time Power supply (R, S, T) Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output frequency (Hz) Inverter output voltage E (V) Pr.57 + Speed search time Pr. 162 = 1 (without speed search) Restart voltage cushion time Instantaneous power failure (power failure) time Voltage Power supply 100% (R, S, T)
Pr.164

Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output frequency (Hz) Inverter output voltage E (V) Coasting time Pr. 57 setting

Pr.163 Pr.58 Pr. 163 = 0s, Pr. 164 = 0%

Time

REMARKS

Pr.7 Restart voltage cushion time (Pr. 58 setting)

Restart voltage cushion time Pr. 58 setting

When Pr. 162 = "1", the output speed before an instantaneous power failure is stored and output at the time of restart. If the power of the inverter control circuit is lost, the output speed berore an instantaneous power failure cannot be stored and the inverter will start at 0r/min.

114

Automatic restart (Pr. 57, Pr. 58)

<Setting>
Refer to the above figures and following table to set the corresponding parameters.
Parameter Number Setting
0

Description
0.1s coasting time This setting may be used without problem during vector control. Waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after power is restored from an instantaneous power failure. (Set this time between 0.1s and 5s according to the inertia moment (J) and torque magnitude.)

57

0.1 to 5s

REMARKS
Recommended settings for Pr. 57 during vector control without encoder and V/F control are 1.0s for 2.2 to 7.5K, 3.0s for 15K or more. The setting value does not include resetting time of the inverter. Without restart With speed search Speed search is made after detection of an instantaneous power failure. Without speed search Independently of the motor coasting speed, the output voltage is gradually increased with the speed kept as preset, i.e. a reduced voltage starting system.

9999 0

162

REMARKS
Increase output voltage instantly under vector control without encoder. 10 58 163 164 165 0 to 60s 0 to 20s 0 to 100% 0 to 200% Speed search is made on startup. The motor starts running at the speed detected by the encoder under vector control with encoder. Normally the motor may be run with the factory settings, but restart or voltage cushion time are adjustable according to the load (inertia moment, torque) magnitude using Pr. 58, Pr. 163, or Pr. 164. Also the output frequency is reduced when the current flow exceeds the Pr. 165 setting. Invalid for vector control with encoder.

(1) To make automatic restart after instantaneous power failure valid. Restart function after instantaneous power failure is made valid by setting a value other than "9999" in Pr. 57 "restart coasting time". Time set in this Pr. 57 is the control start waiting time from power restoration to automatic restart. (2) Selection of whether speed search is used or not (Pr. 162 "automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection") Smooth start at power restoration is available as required only during vector control without encoder and V/F control. CAUTION 1. When Pr. 162 = "0" under V/F control, DC injection brake is applied for a moment at speed detection. Therefore speed may decrease if the inertia is small. 2. To start during coasting under vector control without encoder, set "10" (speed search initiated per start) in Pr. 162. CAUTION 1. With speed search (Pr. 162= "0") under vector control without encoder or V/F control. When the inverter capacity is two rank or more larger than the motor capacity when Pr. 162="0" (with speed search), the inverter may not start due to overcurrent (OCT) alarm. Searchable speed is 3000r/min or less. Speed is regarded as 0r/min when the search speed is 150r/min or less. 2. The restart coasting time in Pr. 57 does not include the speed search time (300ms maximum). There is no delay time due to speed search when speed search is not made or vector control is exercised. (excluding the inverter starting time) 3. If two or more motors are connected to one inverter, the inverter functions abnormally. (The inverter does not start smoothly.) 4. When restart operation is selected, UVT and IPF among the alarm output signals are not output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. 5. The SU and FU signals are not output during restart but are output after the restart cushion time has elapsed.

CAUTION
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected, the motor and machine will start suddenly (after the restart coasting time has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. Stay away from the motor and machine. When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, apply the supplied CAUTION seals, provided for the Instruction Manual (basic), in easily visible places. The motor coasts to a stop as soon as the start signal is turned off or automatic restart cushion time. Related parameters
Setting of alarm output signal for executing automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Pr. 65 "retry selection" (Refer to page 121.)
STOP RESET

is pressed during

115

PARAMETERS 4

Additional functions (Pr. 59)

4.9 Additional functions (Pr. 59)

4.9.1 Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

Even if the operation panel is located away from the control box, you can use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation, without using analog signals.
Parameter Name Factory Setting Setting Range
0 1 59 Remote setting function selection 0 2 3

Remarks
Remote function not activated. Extended Remote function activated: Not stored into E2PROM. mode Remote function activated: Not stored into E2PROM. (Turn on STF (STR) to clear remote setting) Remote function activated: Stored into E2PROM.

(1) Pr. 59 = "1" or "2"

Output speed (r/min) Pr. 59 = "2" Pr. 59 = "1" *

ON Acceleration (RH) Deceleration (RM) Clear (RL) Forward rotation (STF) Power ON ON ON ON ON ON

ON

ON

ON ON

*External operation speed or PU operation speed other than multi-speed

(2)

Pr. 59 = "3"
Output speed (r/min)

ON Acceleration (RH) Deceleration (RM) Forward rotation (STF) Power ON ON ON ON

*External operation speed or PU operation speed other than multi-speed REMARKS

When the remote function is used, the output speed of the inverter can be compensated for as follows: For external operation, speed set by RH/RM operation plus external analog speed command For PU operation mode, speed set by RH/RM operation plus DU/PU digital setting speed When any value other than 0 is set in Pr. 59, multi-speed operation is invalid. (Refer to page 90.) Speed compensation by terminal 1 is made invalid when speed command by terminal 2 is selected. Set "1" in Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation" to enable speed compensation of terminal 1 (Pr. 28 = "0").

<Setting>
Use Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether the speed setting storage function* in the remote setting mode is used or not. When "1" or "2" is set in Pr. 59, the functions of signals RH, RM and RL are changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RL), respectively. Use Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection) to set signals RH, RM and RL. * Speed setting storage function (Pr. 59 = "1") This function stores the remotely-set speed (speed set by RH/RM operation) into memory. When power is switched off once, then on, operation is resumed with that output speed value.

116

Additional functions (Pr. 59)

<Speed setting storage conditions>
Speed at which the start signal (STF or STR) turns off The remotely-set speed is stored every one minute after one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) signals. (The speed is written if the present speed value compared with the past speed value every one minute is different.) (The state of the RL signal dose not affect writing.) REMARKS
This function is invalid under jog operation and PID control operation. Setting speed is "0" Even when the remotely-set speed is cleared by turning on the RL (clear) signal after turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at the remotely-set speed stored in the last operation if power is reapplied before one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals.
remotely-set speed stored in the last operation Output speed (r/min) within one minute remotely-set speed stored in the last operation

Acceleration (RH) Deceleration (RM) Clear (RL) Forward rotation (STF) Power

OFF

ON ON ON ON ON ON

When the remotely-set speed is cleared by turning on the RL (clear) signal after turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at the speed in the remotely-set speed cleared state if power is reapplied after one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals.
remotely-set speed stored in the last operation Output speed (r/min) more than one minute one minute operation at a set speed of 0r/min

Acceleration (RH) Deceleration (RM) Clear (RL) Forward rotation (STF) Power

OFF

ON ON ON ON ON ON

CAUTION The speed can be varied by RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) between 0 and the maximum speed (Pr. 1 setting). When the acceleration or deceleration signal turns on, the set speed varies according to the slope set in Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time" or Pr. 45 "second deceleration time". The output speed acceleration/deceleration times are as set in Pr. 7 "acceleration time" and Pr. 8 "deceleration time", respectively. Therefore, the longer preset times are used to vary the actual output speed. (Refer to page 30 for the set speed and output speed.) If the start signal (STF or STR) is off, turning on the RH (acceleration) or RM (deceleration) signal varies the set speed.

CAUTION
When selecting this function, re-set Pr. 1 "maximum speed" according to the machine. Related parameters
RH, RM, RL signal terminal assignment Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection) (Refer to page 163.) Maximum speed setting Pr. 1 "maximum speed" (Refer to page 89.) Output speed acceleration/deceleration time Pr. 7 "acceleration time", Pr. 8 "deceleration time" (Refer to page 91.) Time setting for acceleration/deceleration Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time", Pr. 45 "second deceleration time" (Refer to page 91.) RH, RM, RL signal compensation Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation" (Refer to page 101.)

117

PARAMETERS 4

Brake sequence (Pr. 60, Pr. 278 to Pr. 285)

4.10 Brake sequence (Pr. 60, Pr. 278 to Pr. 285)

4.10.1 Brake sequence function (Pr. 60, Pr. 278 to Pr. 285
with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

The inverter automatically sets appropriate parameters for operation. This function is used to output from the inverter the mechanical brake opening completion signal timing signal in vertical lift and other applications. This function prevents the load from dropping with gravity at a start due to the operation timing error of the mechanical brake or an overcurrent alarm from occurring at a stop, ensuring secure operation. POINT Set "7" or "8" in Pr. 60. Set any of "0, 2, 4, 10, 12" in Pr. 800 "control system selection" under external operation and set speed control. (Refer to page 182)
Factory Setting
0 20r/min 130% 0.3s 0.3s 25r/min 0.3s 0 9999

Parameter
60 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285

Name
Intelligent mode selection Brake opening speed Brake opening current Brake opening current detection time Brake operation time at start Brake operation speed Brake operation time at stop Deceleration detection function selection Overspeed detection speed

Setting Range
0, 7, 8 0 to 900r/min 0 to 200% 0 to 2s 0 to 5s 0 to 900r/min 0 to 5s 0, 1 0 to 900r/min, 9999

Remarks

Extended mode

CAUTION When brake sequence mode is selected, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is invalid.

(1) Wiring example

Sink logic
Pr.183=15 Pr.190=20
MC Mechanical brake
NFB

R Power supply Start signal Multi-speed signal MC Brake opening completion signal (BRI signal) S T STF

U V W 24VDC Brake opening request signal (BOF signal) * Note the permissible current of the inverter's internal transistor. (24VDC 0.1A) Motor

DI3 (Caution) DO1 DI4 (Caution) SD SE

MC

CAUTION The input signal terminal used differs according to the parameter settings. (Refer to page 120.)

118

Brake sequence (Pr. 60, Pr. 278 to Pr. 285)

(2) Operation example
At start: When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running. When the internal speed command reaches the value set in Pr. 278 and the output current is not less than the value set in Pr. 279, the inverter outputs the brake opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 280 has elapsed. When the time set in Pr. 281 has elapsed after the brake opening completion signal (BRI) was input, the inverter increases the internal speed command to the set speed. At stop: When the speed has decreased to the speed set in Pr. 282, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is turned off. When the time set in Pr. 283 has elapsed after the brake operation confirmation signal (BRI) was input, the inverter output is switched off. *If Pr. 60 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input), this time is the time after the brake opening request signal is output. 1. Pr. 60 = "7" (brake opening completion signal input)
Target speed Pr.278 Pr.13 Pr.280 Pr.281 Pr.282 Pr.278 Pr.283

Input speed command value STF Output I Brake opening request (BOF signal) Brake opening completion (BRI signal) Electromagnetic brake operation Closed Pr.279

ON

ON ON

Opened

Closed Time

2. Pr. 60 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input)

Target speed Pr.278 Pr.13 Pr.280 Pr.281 Pr.282 Pr.278 Pr.283

STF Output I Brake opening request (BOF signal) Electromagnetic brake operation

Pr.279 ON

Closed

Opened

Closed Time

119

PARAMETERS 4

Input speed command value

ON

Brake sequence (Pr. 60, Pr. 278 to Pr. 285)

(3) Parameter setting
1. Set speed control in Pr.800 "control system selection". (Refer to page 182.) 2. Set "7 or 8" (brake sequence mode) in Pr. 60. To ensure more complete sequence control, it is recommended to set "7" (brake opening completion signal input) in Pr. 60.
Pr. 60 Setting
0 7 Brake sequence mode 8

Operation Mode
Normal operation mode

Description
With mechanical brake opening This function causes the inverter to output the completion signal input mechanical brake operation timing signal for elevating application. Without mechanical brake For the function details and setting method, refer to opening completion signal input Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 (brake sequence function).

REMARKS
Even if the intelligent operation function has been selected, inputting the jog or RT (second function selection) signal during an inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give priority to jog operation or second function selection. After intelligent operation has been started, neither the jog signal nor the RT signal is accepted.

3. Refer to the following table and set the parameters.

Parameter
278 279 280 281 282

Name
Brake opening speed Brake opening current Brake opening current detection time Brake operation time at start Brake operation speed Brake operation time at stop Deceleration detection function selection Overspeed detection speed*

Setting Range
0 to 900r/min 0 to 200% 0 to 2s 0 to 5s 0 to 900r/min

Description
Set the value higher than the Pr. 13 "starting speed". Setting is enabled only when Pr. 278 Pr. 282. Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to 90%. If the setting is too low, the load is liable to drop with gravity at start. Suppose that the rated inverter current is 100%. Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1 to 0.3s. Pr. 60 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened. Pr. 60 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened + about 0.1 to 0.2s. Generally, set the Pr. 278 setting + 1 to 2r/min to this parameter. Setting is enabled only when Pr. 282 Pr. 278. Pr. 60 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + 0.1s. Pr. 60 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + about 0.2 to 0.3s. Deceleration is not detected. If deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation, the inverter alarm (E.MB2) is provided to shut off the output and turn off the brake opening request signal (BOF). If (detected speed) - (output speed) > Pr. 285, the inverter alarm (E.MB1) is provided to shut off the output and turn off the brake opening request signal (BOF). Overspeed is not detected.

283

0 to 5s 0 1

284

285

0 to 900r/min

9999 * This function is valid during vector control with encoder and vector control without encoder.

CAUTION When using this function, set the acceleration/deceleration time to 1s or longer.

(4) Setting terminals

The terminals must be assigned using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195.
Brake Sequence Mode Pr. 60 = 7 Pr. 60 = 8 (with mechanical brake opening (without mechanical brake opening completion signal) completion signal)
Brake opening request Brake opening completion signal Brake opening request

Signal
BOF BRI

CAUTION 1. The brake opening completion signal (BRI) is a parameter valid when Pr. 60 = 7. 2. Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, and Pr. 195 may affect the other functions. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. (Refer to page 163.)

120

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79)

(5) Protective functions
If any of the following errors occurs in the brake sequence mode, the inverter results in an alarm, shuts off the output, and turns off the brake opening request signal (BOF terminal). On the operation panel (FR-DU04-1) LED or parameter unit (FR-PU04V) screen, the following errors are displayed:
Error Display
E.MB1 E.MB2 E.MB3 E.MB4 E.MB5 E.MB6 E.MB7

Description
(Detected speed) - (output speed) > Pr. 285 during vector control. (Overspeed detection function) Deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation (Use Pr. 284 to select this function.) (Except stall prevention operation) Brake opening request signal (BOF) turned on though the motor is at a stop. (Gravity drop prevention function) More than 2s after the run command (forward or reverse rotation) is input, the brake opening request signal (BOF) does not turn on. More than 2s after the brake opening request signal turned on, the brake opening completion signal (BRI) does not turn on. Though the inverter had turned on the brake opening request signal (BOF), the brake opening completion signal (BRI) turned off midway. More than 2s after the brake opening request signal (BOF) turned off at a stop, the brake opening completion signal (BRI) does not turn off.

4.11 Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79)

4.11.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

When the inverter output is stopped by the protective function (major fault), this function causes the inverter to automatically reset itself to make a retry. You can select whether retry operation is to be performed or not, alarms reset for retry, number of retries made, and waiting time.
Parameter
65 67 68 69

Name
Retry selection Number of retries at alarm occurrence Retry waiting time Retry count display erasure

Factory Setting
0 0 1s 0

Setting Range
0 to 5 0, 1 to 10, 101 to 110 0 to 10s 0

Remarks

Extended mode

<Setting>
Use Pr. 65 to select the protective functions (major faults) to be activated for retries.
Errors Reset for Retry Error definition Abbreviation
Acceleration overcurrent Constant-speed overcurrent Deceleration overcurrent Acceleration overvoltage Constant-speed overvoltage Deceleration overvoltage Motor thermal relay Transistor thermal relay Instantaneous power failure Undervoltage Brake transistor Ground fault protection Output phase failure External thermal relay Stall prevention-triggered stop Option alarm Option 1 alarm E.OC1 E.OC2 E.OC3 E.OV1 E.OV2 E.OV3 E.THM E.THT E.IPF E.UVT E.BE E.GF E.LF E.OHT E.OLT E.OPT E.OP1

Pr. 65 2 3

Remarks

121

PARAMETERS 4

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79)

Errors Reset for Retry Error definition Abbreviation
Option 2 alarm Option 3 alarm Storage device alarm PU disconnection Retry count excess CPU error Fan stop Fin overheat Overspeed occurrence Speed deviation large Encoder no-signal Position error large Encoder A no-signal MB1 MB2 MB3 MB4 MB5 MB6 MB7 P24 short circuit P12 short circuit Circuit alarm (P5S short circuit) E.OP2 E.OP3 E.PE E.PUE E.RET E.CPU E.FAN E.FIN E.OS E.OSD E.ECT E.OD E.ECA E.MB1 E.MB2 E.MB3 E.MB4 E.MB5 E.MB6 E.MB7 E.P24 E.P12 E.CTE Under vector control with encoder Under vector control with encoder Under vector control with encoder Under vector control with encoder Under vector control with encoder Brake sequence Brake sequence Brake sequence Brake sequence Brake sequence Brake sequence Brake sequence

Pr. 65 2 3

Remarks

indicates the errors selected for retry.

Use Pr. 67 to set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.

Pr. 67 Setting
0 1 to 10 101 to 110

Number of Retries
Retry is not made. 1 to 10 times 1 to 10 times

Alarm Signal Output

Not output every time.* Output every time.

* If the number of retries to be made is exceeded, "

" (retry count excess) is displayed.

Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a retry is made in the range 0 to 10s. Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restarts made by retries. Writing "0" erases the cumulative number of times. CAUTION The cumulative number in Pr. 69 is incremented by "1" when retry operation is regarded as successful, i.e. when normal operation is continued without the protective function (major fault) being activated during a period four times longer than the time set in Pr. 68. If the protective function (major fault) is activated consecutively within a period four times longer than the above waiting time, the operation panel may show data different from the latest data or the parameter unit (FR-PU04V) may show data different from the first retry data. The data stored as the error reset for retry is only that of the protective function (major fault) activated the first time. When an inverter alarm is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the accumulated data of the electronic thermal relay function, etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-on reset.)

CAUTION
When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and machine unless required. They will start suddenly (after the predetermined time has elapsed) after occurrence of an alarm. When you have selected the retry function, apply the CAUTION seals provided for the Instruction Manual (basic) in easily visible places. Pr. 70 Refer to Pr. 30 (page 105)

122

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79) 4.11.2 Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450
Set the motor used. Refer to page 8 for the motor setting, etc.
Parameter
71 450
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Name
Applied motor Second applied motor

Factory Setting
30 9999

Setting Range
0, 3 to 8, 10, 13 to 18, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34 0, 3 to 8, 10, 13 to 18, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 9999

Remarks

9999: Second applied motor invalid

<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set this parameter according to the motor used.
Setting
0 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 23 24 30 (factory setting) 33 34

Motor

Control Constants
Inverter internal constants Offline auto tuning Offline auto tuning data utilization Star connection direct input Delta connection direct input Star connection direct input + offline auto tuning Delta connection direct input + offline auto tuning Inverter internal constants Offline auto tuning Offline auto tuning data utilization Star connection direct input Delta connection direct input Star connection direct input + offline auto tuning Delta connection direct input + offline auto tuning Inverter internal constants Offline auto tuning Offline auto tuning data utilization Inverter internal constants

Standard motor

Constant-torque motor

SF-JR (4P)-1.5kW (2HP) or less (during vector control)

Vector control dedicated motor

Offline auto tuning Offline auto tuning data utilization

CAUTION
Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. REMARKS
For online auto tuning, refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).

123

PARAMETERS 4

CAUTION 1. Refer to page 132 for offline auto tuning. 2. Refer to page 41 when using the second motor.

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79) 4.11.3 PWM carrier frequency selection (Pr. 72, Pr. 240
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

By parameter setting, you can set to exercise the Soft-PWM control that changes the motor tone . Soft-PWM control is a control system that changes the motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending complex tone.
Parameter
72 240

Name
PWM frequency selection Soft-PWM setting

Factory Setting Setting Range

1 0 1 to 6 0, 1

Remarks
Simple mode Extended mode

<Setting>
Pr. 72 Setting
1 2 3 4 5 6

Description
2.25kHz 4.5kHz 6.75kHz 9kHz 11.25kHz 13.5kHz

CAUTION 1. An increased PWM carrier frequency will decrease the motor sound but increase noise and leakage currents. Therefore, perform the reduction techniques. (Refer to page 19.)
Pr. 240 Setting
0 1

Description Soft-PWM
Invalid Valid (when Pr. 72 = "1 or 2")

124

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79) 4.11.4 Speed setting signal on/off selection (Pr. 73
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

You can select the override function to make main speed setting with the speed setting auxiliary terminal 1. Using Pr. 73, set the input specifications of terminals 1 and 2 and whether to use the override function or not. POINT Set "0" in Pr. 807 "speed restriction selection". (Refer to page 185.) Set "0" in Pr. 868 "No. 1 terminal function selection". (Refer to page 195.) Refer to Pr. 902 "speed setting No. 2 bias", Pr. 903 "speed setting No. 2 gain" for calibration. (Refer to page 202.)
Parameter Name Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0 4 10 14

Remarks

73

Speed setting signal

Extended mode

Pr. 73 Setting
0 4 10 14 0 4 10 14 0, 4, 10, 14

Control Mode

Override

*2

Function Polarity reversible

Terminal 1 (0 to 10V)
Addition auxiliary *1 Speed command Main speed setting Addition auxiliary Speed command
*1

Terminal 2 (0 to 10V)*3
Main speed setting Override signal Main speed setting Override signal Speed restriction Override signal Speed restriction Override signal No function

Speed control
*2

*4

Main speed setting Addition auxiliary Speed restriction Speed restriction Addition auxiliary Speed restriction Speed restriction No function

Torque control
*4

Position control

No function

CAUTION To change the maximum output speed at the input of the maximum speed command voltage, use the speed setting voltage gain, Pr. 903 (Pr. 905). At this time, the command voltage need not be input. Also, the acceleration/deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference speed, is not affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting.

125

PARAMETERS 4

*1:The value of terminal 1 (speed setting auxiliary input) is added to the main speed setting signal of terminal 2. *2:When override has been selected, terminal 1 is for the main speed setting and terminal 2 for the override signal (50 to 150% at 0 to 10V). (Refer to page 169 for bias/gain adjustment.) *3:When "30" or "31" is set in Pr. 128, terminal 2 acts as the PID set point function. *4:When override has been selected, terminal 1 is for speed restriction and terminal 2 is for the override signal.

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79)

(a) When Pr. 73 "speed setting signal" value is "0" The voltage across terminals 1-5 is added to the voltage signal (positive) across terminals 2-5. If the result of addition is negative, it is regarded as 0 and the motor comes to a stop. (b) When Pr. 73 "speed setting signal" value is "10" The polarity reversible operation function is selected. The voltage signal across terminals 1-5 is added to the voltage signal (positive) across terminals 2-5. A positive addition result turns the motor in the forward rotation direction (when the STF terminal turns on), or a negative result turns it in the reverse rotation direction (when the STF terminal turns on). The compensation signal of terminal 1 can also be added to the multi-speed setting.
Output speed When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 5V Output speed When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 5V

When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 0V -10V -5V 0 +5V Forward rotation When STF-SD is on +10V Terminal 1 -10V -5V 0 +5V +10V

When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 0V Terminal 1

When STF-SD is on

Reverse rotation

Forward rotation

Forward rotation

Reverse Forward rotation rotation

(a) When Pr. 73 setting is 0

(b) When Pr. 73 setting is 10

Auxiliary Input Characteristics

1) Multi-speed input compensation By setting 1 in Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation selection" (factory setting 0), the speed from the auxiliary input terminal 1 is added when multi-speed operation is performed. (Refer to page 90.)
Inverter Output According to Start Signal and Auxiliary Input Terminal Polarity Pr. 73 Setting
0 10

Added Command Voltage

+ +

Start Signal Input STF-SD

Forward rotation Stop Forward rotation Reverse rotation

STR-SD
Reverse rotation Stop Reverse rotation Forward rotation

2)

Override For the above compensation input, the fixed compensation amount is applied to each speed. Using the override function easily varies each speed equally. By setting either "4 or 14" in Pr. 73, override allows the parameter-set multiple speeds and analog input across terminals 1-5 to be varied equally within the range 50% to 150% (The range can be increased with Pr. 252 and Pr. 253) by the analog signal input across terminals 2-5. How to find each speed (N)

Compensation amount

150% 100% 50% 0 5 10V Terminal 2

Override Setting Signal vs. Compensation Amount

High speed

Compensation range Middle by override speed Low speed

N = Npr.

100

[r/min]

Output speed (r/min)

Npr.: Speed setting [r/min] Multiple speeds Analog input across terminals 1-5 : Override compensation amount [%] (Analog input across terminals 2-5)

Time

Multi-speed Override Operation

126

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79) 4.11.5 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

You can select the reset input acceptance, PU (FR-DU04-1/FR-PU04V) connector disconnection detection function and PU stop function. Reset selection: You can select the reset function input (RES signal) timing. Disconnected PU detection: When the disconnection of the PU (FR-DU04-1/FR-PU04V) from the inverter for more than 1s is detected, the inverter outputs an alarm code (E.PUE) and comes to an alarm stop. PU stop selection: When an alarm etc. occurs in any operation mode, you can stop the motor from the operation panel by pressing
Parameter
75
STOP RESET

.
Remarks
Extended mode

Name
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection

Factory Setting
14

Setting Range
0 to 3, 14 to 17

<Setting>
Pr. 75 Setting
0 1 2 3 14 15 16 17

Reset Selection
Reset input is always enabled. Reset input is enabled only when the protective function is activated. Reset input is always enabled. Reset input is enabled only when the protective function is activated. Reset input is always enabled. Reset input is enabled only when the protective function is activated. Reset input is always enabled. Reset input is enabled only when the protective function is activated.

Disconnected PU Detection
If the PU is disconnected, operation will be continued as-is. When the PU is disconnected, the inverter output is shut off. If the PU is disconnected, operation will be continued as-is. When the PU is disconnected, the inverter output is shut off.

PU Stop Selection

The PU stop key is invalid. RESET input is valid only in the PU or combined operation mode (Pr. 79 = "4").

STOP

input decelerates the motor to a stop in any of the PU, external and communication operation modes.

STOP RESET

(1) Restarting method when stop was made by inputting (Method of restarting from indication)

STOP RESET

from the operation panel

1) After the motor has decelerated to a stop, turn off the STF or STR signal. 2) Press
MODE

twice* to display

CAUTION When Pr. 79 = "3", press (*For monitor screen) .......

MODE

three times to display

. Then press

and proceed to 3).

Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details of the monitor display provided by pressing
MODE

3) Press SET . 4) Turn on the STF or STR signal. REMARKS

When you provide a reset input (RES) during operation, the inverter that is being reset shuts off the output and resets the internal heat integrating value of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries, and the motor coasts. The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. This value does not return to the initial value even if parameter (all) clear is executed. When the motor is stopped from the PU, and are displayed alternately. An alarm output is not provided.

127

PARAMETERS 4

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79)

(2) Restarting method when stop was made by inputting
1) After the motor has decelerated to a stop, turn off the STF or STR signal. 2) Press
EXT

STOP RESET

from PU

Speed

. )
Operation panel STF ON (STR) OFF
STOP RESET

Time
EXT

..... (Recovery from

3) Turn on the STF or STR signal.

Example of stop and restart during external operation

Alternatively, you can make a restart by making a power-on reset or resetting the inverter using the reset terminal of the inverter. REMARKS
When you provide a reset input (RES) during operation, the inverter that is being reset shuts off the output and resets the data of the electronic thermal relay function, and the motor coasts. To make a restart, confirm that the PU is connected and then reset the inverter. The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. This value does not return to the initial value even if parameter (all) clear is executed. When the motor is stopped from the PU, PS is displayed. An alarm output is not provided. Pr. 250 is made invalid.

CAUTION
Do not reset the inverter with the start signal input. Doing so will start the inverter immediately after it has recovered from the error, causing hazard.
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

4.11.6 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77

Speed

Torque

Position

You can select between enable and disable for parameter write. This function is used to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by misoperation.
Parameter
77

Name
Parameter write disable selection

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0, 1, 2

Remarks
Simple mode

<Setting>
Pr. 77 Setting
0 1 2

Function
Write is enabled only during a stop in the PU operation mode.* Parameter write is disabled. Write is enabled even during operation. Write is enabled independently of the operation mode.

CAUTION * The shaded parameters in the parameter list (refer to page 78) always allow setting. Even when "2" is set in Pr. 77, the following parameters do not allow writing during operation. Pr. 60, Pr. 71, Pr. 72, Pr. 79, Pr. 80 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 96, Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195, Pr. 450, Pr. 451, Pr. 453, Pr. 454, Pr. 800, Pr. 819, Pr. 851, Pr. 852, Pr. 859 and Pr. 868 Stop operation when changing the values of the above parameters. By setting "1" in Pr. 77, the following clear operations can be inhibited: Parameter clear Parameter all clear Even when "1" is set in Pr. 77, write is allowed for Pr. 22, Pr. 75, Pr. 77 and Pr. 79.

128

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79) 4.11.7 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

This function can prevent any reverse rotation fault resulting from the mis-input of the start signal. POINT Used for a machine that runs only in one direction, e.g. fan, pump. (The setting of this parameter is valid for combined operation, PU operation, external operation and communication operation.)
Parameter
78

Name
Reverse rotation prevention selection

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0, 1, 2

Remarks
Extended mode

<Setting>
Control Method Pr. 78 Setting
0 Speed control V/F control 1 (reverse rotation lock) 2 (forward rotation lock) 0 1 (reverse rotation lock)

Start Signal STF STR

Valid Valid Invalid Valid Valid Valid Invalid

Restriction on Analog Reversible

Negative input starts rotation in the direction opposite to that of start signal

Negative input does not start rotation. Valid Valid Invalid Negative input starts rotation in the direction opposite to that of start signal Negative analog input results as follows.

Torque control

Speed
Start speed or less When rotation is in the same direction as that of start signal and speed is higher than starting speed.

Operation
No rotation Torque in the direction opposite to that of start signal is generated.

2 (forward rotation lock)

Invalid

Valid

0 Position control 1 (reverse rotation lock) 2 (forward rotation lock)

4.11.8 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79

with Encoder

without Encoder

with Encoder

without Encoder

Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Used to select the operation mode of the inverter. The inverter can be run from the operation panel or parameter unit (PU operation), with external signals (external operation), or by combination of PU operation and external operation (external/PU combined operation). The external operation mode is selected at power-on (factory setting).
Parameter
79

Name
Operation mode selection

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0 to 4, 6 to 8

129

PARAMETERS 4

Functions as a stroke signal and motor does not rotate in the direction where the STF or STR signal does not exist. Motor does not rotate in the reverse rotation direction. Motor does not rotate in the forward rotation direction.

Under position control, analog command is irrelevant to the forward/reverse rotation lock function as it does not function in other than torque restriction setting (absolute value used for operation).

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79)

<Setting>
In the following table, operation from the operation panel or parameter unit is abbreviated to PU operation.
Pr. 79 Setting
0

Function
At power-on, the external operation mode is selected. You can change between the PU operation mode and external operation mode from the operation panel ( MODE ) or parameter unit ( settings 1 and 2 for the corresponding modes.
PU

EXT

). Refer to the fields of

Operation mode
1 PU operation mode External operation mode

Speed command
Setting from the operation panel or FR-PU04V External signal input (across terminals 2(1)-5, multi-speed selection, jog)
FWD

Start signal
,
REV

2 3

External signal input (terminal STF, STR)

External/PU Digital setting by PU key operation or external signal input External signal input combined (multi-speed setting) (terminal STF, STR) operation mode 1 External/PU External signal input (across terminals 2(1)-5, multi-speed combined FWD , REV selection, jog) operation mode 2 Switchover mode Switchover between PU operation, external operation and computer link operation (when a communication option is used) can be done while running. External operation mode (PU operation interlock) X12 signal ON ...... Can be switched to PU operation mode (output stop during external operation) X12 signal OFF .... Switching to PU operation mode inhibited Operation mode switchover using external signal (disallowed during operation) X16 signal ON ...... Switched to external operation mode X16 signal OFF .... Switched to PU operation mode

REMARKS
A stop function(PU stop selection) by of the PU (FR-DU04-1/FR-PU04V) is made valid during the operation RESET other than the PU operation mode. (Refer to page 127) Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined operation, and these settings differ in starting method. Refer to page 141 for the computer link operation mode.
STOP

(1) Switchover mode

PU operation, external operation and computer link operation (when communication option is used) can be used by switching between them.
Operation Mode Switching Switching Operation/Operating Status
1) Change the operation mode to the PU operation mode from the operation panel or parameter unit. Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation. Set speed is as set by the potentiometer (speed setting potentiometer). (Note that the setting will disappear when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.) 1) Mode change command to computer link mode is transmitted from the computer. Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation. Set speed is as set by the potentiometer (speed setting potentiometer). (Note that the setting will disappear when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.) 1) Press the external operation key of the parameter unit. Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal. Set speed is determined by the external speed setting signal. 1) Mode change command to computer link mode is transmitted from the computer. Rotation direction and set speed are the same as those of PU operation. 1) Command to change to external mode is transmitted from the computer. Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal. Set speed is determined by the external speed setting signal. 1) Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit. Rotation direction and set speed are the same as those of computer link operation.

External operation to PU operation

External operation to computer link operation

PU operation to external operation PU operation to computer link operation Computer link operation to external operation Computer link operation to PU operation

130

Operation selection function 2 (Pr. 65 to Pr. 79)

(2) PU operation interlock
The PU operation interlock function is designed to forcibly change the operation mode to the external operation mode when the X12 signal input turns off. This function prevents the inverter from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left unswitched from the PU operation mode. 1) Preparation Set "7" (PU operation interlock) in Pr. 79. Using any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection), allocate the terminal used to input the X12 signal. (Refer to page 163) REMARKS
Changing the terminal assignment with any of Pr. 180 to 183 and Pr. 187 may affect the other functions. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.

2)

Function
X12 Signal
ON

Function/Operation
Output stop during external operation. Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation mode. PU operation allowed. Forcibly switched to the external operation mode. External operation allowed. Switching to the PU operation mode inhibited.

OFF

<Function/operation changed by switching on-off the X12 signal>

Operating Condition Operation Status mode
During stop PU During operation During stop External During operation

X12 Signal
ONOFF (*) ONOFF (*) OFFON ONOFF OFFON ONOFF

Operation Mode

Operating Status

During stop PU External If external operation speed setting and start signal are entered, operation is performed in that status. During stop External During operation output stop Output stop operation

REMARKS
If the X12 signal is on, the operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode when the start signal (STF, STR) is on. * The operation mode switches to the external operation mode independently of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is on or off. Therefore, the motor is run in the external operation mode when the X12 signal is turned off with either of STF and STR on. When the X12 signal is off during external operation mode, the operation mode cannot be changed to the PU operation mode. (Change to the PU operation mode after switching the X12 signal on)

(3) Operation mode external signal switching function

1) Preparation Set "8" (operation mode with signal) in Pr. 79. Using any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection), allocate the terminal used to input the X16 signal. REMARKS
Changing the terminal assignment with any of Pr. 180 to 183 and Pr. 187 may affect the other functions. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. Refer to page 163 for details.

2) Function This switching is enabled only during an inverter stop and cannot be achieved during operation.
X16 Signal
ON OFF

Operation Mode
External operation mode (cannot be changed to the PU operation mode) PU operation mode (cannot be changed to the external operation mode)

Related parameters
Pr. 75 "PU stop selection" (Refer to page 127.)

131

PARAMETERS 4

Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 96)

4.12 Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 96)

4.12.1 Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 9, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 83, Pr. 84, Pr. 71, Pr. 96, Pr. 450, Pr. 452
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

If any other manufacturer s motor is used, using the offline auto tuning function runs the motor with the optimum operating characteristics. By performing offline auto tuning, the inverter measures the necessary motor constants. Offline auto tuning can be performed with an inertia load, e.g. coupling, connected. (As the load is lighter, tuning accuracy is higher. Tuning accuracy does not change if the inertia is large.) For the offline auto tuning, you can select either the motor non-rotation mode or rotation mode. The rotation mode has higher tuning accuracy than the non-rotation mode. The rotation mode should be selected for the online auto tuning. If any other manufacturer s motor is used, perform offline auto tuning (Pr. 96="101") with motor alone to run the motor before performing online auto tuning. (The motor with inertia load can be connected.) (For online auto tuning, refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).) CAUTION The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. Special motors such as high-slip motor and high-speed motor cannot be tuned. Motor runs at up to about the rated speed of the motor. Make sure that the motor is connected. (At a tuning start, the motor should be at a stop.) Tune the motor alone without connecting a load (e.g. frictional stationary load) to the motor. (An inertia load such as a coupling may remain connected.) 6. Use the encoder that is coupled directly to the motor shaft without looseness. 7. Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed with a reactor or surge voltage suppression filter connected between the inverter and motor. Remove it before starting tuning. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. REMARKS
You can copy the tuning data (motor constants) to another inverter with the PU (FR-DU04-1/FR-PU04V). The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the PU (FR-DU04-1/FR-PU04V).

4.12.2 Parameters
Set the following parameters.

(1) Parameters related to tuning of the first motor

Parameter
71

Name

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Remarks

9 80 81 83 84

96

851 852 876

Refer to page 123 and set "3 (standard motor)", "13 (constant-torque motor)" or "33 Applied motor (vector control dedicated motor)". Electronic thermal characteristics are also changed in accordance with the motor. 0 to 500A (Set 0 for use of Rated inverter output curent Electronic thermal O/L relay an external thermal relay.) Refer to the motor rating plate Motor capacity 0.4 to 55kW Inverter capacity and set the rated value. Number of motor poles 2, 4, 6 4 Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000V 575V Rated motor frequency 20 to 200Hz 60Hz 0 : Auto tuning not performed 1 : Tuning performed without Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 101 0 motor running 101 : Tuning performed with motor running Number of encoder pulses 0 to 4096 1024 Encoder rotation direction 0,1 1 Thermal relay protector 0,1 0 input

132

Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 96)

(2) Parameters related to tuning of the second motor
POINT Refer to page 41 when using the second motor.
Parameter
450 452 453 454 456 457 463

Name
Second applied motor Second electronic thermal O/L relay Second motor capacity Number of second motor poles Rated second motor voltage Rated second motor frequency Second auto tuning setting/status

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Remarks

Refer to page 123. 0 to 500A, 9999 9999 0.4 to 55kW Inverter Capacity 2, 4, 6 4 0 to 1000V 575V 20 to 200Hz 60Hz 0, 1, 101 0

Set the rated value refering to the motor rating plate.

0: without auto tuning 1: tuning without running the motor 101: tuning with running the motor

REMARKS
Turn the RT signal ON/OFF to switch from the first motor to the second motor.

4.12.3 Execution of offline auto tuning

The following applies to the first motor. CAUTION Note the following when "101" (offline auto tuning performed with motor running) is set in Pr. 96 (Pr. 463). Ensure safety when the motor starts running. Torque is not enough during tuning. The motor may be run at nearly its rated frequency (Pr. 84 (Pr. 457) setting) without any problem. The brake is open. When over current alarm (E.OC1, OC2, OC3) occurs, set acceleration time longer using Pr. 7. No external force is applied to rotate the motor. If "1" (tuning performed without motor running) is set in Pr. 96 (Pr. 463), the motor may run slightly (However, torque is not enough). Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs. *This instruction must be followed especially in vertical lift applications. Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected. During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid: Input signals (STOP, OH, MRS, RT, RES, STF, STR) Output signals (RUN, OL, IPF, DA1, DA2, A, B, C) Take extra precaution when designing a sequence where a mechanical brake is opened by the RUN signal.

133

PARAMETERS 4

Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 96)

(1) Parameter setting
Select Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" and Pr. 852 "encoder rotation direction" (Refer to page 10.) (It is not necessary to select when using the motor without encoder.) Select Pr. 80 (Pr. 453) "motor capacity" and Pr. 81 (Pr. 454) "number of motor poles". Refer to the parameter details to set the parameters below. 1) Set "1" or "101" in Pr. 96 (Pr. 463) When the setting is "1" . . . . .tuning performed without motor running When the setting is "101" . . .tuning performed with motor running 2) Set Pr. 9 (Pr. 452) "electronic thermal O/L relay". When using the external thermal, change the Pr. 9 (Pr. 452) setting back to "0" after offline auto tuning. The electronic thermal function is made invalid. Set "0" in Pr. 876 if the external thermal relay is not used. 3) Set the rated motor voltage (V) in Pr. 83 (Pr. 456). 4) Set the rated motor frequency (Hz) in Pr. 84 (Pr. 457). 5) Select the motor in Pr. 71 (Pr. 450). Example Standard motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) = "3" Constant torque motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) = "13" SF-JR 4 poles (1.5kW (2HP) or less) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) = "23" Vector control dedicated motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) = "33" CAUTION For the setting value, set the motor rating plate value..

(2) Tuning command

After setting the above parameters, press FWD or REV . (For external operation, turn on the run command (STF, STR).) REMARKS
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press . (The start signal may also be turned off to end.) RESET Excitation noise is produced during tuning. When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching on the main circuit power (R, S, T) of the inverter.
STOP

(3)

Monitoring during execution

When the parameter unit (FR-PU04V) is used, the Pr. 96 (Pr. 463) value is displayed during tuning on the main monitor as shown on the next page. When the operation panel (FR-DU04-1) is used, the same value as on the PU is only displayed. When Pr.96=1 Parameter unit (FR-PU04V) main monitor
1. Setting 2. Tuning in progress 3. Completion 4. Error-activated end (for inverter trip)
TUNE 9 ERROR STF STOP PU

Display

1
STOP PU

TUNE STF FWD

2
PU

TUNE 3 COMPLETION STF STOP PU

Operation panel (FR-DU04-1) display

1. Setting
Displayed value

2. Tuning in progress

3. Completion

4. Error-activated end (for inverter trip)

REMARKS
Offline auto tuning time (factory setting) 1: No-rotation mode: Approx. 25s 2: Rotation mode: Approx. 40s (Offline auto tuning time varies with the acceleration and deceleration time settings as indicated below. Offline auto tuning time = acceleration time + deceleration time + approx. 30s)

134

Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 96)

(4) Ending the offline auto tuning
1) Confirm the Pr. 96 (Pr. 463) value. Normal end: "3" or "103" is displayed. Error end: "9", "91", "92" or "93" is displayed. Forced end: "8" is displayed. When tuning ended normally
STOP For PU operation, press . For external operation, turn off the start signal (STF or STR) once. RESET This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.) (Refer to page 218 for inverter reset.) When tuning was ended due to an error Offline auto tuning did not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.) Reset the inverter and start tuning all over again. Error display definitions

2)

3)

4)

Error Display
9 91 92 93

Error Cause
Inverter trip Current limit (stall prevention) function was activated. Converter output voltage reached 75% of rated value. Calculation error

Remedy
Make setting again. Increase acceleration/deceleration time. Set "1" in Pr. 156. Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage. Check the motor wiring and make setting again.

5)

No connection with motor will also result in "93" error. When tuning was ended forcibly Tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning. RESET In this case, offline auto tuning has not ended properly. (The motor constants have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
STOP

REMARKS
1. The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline auto tuning is performed again. 2. An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter goes into the ordinary operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) is on, the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation. 3. Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored. 4. The set speed monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0r/min.

CAUTION
Note that the motor may start running suddenly. When the offline auto tuning in the rotation mode is used in vertical lift application, e.g. a lifter, it may drop due to insufficient torque.

135

PARAMETERS 4

Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 96) 4.12.4 Utilizing or changing offline auto tuning data for use
<Setting the motor constants as desired> Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (Pr. 458 to Pr. 462) (motor constants) may be set as desired in either of two ways; the data measured in the offline auto tuning are read and utilized or changed, or the motor constants are set without the offline auto tuning data being used. <Operating procedure> 1. Set the following value in Pr. 71 (Pr. 450): Standard motor ............................................................................................. Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) = "4" Constant-torque motor.................................................................................. Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) = "14" SF-JR (4P) (1.5kW(2HP) or less) ................................................................. Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) = "24" Vector control dedicated motor ..................................................................... Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) = "34" 2. Set "801" in Pr. 77. (The parameter values of Pr. 82 (Pr. 455) "motor excitation current" and Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (Pr. 458 to Pr. 462) (motor constants) can be displayed. Though the parameter values of other than Pr. 82 (Pr. 455) and Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (Pr. 458 to Pr. 462) can also be displayed, they are parameters for manufacturer setting and their values should not be changed.) 3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values.
Parameter Number
82 (455) 90 (458) 91 (459) 92 (460) 93 (461) 94 (462) 859 (860)

Name
Motor excitation current (no load current) Motor constant R1 Motor constant R2 Motor constant L1 Motor constant L2 Motor constant x Torque current

Setting Range Setting Increments Factory Setting

0 to ****, 9999 0 to ****, 9999 0 to ****, 9999 0 to ****, 9999 0 to ****, 9999 0 to ****, 9999 0 to ****, 9999 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999

REMARKS
When "0" (factory setting) is set in Pr. 684 "tuning data increment switchover", the motor constants are set in "internal variable increment". When "1" is set in Pr. 684, the motor constants are set in "mH, , A". (can be set when Pr.77 = "801")

4. Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value. REMARKS

1. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (Pr. 458 to Pr. 462) to use the standard motor constants (including those for the constanttorque motor). 2. Set "3 (standard motor), "13" (constant-torque motor) or "23" (SF-JR(4P) 1.5kW(2HP) or less) in Pr. 71 to use the constants measured in the offline auto tuning. Set "4, 14 or 24" in Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) and change the motor constants to change the values measured in the offline auto tuning. 3. As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following setting example when making setting: Setting example: To slightly increase Pr. 90 (Pr. 458) value (5%) When Pr. 90 (Pr. 458) is displayed "2516", set 2642, i.e. 2516 1.05=2641.8, in Pr. 90 (Pr. 458). (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Hence, simple addition of a given value to the displayed value has no significance.) 4. When "1" is set in Pr. 96 (Pr. 463), the last values of Pr. 82, Pr. 92, and Pr. 93 (Pr. 455, Pr. 460, Pr. 461) remain unchanged.

136

Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 96) 4.12.5 Setting the motor constants directly
Offline auto tuning is not used. The Pr. 92 and Pr. 93 (Pr. 460, Pr. 461) motor constants may either be entered in [] or in [mH]. Before starting operation, confirm which motor constant unit is used. (Refer to page 132.) To enter the Pr. 92 and Pr. 93 (Pr. 460, Pr. 461) motor constants in [] <Operating procedure> 1. After checking that the input motor constants are those for star connection or delta connection, set the Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) value as indicated below (When direct input is selected and offline auto tuning is performed, set "7, 8, 17 or 18") in Pr. 71 (Pr. 450). (Refer to page 138.).
Star Connection Motor
Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) Setting Standard motor Constant-torque motor 5 15

Delta Connection Motor

6 16

2. Set "801" in Pr. 77. (The parameter values of the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (Pr. 458 to Pr. 462)) can be displayed. Though the parameter values of other than Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (Pr. 458 to Pr. 462) can also be displayed, they are parameters for manufacturer setting and their values should not be changed.) 3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values.
Iq=Torque, I100=Rated current, I0=No load current Iq= I1002 - I02

Parameter Number
82 (455) 90 (458) 91 (459) 92 (460) 93 (461) 94 (462) 859 (860)

Name
Motor excitation current (no load current) Motor constant r1 Motor constant r2 Motor constant x1 Motor constant x2 Motor constant xm Torque current

Setting Range Setting Increments Factory Setting

0 to 500A 0 to 50, 9999 0 to 50, 9999 0 to 50, 9999 0 to 50, 9999 0 to 500, 9999 0 to 500A 0.01A 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01A 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999

4. Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value. 5. Set Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 (Pr. 456, Pr. 457).
Parameter Number
83 (456) 84 (457)

Name
Rated motor voltage Rated motor frequency

Setting Range
0 to 1000V 20 to 200Hz

Setting Increments
0.1V 0.01Hz

Factory Setting
575V 60Hz

To enter the Pr. 92 and Pr. 93 (Pr. 460 and Pr. 461) motor constants in [mH] <Operating procedure> 1. After checking that the input motor constants are those for star connection or delta connection, set the Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) value as indicated below.
Standard motor Pr. 71 (Pr. 450) Setting Constant-torque motor Vector control dedicated motor 0 10 30

2. Set "801" in Pr. 77. (The parameter values of the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (Pr. 458 to Pr. 462)) can be displayed. Though the parameter values of other than Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (Pr. 458 to Pr. 462) can also be displayed, they are parameters for manufacturer setting and their values should not be changed.)

137

PARAMETERS 4

CAUTION 1. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (Pr. 458 to Pr. 462) to use the standard motor constants (including those for the constant-torque motor). 2. If "star connection" is mistaken for "delta connection" or vice versa during setting of Pr. 71 (Pr. 450), control cannot be exercised properly.

Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 96)

3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values.
Parameter Number
82 (455) 90 (458) 91 (459) 92 (460) 93 (461) 94 (462) 859 (860)

Name
Motor excitation current (no load current) Motor constant R1 Motor constant R2 Motor constant L1 Motor constant L2 Motor constant x Torque current

Setting Range Setting Increments Factory Setting

0 to 500A 0 to 50, 9999 0 to 50, 9999 0 to 1000mH, 9999 0 to 1000mH, 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 0 to 500A 0.01A 0.001 0.001 0.1mH 0.1mH 0.1% 0.01A 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999

4. Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value. 5. Refer to the following table and set Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 (Pr. 456 to Pr. 457).
Parameter Number
83 (456) 84 (457)

Name
Rated motor voltage Rated motor frequency

Setting Range
0 to 1000V 20 to 200Hz

Setting Increments
0.1V 0.01Hz

Factory Setting
575V 60Hz

CAUTION Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (Pr. 458 to Pr. 462) to use the standard motor constants (including those for the constant-torque motor).

4.12.6 Direct input + offline auto tuning

Perform offline auto tuning after directly inputting the motor constants. 1. Set Pr. 71 (Pr. 450).
Pr. 71 Setting
7 8 17 18

Description
Star connection direct input + offline auto tuning Delta connection direct input + offline auto tuning Star connection direct input + offline auto tuning Delta connection direct input + offline auto tuning General-purpose motor Constant-torque motor

2. Set the motor constants (Refer to page 137). 3. Set Pr. 96 (Pr. 463) to perform offline auto tuning (Refer to page 133).

138

Online auto tuning (Pr. 95)

4.13 Online auto tuning (Pr. 95)

Excellent torque accuracy is provided by temperature compensation even if the secondary resistance value of the motor varies with the rise in the motor temperature. This function is effective or when stable, higher-torque operation is needed at low speed in vector control without encoder.

4.13.1 Online auto tuning selection (Pr. 95, Pr. 9, Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81
Parameter
95
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Name
Online auto tuning selection Electronic thermal O/L relay Applied motor Motor capacity Number of motor poles

Factory Setting
0 Rated inverter output current 30 Inverter capacity 4

Setting Range
0, 1, 2

Remarks

9 71 80 81

0: Online auto tuning not performed 1: Start time tuning (at start-up) 2: Adaptive magnetic flux observer (normal) Used as rated motor current and electronic 0 to 500A thermal relay function parameters. (Refer to page 93) Refer to page 123 and make setting. 0.4 to 55kW (Down to one rank lower of the inverter capacity) 2, 4, 6

(1) Pr. 95="1" (start time tuning)

This function is effective for optimum speed estimation and torque accuracy improvement when using the motor without encoder. The current at a start is detected to compensate for the secondary resistance of the motor so that excellent characteristics are provided regardless of the change in value of the secondary resistance of the motor with the rise of the motor temperature. POINT When exercising vector control without encoder, set "1" in Pr. 95 to perform start time tuning. Perform offline auto tuning in the rotation mode before performing online auto tuning with start time tuning. Data needs to be calculated. CAUTION 1. For using start time tuning in vertical lift applications, examine the utilization of a brake sequence for the brake opening timing at a start. Though the tuning ends in about a maximum of 500ms after a start, torque is not provided fully during that period. Therefore, note that there may be a possibility of gravity drop. REMARKS
To prevent delay at starting, X28 function which executes tuning before start signal input is provided. (Refer to page 36.)

139

PARAMETERS 4

Online auto tuning (Pr. 95)

(2) Pr. 95 = "2" (normal tuning)/adaptive magnetic flux observer
This function is effective for torque accuracy improvement when using the motor with encoder. The current flowing in the motor and the inverter output voltage are used to estimate/observe the magnetic flux in the motor. The magnetic flux of the motor is always detected with high accuracy so that excellent characteristics are provided regardless of the change in the temperature of the secondary resistance. Set "2" when exercising vector control wtih encoder. CAUTION 1. Adaptive magnetic flux observer (Pr. 95 = "2") is invalid under vector control without encoder. Select start time tuning. REMARKS
1. Online auto tuning of the start time tuning is not enabled when the starting conditions of the inverter are not satisfied, e.g. the MRS is input, the preset speed is less than the starting speed (Pr. 13), during inverter error, etc. 2. Online auto tuning of the start time tuning does not operate during deceleration or at a restart during DC brake operation. 3. Invalid for jog operation. 4. The RUN signal is not output during online auto tuning of the start time tuning. The RUN signal turns on at a start. 5. If the period from an inverter stop to a restart is within 4s, online auto tuning of the start time tuning is performed but the tuning results are not reflected. 6. Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure overrides when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected. 7. Zero current detection and output current detection are valid during online auto tuning.

CAUTION Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details.

Pr. 96

Refer to page 132. Refer to Pr. 7 (page 91).

Pr. 110, Pr. 111 Pr. 116

Refer to Pr. 42 (page 108).

140

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

4.14 Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

4.14.1 Computer link operation (RS-485 communication) (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Used to perform required settings for communication between the inverter and personal computer. Communication operation can be performed from the PU connector of the inverter by RS-485 communication. <Communication specifications>
Conforming standard Number of inverters connected Communication speed Control protocol Communication method Character system Stop bit length Terminator Communication specifications Parity check Check system Sum check Waiting time setting
RS-485 Standard 1: N (max. 32 inverters) Selected among 19200, 9600 and 4800bps Asynchronous system Half-duplex system ASCII (7 bits/8 bits) selectable Selectable between 1 bit and 2 bits. CR/LF (presence/absence selectable) Selectable between presence (even/odd) and absence Presence Selectable between presence and absence

For the data codes of the parameters, refer to the data code list in Appendices (page 226). REMARKS
For computer link operation, set 65520 (HFFF0) as "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".

141

PARAMETERS 4

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

<Setting>
To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, the initial settings of the communication specifications must be made to the inverter. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or there is any setting error. CAUTION Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. Communication is disabled unless the inverter is reset after the communication-related parameter values have been changed.
Parameter Number
117

Name
Communication station number Communication speed

Factory Setting
0

Setting
0 to 31

Description

118

192

119

Stop bit length/ data length Parity check presence/ absence

120

121

Number of communication retries

122*

Communication check time interval

9999

123

Waiting time setting CR/LF instruction presence/ absence

9999

124

Station number specified for communication from the PU connector. Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are connected to one personal computer. 48 4800bps 96 9600bps 192 19200bps 0 Stop bit length 1 bit 8 bits 1 Stop bit length 2 bits 10 Stop bit length 1 bit 7 bits 11 Stop bit length 2 bits 0 Absent 1 Odd parity present 2 Even parity present Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of data receive 0 to 10 error. If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E. PUE). If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not come to an alarm stop. At this time, the inverter can be coasted to a stop by MRS or 9999 RESET input. (65535) During a communication error (H0 to H5), the minor fault signal (LF) is given to the open collector output. Allocate the used terminal with any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection). 0 No communication Set the communication check time [s] interval. 0.1 to If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible 999.8s time, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E. PUE). 9999 Communication check suspension 0 to Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and 150ms response. 9999 Set with communication data. 0 Without CR/LF 1 With CR 2 With CR/LF

* When making communication, set any value other than 0 in Pr. 122 "communication check time interval".

142

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

<Computer programming> (1) Communication procedure
Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in the following procedure.
Computer (Data flow) Inverter Inverter (Data flow) Computer *1 When data are written 1) 2) 3) When data are read *2 4) 5) Time

*1 *2

If a retry must be made at occurrence of a data error, execute retry operation with the user program. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting. On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns retry data 3 to the computer again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.

(2) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types

Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows.
No.
1) 2)

Operation
Communication request is sent to the inverter in accordance with the user program of the computer. Inverter data processing time No error* Reply data from the (Request inverter accepted) (Data 1 is checked for With error error) (Request rejected) Computer processing delay time No error* Answer from computer Inverter performs in response to reply no processing data 3 With error (Data 3 is checked for Inverter re-outputs error) 3

Run Command
A' Present C D Absent Absent

Running Speed
A A" Present C D Absent Absent

Parameter Write
A Present C D Absent Absent

Inverter Reset
A Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

Monitoring
B Present E E' E" F Absent G

Parameter Read
B Present E F Absent G

3)

4)

5)

Absent

Absent

Absent

Absent

* In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, 10ms or more is also required after "no data error (ACK)". (Refer to page 145.)

Data are used in hexadecimal. Data are automatically converted into ASCII for communication between the computer and inverter. Data format types 1) Communication request data from the computer to the inverter
[Data write] Format A
*1 ENQ 1 *2 Inverter station number 2 3 Instruction code 4 5
Waiting time

*3

Data 7 8 9 10

Sum check 11 *4 11 12

*4 13 Number of characters

6
Waiting time

Format A'

*1 ENQ 1

*2 Inverter station number 2 3 *2 Inverter station number 2 3 *2 Inverter station number 2 3

Instruction code 4 5

*3

Data 7 8

Sum check 9 10

6
Waiting time

Number of characters Sum check *4 15 Number of characters

Format A'' [Data read] Format B

*1 ENQ 1 *1 ENQ 1

Instruction code 4 5

*3

Data 7 8 9 *4 9 10 11 12

6
Waiting time

13

14

Instruction code 4 5

*3

Sum check 7 8

Number of characters

143

PARAMETERS 4

(3) Data format

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

2) Reply data from the inverter to the computer during data write
[No data error detected] Format C
*1 ACK 1 *2 Inverter station number 2 3 *4 4

[Data error detected] Format D

Number of characters *1 NAK 1 *2 Inverter station number 2 3 Error code 4 *4 5 Number of characters

3)

Reply data from the inverter to the computer during data read
[No data error detected] Format E
*1 STX 1 *2 Inverter station number 2 3 4 *2 Inverter station number 2 3 Read data 5 6 7 *1 Sum check *4 ETX 8 9 10 11 *1 NAK Number of characters *1 ETX 8 9 10 Sum check 11 12 1 *2 Inverter station number 2 3 Error code 4 *4 5

[Data error detected] Format F

Format E'

*1 STX 1 *1 STX 1

Read data 4 5

*1 Sum check *4 ETX 6 7 8 9

Format E"

*2 Inverter station number 2 3 4 5

Read data 6 7

*4 13

4)

Send data from the computer to the inverter during data read
[No data error detected] Format G
*1 ACK 1 *2 Inverter station number 2 3 *4 4

[Data error detected] Format H

Number of characters *1 NAK 1 *2 Inverter station number 2 3 *4 4 Number of characters

CAUTION 1. Indicates the control code. 2. Specify the inverter station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 and 31) in hexadecimal. 3. When the Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" setting is other than 9999, create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.) 4. CR or LF code. When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made from the inverter according to the computer. Also, the presence and absence of the CR and LF codes can be selected using Pr. 124.

(4) Data definitions

1) Control codes
Signal Name
STX ETX ENQ ACK LF CR NAK

ASCII Code
H02 H03 H05 H06 H0A H0D H15

Description
Start of Text (Start of data) End of Text (End of data) Enquiry (Communication request) Acknowledge (No data error detected) Line Feed Carriage Return Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)

2) 3)

4)

Inverter station number Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer. Instruction code Specify the processing request, e.g. operation or monitoring, given by the computer to the inverter. Hence, the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction codes as appropriate. (Refer to page 226.) Data Indicates the data such as speed and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to page 226.)

144

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

5) Waiting time Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data by the inverter from the computer and the transmission of reply data from the inverter. Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments. (Example: 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms)
Computer Inverter Inverter Computer Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time (set value 10ms) (12ms)

CAUTION When the Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" setting is other than 9999, create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.) 6) Response time
Data send time (refer to the following calculation expression) Computer Inverter Inverter Computer Inverter data processing time =
ACK STX 10ms or more

waiting time + data check time (set value 10ms) (12ms)

ENQ

needed. 10ms or more needed. Data send time (refer to the following calculation expression)

Data send time (refer to the following calculation expression) Inverter data processing time = Computer Inverter Inverter Computer
ENQ

waiting time + data check time (set value 10ms) (12ms)

10ms or more needed. Data send time (refer to the following calculation expression)

[Data send time calculation expression]

1 Communication speed (bps) Number of data characters (Refer to page 143) Communication = Data send time (s) specifications (Total number of bits) (See below)

145

PARAMETERS 4

Communication specifications Name Number of Bits 1 bit Stop bit length 2 bits 7 bits Data length 1 start bit is needed in addition to the bits in the left table. 8 bits Minimum total number of bits9 bits Yes 1bit Parity check Maximum total number of bits12 bits No 0

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

7) Sum check code The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data.
(Example 1) Computer Inverter
ENQ Station number 0 ASCII code H05 1 Instruction code E 1
Waiting time

Data 0 7 A D

Sum check code F 4 Binary code

H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34

H H H H H H H H H 30 + 31 + 45 + 31 + 31 + 30 + 37 + 41 + 44 H = 1F4 Sum

* : When the Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" setting is other than 9999, create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.) (Example 2) Inverter Computer
STX Station number 0 ASCII code H02 1 1 Read data 7 7 0 ETX Sum check code 3 0 Binary code

H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30

H H H H H H + + + + + 30 31 31 37 37 30 H = 130 Sum

8)

Error code If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK code. (Refer to page 150.)

CAUTION 1. When the data from the computer has an error, the inverter does not accept that data. 2. Any data communication, e.g. run command or monitoring, is started when the computer gives a communication request. Without the computer's command, the inverter does not return any data. For monitoring, etc. therefore, design the program to cause the computer to provide a data read request as required.

146

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

(5)
1) 2)

Instructions for the program

When data from the computer has any error, the inverter does not accept that error. Hence, in the user program, always insert a retry program for data error. Since any data communication, such as operation command or monitoring, is always requested by the computer, the inverter will not return data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required. Program example When the operation mode is switched to communication operation

3)

10 OPEN "COM1:9600,E,8,2,HD" AS #1 20 COMST1,1,1:COMST1,2,1 30 ON COM(1)GOSUB*REC 40 COM(1)ON 50 D$= "01FB10002" 60 S=0 70 FOR I=1 TO LEN(D$) 80 A$=MID$(D$,I,1) 90 A=ASC(A$) 100 S=S+A 110 NEXTI 120 D$=CHR$(&H5)+D$+RIGHT$(HEX$(S),2) 130 PRINT#1,D$ 140 GOTO 50 1000 *REC 1010 IF LOC(1)=0 THEN RETURN 1020 PRINT "RECEIVE DATA" 1030 PRINT INPUT$(LOC(1),#1) 1040 RETURN
General flowchart
Line number 10 I/O file to initial setting 40 50 to 140

Initial setting of I/O file : Communication file opening : Circuit control signal (RS, ER) ON/OFF setting : Interrupt definition at data receive : Interrupt enable Transmission data setting

Sum code calculation

: Addition of control and sum codes Data transmission Interrupt data receive : Interrupt occurrence at data receive

Transmission data processing Data setting Sum code calculation Data transmission

Interrupt to 1040

Receive data processing Data import Screen display

CAUTION
When the inverter's communication time interval is not set, interlocks are provided to disable operation to prevent hazard. Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation. Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc., the inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.PUE). The inverter can be coasted to a stop by turning on its RES signal or by switching power off. If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault, etc. the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.

147

PARAMETERS 4

1000

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

<Setting items and set data>
After completion of parameter setting, set the instruction codes and data and start communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
No. Item
Read

Instruction Code
H7B

Description
H0000: Communication option operation H0001: External operation H0002: Communication operation (PU connector) H0000: Communication option operation H0001: External operation H0002: Communication operation (PU connector) H0000 to HFFFF: Speed (hexadecimal) in 1r/min increments (4 digits) [In 0.1r/min increments (6 digits) when HFF = 1.] H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01A increments H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V increments H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in instruction code HF3
H01 to H0E: Monitor selection data Data Description Increments H01 Output frequency 0.01Hz H02 Output current 0.01A H03 Output voltage 0.1V H05 Speed setting* 1r/min H06 Running speed* 1r/min H07 Motor torque 0.1% Converter output H08 0.1V voltage H09 Regenerative brake 0.1% Electronic overcurrent H0A 0.1% protection load factor Output current peak 0.01A H0B value Converter output H0C 0.1V voltage peak value H0F Input terminal status Data H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H17 H18 H20 H21 H22 H23 Description Increments Output terminal status Load meter 0.1% Motor excitation current 0.01A Position pulse Cumulative operation time 1h Actual operation time 1h Motor load factor Torque command Torque current command Motor output Feedback pulse 0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.01kW (0.01HP)

Number of Data Digits

Write

Operation mode

4 digits

HFB H6F H70 H71 H72

Speed Output current Output voltage Special monitor

4 digits (6 digits) 4 digits 4 digits 4 digits

Read

H73

Special monitor selection No.

2 digits

Write

HF3 <Input terminal monitor details> b15 <Output terminal monitor details> b15

*0.1r/min increments when HFF = 1

Monitoring

b0 RES OH DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 STR STF b0 ABCDO3DO2DO1

H0000 to HFFFF: Two latest alarm definitions Alarm definition display example (instruction code H74)
Read data: [Example] H30A0 (Previous alarm THT) b8b7 b0 (Latest alarm OPT) b15 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Previous alarm (H30) Latest alarm (HA0)
Data HD3 HD4 HD5 HD6 HD7 HD8 HD9 HDA HDB HDC HF1 HF2 HF3 HF6 HF7 Description OD ECA MB1 MB2 MB3 MB4 MB5 MB6 MB7 EP E.1 E.2 E.3 E.6 E.7

Alarm definition

Alarm data H74 to H77

Data H00 H10 H11 H12 H20 H21 H22 H30 H31 H40 H50 H51 H60 H70 H80 Description No alarm 0C1 0C2 0C3 0V1 0V2 0V3 THT THM FIN IPF UVT OLT BE GF Data H81 H90 HA0 HA1 HA2 HA3 HB0 HB1 HB2 HC1 HC2 HC3 HD0 HD1 HD2 Description LF OHT OPT OP1 OP2 OP3 PE PUE RET CTE P24 P12 OS OSD ECT

4 digits

148

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

No.
3

Item
Alarm definition all clear

Instruction Code
HF4 H9696: Clears the error history.
b7 0 0 b0 0

Description

Number of Data Digits

4 digits

Run command

HFA

b0: b1: Forward rotation (STF) (For example 1) b2: Reverse rotation (STR) [Example 1] H02 Forward rotation b3: b4: [Example 2] H00 Stop b5: b6: b7: 0 0 0 0 1

2 digits

Inverter status monitor

H7A

b0: Inverter running (RUN) b1: Forward rotation b2: Reverse rotation (For example 1) b3: DO1* [Example 1] H02 During forward b4: DO2* rotation b5: DO3* [Example 2] H80 Stop due to b6: Speed detection (FB) alarm occurrence b7: Alarm occurrence* 0 0 0 0 1

b7 0 0

b0 0

2 digits

Set speed write (E2PROM) 6 Set speed write (RAM) Set speed 7 (E2PROM) read Set speed (RAM) read Inverter reset

HEE

HED

* Output data varies with the settings of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195. HFF=0 H0000 to H1C20: 1r/min increments (hexadecimal) (4 digits) HFF=1 H0000 to H11940: 0.1r/min increments (hexadecimal) (6 digits) To change the running speed consecutively, write data to the inverter RAM. (Instruction code: HED) HFF = 0 H0000 to H1C20: 1r/min increments (hexadecimal) (4 digits) HFF = 1 H0000 to 11940: 0.1r/min increments (hexadecimal) (6 digits) H9696: Resets the inverter. As the inverter is reset at start of communication by the computer, the inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer. All parameters return to the factory settings. Any of four different clear operations is performed according to the data.
Pr. Data Communication Pr. Calibration Pr. Other Pr. * HEC HF3 HFF

4 digits (6 digits)

H6E H6D HFD

4 digits (6 digits)

4 digits

Parameter all clear

H9696 HFC H9966 H5A5A H55AA

4 digits

When parameter all clear is executed for H9696 or H9966, communicationrelated parameter settings also return to the factory settings. When resuming operation, set the parameters again. *Pr. 75 is not cleared. 10 11 Parameter write Parameter read Read H80 to HFD H00 to H7B Refer to the data list (page 226) and write and/or read parameter values as required. Parameter description is changed according to H00 to H09 setting. Refer to the parameter data code list (page 226) for details of the setting value. H7F 4 digits

Link parameter expansion setting

12

HFF

CAUTION When the instruction code "HFF" was rewritten, increments of the speed monitor, write and read is changed. HFF = "0" . . . . . . . . . . . . .1r/min increments HFF = "1" . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.1r/min increments HFF = more than "2" . . . .1r/min increments

2 digits

Write

149

PARAMETERS 4

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

No. Item
Second parameter changing (Code FF=1) Read

Instruction Code

Description
When reading/setting the bias/gain (data code H5E to H61, HDE to HE1) parameters H00: Speed/torque H01: Analog H02: Analog value of terminal (When written, the data value is any 4-digit value.)

Number of Data Digits

H6C

13

2 digits

Write

HEC

REMARKS
For the instruction codes HFF, HEC and HF3, their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an inverter reset or all clear is performed.

<Error code list> The corresponding error code in the following list is displayed if an error is detected in any communication request data from the computer.
Error Code
H0 H1 H2

Error Item
Computer NAK error Parity error Sum check error

Error Definition
The number of errors consecutively detected in communication request data from the computer is greater than the allowed number of retry times. The parity check result does not match the specified parity. The sum check code in the computer does not match that of the data received by the inverter. Data received by the inverter is in the wrong protocol, data receive is not completed within the given time, or CR and LF are not as set in the parameter. The stop bit length differs from the initial setting. New data has been set by the computer before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data. The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F, control code). Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation mode or during inverter operation. The specified command does not exist. Invalid data has been specified for parameter, running frequency write, etc.

Inverter Side Operation

H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 HA HB HC HD HE HF

Protocol error Framing error Overrun Character error Mode error Instruction code error Data range error

Brought to an alarm stop (E. PUE) if error occurs continuously more than the allowable number of retry times.

Does not accept receive data but is not brought to alarm stop.

Does not accept or receive data but is not brought to alarm stop.

150

Communication functions (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

(6) Communication specifications for RS-485 communication
Operation Mode Operation Location Item
Run command (start) Running speed setting On-computer user program from PU connector Monitoring Parameter write Parameter read Inverter reset Stop command (*3) Run command Running speed setting Monitoring Parameter write Parameter read Inverter reset Stop command (*3) Inverter reset Run command Speed setting

Communication operation from PU connector

Enable Enable Enable Enable (*4) Enable Enable (*2) Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable (*4) Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable

External operation
Disable Enable (Combined operation mode) Enable Disable (*4) Enable Enable (*2) Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable (*4) Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable

Computer link operation (When plug-in option is used)

Disable Disable Enable Disable (*4) Enable Enable (*2) Enable Enable (*1) Enable (*1) Enable Enable (*4) Enable Enable (*2) Enable Enable Enable (*1) Enable (*1)

On-computer user program from plug-in option

Control circuit terminal

(*1) As set in the Pr.79 external/PU combined mode. (*2) At occurrence of RS-485 communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer. (*3) As set in Pr. 75. (*4) As set in Pr. 77.

(7) Operation at alarm occurrence

Alarm Location State
Inverter operation PU connector Commu nication Plug-in option Inverter operation Commu nication PU connector Plug-in option

Communication operation (PU connector)

Stop Continued Continued Stop/continued (*5) Stop Continued

Operation Mode Computer link operation External (When plug-in option operation is used)
Stop Continued Continued Continued Stop Continued Stop Continued Continued Continued

Inverter fault Communication error (Communication from PU connector)

*5: Can be selected using the parameter (factory-set to Continued).

(8) Communication error

Alarm Location
Communication error (Error in communication from PU connector)

Error Message
E.PUE

151

PARAMETERS 4

Stop Continued

PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134) 4.14.2 E2PROM write selection (Pr. 342)
You can select either E2PROM or RAM to which parameters to be written during computer link communication operation (RS-485 communication by PU connector) and operation with a communication option. When changing the parameter values frequently, write them to the RAM (Pr. 342 = 1).
Parameter
342

Name
E2PROM write selection

Factory Setting
0 0 1

Setting Value
Write into E2PROM Write into RAM

Pr. 342 Setting

0 (factory setting) 1 E2PROM write Powering off the inverter will not erase the changed parameter values. RAM write Powering off the inverter will erase the changed parameter values. Therefore, the parameter values available when power is switched on again are the values stored in E2PROM last time.

REMARKS
When the parameter setting is "not written to the E2PROM" (setting=1), the settings return to the original values (values saved in the E2PROM) at power-on reset or terminal reset.

4.15 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)

4.15.1 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134
with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure. The voltage input signal (0 to 10V) is used as a feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control.
Parameter Number
128 129 130 131 132 133 134

Name
PID action selection PID proportional band PID integral time Upper limit Lower limit PID action set point for PU operation PID differential time

Factory Setting
10 100% 1s 9999 9999 0% 9999

Setting Range
10, 11, 30, 31 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1 to 3600s, 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 0 to 100% 0.01 to 10.00s, 9999

Remarks

9999: No proportional control 9999: No integral control 9999: Function invalid 9999: Function invalid

9999: No differential control

<Setting> (1) Basic PID control configuration

Pr.128 = 10, 11 Deviation x Manipulated variable PID Kp 1 + 1 + TdS TiS operation fi Drive circuit Inverter Motor IM

Terminal 1 Set point Process value

Pr.128 = 30, 31 Deviation Terminal 2 Set point + x Manipulated variable fi

Inverter Motor Drive circuit IM

PID Kp 1 + 1 + TdS TiS operation

Process value Kp: Proportional constant

Terminal 1 S: Operator Td: Differential time

Ti: Integral time

152

PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)

(2) PID action overview
1) PI action A combination of proportional control action (P) and integral control action (I) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation and changes with time.
Deviation Set point Process value P action

[Operation example for stepped changes of process value] CAUTION PI action is the sum of P and I actions.

Time

I action

Time

PI action

Time

2)

PD action A combination of proportional control action (P) and differential control action (D) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic. CAUTION PD action is the sum of P and D actions.
P action Set point Deviation Process value Time

[Operation example for proportional changes of process value]

D action

Time

PD action

Time

3)

PID action The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both actions for control. CAUTION The PID action is the sum of P and I and D actions.
P action Set point

Process value Time

I action D action

Time Time y=at +bt+c

2

PID action

Time

4)

Reverse action Increases the manipulated variable (output speed) if deviation X (set point - process value) is positive, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is negative.
Deviation [Heating] Set point + X>0 X<0 Cold fi up Hot fi down Process value Set point

Process value

153

PARAMETERS 4

PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)

5) Forward action Increases the manipulated variable (output speed) if deviation X (set point - process value) is negative, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive.
[Cooling] + Set point X<0 Process value Deviation X>0 Too cold fi down Hot fi up Process value Set point

Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output speed)

Deviation Positive Negative
Reverse Action Forward Action

(3) Wiring example

Pr.128 = 10, 11
NFB Power supply R S T Inverter U V W Moter

Pr.128 = 30, 31
NFB Power supply R S T Inverter U V W Moter

IM

IM

Forward rotation Reverse rotation PID control selection Deviation signal 0 to 10V

STF STR X14(Caution 2) SD 1 5 SE (Caution 1) RL PID forward/reverse rotation output Output signal common

Forward rotation Reverse rotation PID control selection Process value 0 to 10V Setting potentiometer (Set point setting)

STF STR X14(Caution 2) (Caution 1) FUP 1 10 2 5 SE FDN RL

SD

Upper limit Lower limit Forward rotation output Reverse rotation output Output signal common

CAUTION 1. Set "16" to the output signal terminal used (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195). (Refer to page 165.) 2. Set "14" to the input signal terminal used (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187). (Refer to page 163.)

154

PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)

(4) I/O signals
Signal Terminal Used Function Description
Turn on X14 to select PID control.

Remarks
Set any of 10, 11, 30 and 31 in Pr. 128.

Depending on PID control X14 Pr. 180 to 183, selection Pr. 187 Deviation signal input 1
Input

1 Process value input

Enter the deviation signal of the 0 to 10V signal When Pr. 128 = 10, 11 calculated externally. Enter the 0 to 10V process value signal from the When Pr. 128 = 30, 31 detector. Enter the set point for PID control. Isolated from terminals SD and SE. Do not ground. When Pr. 128 = 30, 31

Refer to Pr. 917 and Pr. 918 (page 202) for calibration. Refer to Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 (page 202) for calibration.

Set point input Common terminal to the PID control setting signal (terminal 2, 1)

RL

PID forward/ reverse rotation output Depending on Pr. 190 to 192, Pr. 195

FUP

Upper limit output

FDN

Lower limit output Output terminal common

SE

SE

"Hi" is output to indicate that the output indication of the parameter unit is forward (When Pr. 128 = 10, 11, rotation (FWD) or "Low" to 30, 31) indicate that it is reverse rotation (REV) or stop (STOP). Open Output to indicate that the collector output process value signal exceeded the upper limit value. When Pr. 128 = 30, 31 Output to indicate that the process value signal exceeded the lower limit value. Common terminal for terminal RL

Output

Item Deviation signal Set point Process value

Entry Method

Description
Set -10V as -100% Set 0V as 0% and +10V as +100%.* Set 0V as 0% and 10V as +100%.* Set the set point (%) in Pr. 133. Set 0V as 0% and +10V as +100%.* When 30 or 31 is set in Pr. 128, terminal 1 gives the process value input signal independently of the Pr. 868 setting. When 10 or 11 is set in Pr. 128, terminal 1 gives the deviation input signal independently of the Pr. 868 setting.

Across terminals 1-5

Across terminals 2-5 Pr.133 Across terminals 1-5

*: The value changes by calibration

155

PARAMETERS 4

To start PID control, turn on the X14 signal. When this signal is off, normal inverter operation is performed without the PID action being done. When entering the externally calculated deviation signal, enter it across terminals 1-5. At this time, set "10" or "11" in Pr. 128. Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-5 or into Pr. 133 and enter the process value signal across inverter terminals 1-5. At this time, set "30" or "31" in Pr. 128.

PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)

(5) Parameter setting
Parameter Number Setting 10 128 11 30 31 0.1 to 1000% 9999 130 0.1 to 3600s PID integral
time PID action selection

Name
For heating, pressure control, etc. For cooling, etc. For heating, pressure control, etc. For cooling, etc.

Description
Deviation value signal input (terminal 1) Process value input (terminal 1) PID reverse action PID forward action PID reverse action PID forward action

129

PID proportional band

If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of the process value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs. Gain Kp= 1/proportional band No proportional control Time required for only the integral (I) action to provide the same manipulated variable as that for the proportional (P) action. As the integral time decreases, the set point is reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily. No integral control. Set the upper limit value. If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP signal is output. (Process value of 0V is equivalent to 0% and 10V to 100%.)* No function Set the lower limit value. (If the process value goes out of the setting range, an alarm can be output. In this case, the process value of 0V is equivalent to 0% and 10V to 100%.)* No function Only valid for the PU command in the PU operation or PU/external combined mode. For external operation, the voltage across terminals 2-5 is the set point. (Pr. 902 value is equivalent to 0% and Pr. 903 value to 100%.) Time required for only the differential (D) action to provide the same manipulated variable as that for the proportional (P) action. As the differential time increases, greater response is made to a deviation change. No differential control.

9999 131 0 to 100% 9999 132 0 to 100% 9999 133 0 to 100%

PID action set point for PU operation Lower limit Upper limit

134

0.01 to 10.00s 9999

PID differential time

*: The value changes by calibration

(6) Adjustment procedure

Parameter setting Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134.

Terminal setting

Set the I/O terminals for PID control (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195). Pr.128 = 10, 11, 30, 31

Turn on X14 signal.

Run

156

PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)

(7) Adjustment example
(A detector of 0V at 0C (32F) and 10V at 50C (122F) is used to adjust the room temperature to 25C (77F) under PID control. The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0 to 10V).)
START Convert the set point into %. Calculate the ratio of the set point to the detector output. Make calibration. Set the set point. Enter a voltage to across terminals 2-5 according to the set point (%). Determine the set point. Determine the set point of the item to be adjusted. Detector specifications When the detector used has the specifications that 0 C (32 F) is equivalent to 0V and 50 C (122 F) to 10V, the set point of 25 C (77 F) is 50% because 0V is equivalent to 0% and 10V to 100%. When the set point setting input (0 to 10V) and detector output (0 to 10V) must be calibrated, make the following calibration*. Set point = 50% Since the specifications of terminal 2 are such that 0% is equivalent to 0V and 100% to 10V, enter 5V into terminal 2. When the parameter unit is used to perform operation, set the set point (0 to 100%) in Pr. 133. Set the room temperature to 25 C (77 F) . Set "30" or "31" in Pr. 128 and turn on the X14 signal to enable PID control.

Operation Set the proportional band and integral time to slightly higher values and the differential time to "9999", and turn on the start signal.

For operation, set the proportional band and integral time to slightly higher values and set the differential time to "9999" (function invalid). In accordance with the system operation, reduce the proportional band and increase the integral time. In a slow-response system that has a dead band, gradually increase it using differential control.

Is the process value steady? No Adjust parameters.

Yes

Optimize parameters. While the process value is steady, the proportional band and integral time may be reduced and the differential time increased throughout the operation.

Set the proportional band and integral time to slightly higher values and set the differential time to a slightly lower value to stabilize the process value.

END * Calibration is required Calibrate the set point setting input and detector output using Pr. 902, Pr. 903, Pr. 917 and Pr. 918. Make calibration in the PU mode during inverter stop.

157

PARAMETERS 4

PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)

(8) Calibration example <Set point input calibration>
1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) to across terminals 2-5. 2. Make calibration using Pr. 902. At this time, enter the speed output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0r/ min). 3. Apply the voltage of 100% set point setting (e.g. 10V) to across terminals 2-5. 4. Make calibration using Pr. 903. At this time, enter the speed output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 1800r/min).

<Detector output calibration>

1. 2. 3. 4. Apply the output current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 0V) to across terminals 1-5. Make calibration using Pr. 917. Apply the output current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 1-5. Make calibration using Pr. 918.

CAUTION The frequencies set in Pr. 917 and Pr. 918 should be the same as set in Pr. 902 and Pr. 903. The results of the above calibration are as shown below:
[Set point settig] across terminals 2-5 (%) 100 (%) 100 [Detection value] across terminals 1-5
[Manipulated variable] Manipulated variable (Output speed) (r/min) 1800

0 0 10 (V)

0 0 5 (V)

0 0 100 Deviation (%)

CAUTION 1. If the multi-speed (RH, RM, RL) signal or jog operation (jog) signal is entered with the X14 signal on, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or jog operation is started. 2. When "6" (switchover mode) is selected for Pr. 79, PID is made invalid. 3. When "1" (online auto tuning) is selected for Pr. 95, PID control is made invalid. 4. Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 180 to 183 and Pr. 187 and Pr. 190 to 192 and Pr. 195 may affect the other functions. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. 5. When PID control is selected, the minimum speed is as set in Pr. 902 and the maximum speed is as set in Pr. 903. (Pr. 1 "maximum speed" and Pr. 2 "minimum speed" settings are also valid.) Related parameters
Pr. 73 "speed setting signal" (Refer to page 125.) Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" (Refer to page 129.) Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection) (Refer to page 163.) Pr. 191 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) (Refer to page 165.) Pr. 902, Pr. 903, Pr. 917, Pr. 918 (Speed setting terminal bias/gain) (Refer to page 202.)

Pr. 140 to Pr. 143 Pr. 144

Refer to Pr. 29 (page 102)

Refer to Pr. 37 (page 106)

158

Current detection (Pr. 150 to Pr. 153)

4.16 Current detection (Pr. 150 to Pr. 153)

4.16.1 Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting during inverter operation for longer than the period set in Pr. 151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter's open collector output terminal. (Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 to assign the terminal used for Y12 signal output.)
Parameter
150 151

Name
Output current detection level Output current detection period

Factory Setting
150% 0

Setting Range
0 to 200.0% 0 to 10s

Minimum 100ms Output current detection signal Pr.150 Output current Pr.151 Time OFF ON OFF

<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters.
Parameter
150 151

Description
Set the output current detection level. 100% is the rated inverter current. Set the output current detection period. Set the period from when the output current has risen above the setting until the output current detection signal (Y12) is output.

Related parameters
Y12 signal terminal assignment Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) (Refer to page 165.)

159

PARAMETERS 4

CAUTION 1. Once turned on, the output current detection signal is held on for at least 100ms. 2. This function is also valid during execution of the online or offline auto tuning. 3. Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 190 to 192 and Pr. 195 may affect the other functions. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. 4. When "0" is set in Pr. 151, the output current detection period is about 50ms.

Current detection (Pr. 150 to Pr. 153) 4.16.2 Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not be generated. This may cause a gravity drop to occur when the inverter is used in vertical lift application. To prevent this, the output current "zero" signal can be output from the inverter to close the mechanical brake when the output current has fallen to "zero". If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting during inverter operation for longer than the period set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the inverter's open collector output terminal. (Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 to assign the terminal used for Y13 signal output.)
Parameter
152 153

Name
Zero current detection level Zero current detection period

Factory Setting
5.0% 0.5s

Setting Range
0 to 200.0% 0 to 1s

Start signal

OFF

ON

Pr. 152 "zero current detection level" Zero current detection signal output (Y13)

Pr.152 OFF ON

100ms

(Caution1)

Output current 0[A] ON

OFF

Pr. 153 "detection period"

Pr. 153 "detection period"

<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters.
Parameter
152 153

Description
Set the zero current detection level. Set this parameter to define the percentage of the rated current at which the zero current will be detected. Set the zero current detection period. Set this parameter to define the period from when the output current drops below the Pr. 152 value until the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output.

1. 2. 3. 4.

CAUTION If the current rises above the preset detection level and the condition is not satisfied, the zero current detection signal is held on for about 100ms. This function is also valid during execution of the online auto tuning. Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 190 to 192 and Pr. 195 may affect the other functions. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. When "0 to 0.04" is set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection period is about 50ms.

CAUTION
The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the zero current detection period setting not too long. Otherwise, the detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low output current. To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous conditions by use of the zero current detection signal, install a safety backup such as an emergency brake. Related parameters
Y13 signal terminal assignment Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) (Refer to page 165.)

160

Auxiliary functions (Pr. 156, Pr. 157)

4.17 Auxiliary functions (Pr. 156, Pr. 157)

4.17.1 Stall prevention operation selection (Pr. 156
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Make setting to disable stall prevention activated by overcurrent and/or to prevent the inverter from resulting in an overcurrent trip if an excessive current flows due to sudden load fluctuation or running inverter output side ON-OFF (to disable high-response current restriction that limits the current). An OL signal output delay can be set in Pr. 157. Stall prevention (only during V/F control) Automatically change the output frequency of the inverter to reduce the amount of current when the current flow exceeds the current restriction value. High-response current restriction Shut off the output of the inverter to prevent overcurrent when the current flows exceeds the current restriction value.
Parameter
156

Name
Stall prevention operation selection

Factory Setting
1

Setting Range
0 to 31, 100, 101

Remarks
Extended mode

Constant speed

Constant speed

Deceleration

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Driving

Deceleration

Acceleration

Acceleration

High-Response Current Restriction : Activated : Not activated

Stall Prevention : Activated

OL Signal Output : Operation continued : Operation not continued (Caution1)

High-Response Current Restriction : Activated : Not activated

Stall Prevention : Activated

OL Signal Output : Operation continued : Operation not continued (Caution1)

Setting

Setting

101(Caution 3)

Driving

Regenerative

161

Regenerative

PARAMETERS 4

100

Auxiliary functions (Pr. 156, Pr. 157)

CAUTION 1. When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected, the "E. OLT" alarm code (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation stopped. (Alarm stop display "E. OLT") 2. For the lift application, make setting to disable high-response current restriction. Otherwise the torque may not be generated, resulting in the lift drop with gravity. 3. When the setting value is "101", high-response current restriction at driving is well disabled compared to when "100" is set.

CAUTION
Always perform test operation. Stall prevention operation performed during acceleration may increase the acceleration time. Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause sudden speed changes. Stall prevention operation performed during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.

4.17.2 OL signal output timer (Pr. 157

with Encoder

without Encoder

with Encoder

without Encoder

Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Use this parameter to set whether the overload alarm signal (OL signal) is output immediately or a preset period of time after occurrence of an overload status.
Parameter
157

Name
OL signal output timer

Factory Setting
0s

Setting Range
0 to 25s, 9999

Remarks
9999: No signal output

V/F control .......... On when stall prevention operation level is exceeded. Speed control ......On when torque restriction is activated. Torque control ..... On when speed restriction is activated. Position control ... On when torque restriction is activated.

Overload status (OL action) OL output signal Set time (s)

<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameter.
Pr. 157 Setting
0 0.1 to 25 9999

Description
Output immediately. Output after the set time (s) has elapsed. Overload alarm signal is not output.

Related parameters
OL signal terminal assignment Set 3 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 165.)

Pr.158

Refer to Pr. 54 (page 110).

162

Display function 3 (Pr. 160)

4.18 Display function 3 (Pr. 160)

4.18.1 Extended function display selection (Pr. 160
Used to display the extended function parameters. Refer to page 78 for the extended function parameter list.
Parameter
160
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Name
Extended function selection

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0 1

Remarks
Only the simple mode parameters are accessible. All parameters are accessible.

Pr. 162 to Pr. 165

Refer to Pr. 57 (page 114).

4.19 Initial monitor (Pr. 171)

4.19.1 Actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 171
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

You can clear the actual operation hour of the monitoring function.
Parameter
171

Name
Actual operation hour meter clear

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0

<Setting>
Write "0" in the corresponding parameter to clear the actual operation hour. REMARKS
The actual operation time is the value monitored by setting "23" in Pr. 52.

Related parameters
Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection" (Refer to page 110.)

4.20 Terminal assignment functions (Pr. 180 to Pr. 195)

with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Torque

Position

Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.

Parameter
180

Name
DI1 terminal function selection DI2 terminal function selection DI3 terminal function selection DI4 terminal function selection STR terminal function selection

Terminal Symbol
DI1

FactorySet Value
0

Factory-Set Terminal Function

Low speed operation command (RL) Middle speed operation command (RM) High speed operation command (RH) Second function/ second motor switchover (RT) Reverse rotation command (STR)

Setting Range

Remarks

181

DI2

182

DI3

183

DI4

0 to 3, 5, 8 to 12,14 to 16, 20, 22 to 28, 42 to 44, 9999

9999: No function Extended mode

187

STR

9999

9999: STR

163

PARAMETERS 4

4.20.1 Input terminal function selection with without Encoder Encoder (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 187 Speed

Terminal assignment functions (Pr. 180 to Pr. 195)

<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters.
Setting
0

Signal Name
RL Pr. 59 = 0 Pr. 59 = 1, 2 *

Functions
Low speed operation command Remote setting (setting clear) Middle speed operation command Remote setting (deceleration) High speed operation command Remote setting (acceleration)

Related Parameters
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Pr.59 Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Pr. 59 Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Pr.59 Pr. 44 to Pr. 50, Pr. 450 to Pr. 457, Pr. 463 Pr. 15, Pr. 16 Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Pr. 110, Pr. 111, Pr. 116

Response Time

RM

Pr. 59 = 0 Pr. 59 = 1, 2, 3 *

2 3 5 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 42 43 44 9999

RH RT JOG

Pr. 59 = 0 Pr. 59 = 1, 2, 3*

Within 20ms

Second function selection

Jog operation selection 15-speed selection (combination with three speeds RL, REX RM, RH) X9 Third function Maker setting value. Do not make setting. Maker setting value. Do not make setting. X12 PU operation external interlock signal X14 PID control enable terminal BRI Brake sequence opening completion signal X16 PU/external operation switchover X20 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover X22 Orientation command (Caution 4) LX Pre-excitation/servo on (Caution 5) MRS Output stop STOP Start self-holding selection MC Control mode changing TL Torque restriction selection X28 Start time tuning X42 Torque bias selection 1 X43 Torque bias selection 2 X44 P control selection (P/PI control switchover) STR Reverse rotation start

Pr. 79 Pr. 128 to Pr. 134 Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 Pr. 79 Pr. 29, Pr. 380 to Pr. 383 Pr. 350 to Pr. 369 Pr. 802 Pr. 17 Pr. 815 STR terminal (Pr. 187) only (Note) DI1 to DI4 functions are made invalid.

Within 20ms

* When Pr. 59 = "1, 2, or 3", the functions of the RL, RM, RH and RT signals change as listed above.

CAUTION 1. One signal can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, turning on any one of the terminals make the signal valid. 2. The speed command priorities are higher in order of jog, multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) and PID (X14). 3. Use common terminals to assign multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote setting. They cannot be set individually. 4. The FR-A5AX (12-bit digital input) is needed to externally input a stop position under orientation control. 5. Made valid under vector control with encoder.

164

Terminal assignment functions (Pr. 180 to Pr. 195) 4.20.2 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

You can change the functions of the open collector output terminal and contact output terminal.
Parameter
190 191 192

Name
DO1 terminal function selection DO2 terminal function selection DO3 terminal function selection ABC terminal function selection

FactorySet Value
0 1 2

Factory-Set Signal Function

RUN (Inverter running) SU (Up to speed) IPF (Instantaneous power failure/ undervoltage) A, B, C (Alarm output)

Setting Range
0 to 8, 10 to 16, 20, 25 to 27, 30 to 37, 39, 40 to 44, 96 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 125 to 127, 130 to 137, 139, 140 to 144, 196 to 199, 9999

Remarks

Extended mode

195

99

<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters.
Signal Positive Negative Name logic logic

Setting

Function

Operation

Related Response Parameters Time

100

RUN Inverter running

1 2

101 102

SU IPF

103

OL

4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20

104 105 106 107 108 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 120

FU FU2 FU3 RBP THP PU RY Y12 Y13 FDN FUP RL BOF

Up to speed Instantaneous power Output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or failure or undervoltage. undervoltage Output when torque or speed restriction is Pr. 22, Pr. 806, activated. Pr. 807, Pr. 812 Overload alarm For V/F control, this signal is output while the stall to Pr. 817 prevention function is activated. Output speed detection Second output speed Refer to Pr. 42, Pr. 43, Pr. 50 and Pr. 116 (speed detection) detection (page 108). Third output speed detection Regenerative brake Output when 85% of the regenerative brake duty Pr. 70 prealarm set in Pr. 70 is reached. Electronic thermal Output when the electronic thermal relay function Pr. 9 relay function cumulative value reaches 85% of the preset level. prealarm PU operation mode Output when the PU operation mode is selected. Inverter operation Output when the inverter can be started by ready switching the start signal on or while it is running. Refer to Pr. 150 and Pr. 151 Output current Pr. 150, Pr. 151 detection (output current detection). Zero current Refer to Pr. 152 and Pr. 153 Pr. 152, Pr. 153 detection (zero current detection). PID lower limit PID upper limit Pr. 128 to Refer to Pr. 128 to Pr. 134 (PID control). Pr. 134 PID forward-reverse rotation output Brake opening Refer to Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 Pr. 278 to request (brake sequence function). Pr. 285

This signal is output during operation when the inverter output speed rises to or above the starting speed. During DC injection brake, 0 speed control or servo lock, this signal is not output. However, LX is output as ON under position control. Refer to Pr. 41 "up-to-speed sensitivity" (page 108). (Caution 1)

Within 20ms

Within 20ms

Within 20ms

Within 20ms

165

PARAMETERS 4

Terminal assignment functions (Pr. 180 to Pr. 195)

Signal Positive Negative Name logic logic

Setting

Function

Operation

Related Response Parameters Time

25 26 27 30

125 126 127 130

FAN Fan fault output FIN ORA Y30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43

131 132 133 134 135 136 137 139 140 141 142 143

Y31 Y32 RY2 LS TU Y36 MT Y39 Y40 FB FB2 FB3

44

144

RUN2

96

196

REM

97

197

ER

98 99 9999

198 199

LF ABC

Output at the time of a fan fault. Pr. 244 Output when the heatsink temperature reaches Fin overheat about 85% of the fin overheat protection activating prealarm temperature. When orientation is valid Orientation in-position (Refer to page 172) On: Forward rotation under vector control without Forward rotation encoder with encoder output Off: Other controls On: Reverse rotation under vector control with Reverse rotation encoder output Off: Other controls Regenerative status On: Regeneration under vector control with encoder output Off: Other controls (include stop, pre-excitation) Output on completion of pre-excitation. Turned on Pr. 802 Operation ready 2 at an output start when pre-excitation is not made. Output when the speed falls to or below any Pr. 865 Low speed output preset low speed. Output when the motor torque rises above the Pr. 864 Torque detection predetermined value. Output when positioning is completed under In-position position control. Maintenance timer When Pr. 891 Pr. 890, the MT output signal Pr. 890, Pr. 891 output turns on and the warning indication MT appears. Start time tuning Output on completion of start time tuning. completion Trace status Refer to the instruction manual of the trace option. Speed detection Output when the inverter output speed rises to or above the preset Second speed speed. detection Refer to Pr. 42, Pr.43, Pr. 50, and Pr. 116 (speed detection) Third speed detection (page 108). Output during forward operation or the reverse signal is ON. Output at deceleration even during forward rotation or the reverse signal is OFF. (Does not output during pre-excitation LX is ON.) Inverter running 2 Output during the orientation command signal (X22) is ON. Switched ON when the servo is ON (LX-ON) under position cotrol. (Switched OFF when the servo is OFF. (LX-OFF) You can use the on/off of signals instead of the Pr. 495, Remote output remote output function of the PLC. Pr. 496, Pr. 497 At occurrence of a major fault, the base circuit is shut off immediately. At occurrence of a minor Pr. 875 Minor fault output 2 fault, the base circuit is shut off after deceleration to a stop. Output when a minor fault (fan fault or Pr. 121, Pr. 244 Minor fault output communication error alarm) occurs. Output when the inverter's protective function is Alarm output activated to stop the output (major fault). No function

Within 20ms

Within 20ms

Within 20ms

Within 20ms

0 to 99: Positive logic 100 to 199: Negative logic CAUTION 1. Note that when the speed setting is varied using an analog signal or of the operation panel, the output of the SU (up to speed) signal may alternate on and off depending on that varying speed and the timing of the varying speed due to acceleration/deceleration time setting. (The output will not alternate on and off when the acceleration/deceleration time setting is "0s".) 2. The same function may be set to more than one terminal. 3. Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 do not function if the values set are other than the above. Pr.232 to Pr.239 Pr.240 Refer to Pr. 4 (page 90).

Refer to Pr. 72 (page 124).

166

Auxiliary function (Pr. 244)

4.21 Auxiliary function (Pr. 244)

4.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

You can control the operation of the cooling fan built in the inverter.
Parameter
244

Name
Cooling fan operation selection

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0, 1

Remarks
Extended mode

<Setting>
Setting
0 1

Description
Operated with power on (independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop). Cooling fan on-off control valid (The cooling fan is always on while the inverter is running. During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches on-off according to temperature.)

REMARKS
In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is shown on the operation panel, and the fan fault (FAN) and minor fault (LF) signals are output. Use Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) to allocate the terminals used to output the FAN and LF signals. 1. Pr. 244 = "0" When the fan comes to a stop with power on. 2. Pr. 244 = "1" When the fan comes to a stop during the fan ON command while the inverter is running.

CAUTION Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 190 to 192 and Pr. 195 may affect the other functions. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.

4.22 Stop selection function (Pr. 250)

4.22.1 Stop selection (Pr. 250
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal (STF/STR) turns off.
Parameter
250

Name
Stop selection

Factory Setting
9999

Setting Range
0 to 100s, 9999

Remarks
Extended mode

167

PARAMETERS 4

Operation selection function (Pr. 251)

(1) Pr. 250 = "9999"
When the start signal turns off, the motor is decelerated to a stop.
Start signal ON OFF

Decelerated when start signal turns off.

Output speed (r/min)

Deceleration time (time set in Pr. 8, etc.)

DC brake Time

(2) Pr. 250 = other than "9999" (Output is shut off after preset time)
The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has elapsed after the start signal had turned off. The motor coasts to a stop.
Start signal OFF Output is shut off when the preset time has elapsed after start signal had turned off. Pr.250 Output speed (r/min)

Motor coasts to a stop. Time

RUN signal

OFF

CAUTION 1. The RUN signal turns off when the output stops. 2. When the start signal is turned on again during motor coasting, the motor starts at 0Hz. 3. The output speed becomes the speed restriction value during torque control.

4.23 Operation selection function (Pr. 251)

4.23.1 Output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder

Speed

Torque

without Encoder

Conditional PLC SSC

Position

You can disable the output phase failure protection (E.LF) function that will stop the inverter output if any of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter output side (load side) opens.
Setting Range Minimum Setting Increments

Parameter

Name

Factory Setting

Description
0: Without output phase failure protection 1: With output phase failure protection

Remarks

251

Output phase failure protection selection

0, 1

Extended mode

168

Additional function 2 (Pr. 252, Pr. 253)

4.24 Additional function 2 (Pr. 252, Pr. 253)

4.24.1 Override bias, gain (Pr. 252, Pr. 253
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

When override is selected in Pr. 73 "speed setting signal", the override range of 50% to 150% can be increased (to between 0% and 200%) as desired.
Parameter
252 253

Name
Override bias Override gain

Setting Range
0 to 200% 0 to 200%
200

Minimum Setting Increments

0.1% 0.1%

Factory Setting
50% 150%

Remarks
Extended mode

Pr.252 Pr.253

Override amount (%)

150 Factory setting (50% to 150%)

100

50 0

0V

5V 10V Voltage across terminals 2-5

Related parameters
Pr. 73 "speed setting signal" (Refer to page 125.)

4.25 Power failure stop functions (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266)

4.25.1 Power-failure deceleration stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

When a power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop. Remove the jumpers from across terminals R-R1 and S-S1, and connect terminal R1 to terminal P and terminal S1 to terminal N.
Parameter
261 262 263 264 265 266

Name
Power failure stop selection Subtracted speed at deceleration start Subtraction starting speed Power-failure deceleration time 1 Power-failure deceleration time 2 Power-failure deceleration time switchover speed
Power supply

Factory Setting
0 90r/min 1800r/min 5s 9999 1800r/min

Setting Range
0, 1 0 to 600r/min 0 to 3600r/min, 9999 0 to 3600/0 to 360s 0 to 3600/0 to 360s, 9999 0 to 3600r/min

Remarks

Extended mode

Output speed Switchover speed Pr.266

Subtracted speed Pr.262

Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 Time

169

PARAMETERS 4

Power failure stop functions (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266)

<Setting>
Parameter
261

Setting
0 1

Description
Coasting to stop When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the inverter output is shut off. When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the inverter is decelerated to a stop. Normally, operation can be performed with the factory setting unchanged, but the speed can be adjusted within the range 0 to 600r/min according to the load specifications (inertia moment, torque). If the output speed at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure is equal to or greater than the speed set in Pr. 263, deceleration starts at the value found by subtracting the speed set in Pr. 262 from the output speed at that time. If the output speed at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure is less than the speed set in Pr. 263, the inverter is decelerated to a stop, starting at the output speed at that time. The inverter is decelerated to a stop, starting at the value found by subtracting the speed set in Pr. 262 from the output speed at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure. Set a deceleration slope down to the speed set in Pr. 266. Set the slope in terms of time required for deceleration from the speed set in Pr. 20 to 0r/min. Set a deceleration slope below the speed set in Pr. 266. Set the slope in terms of time required for deceleration from the speed set in Pr. 20 to 0r/min. Same slope as in Pr. 264. Set the speed at which the deceleration slope is switched from the Pr. 264 setting to the Pr. 265 setting.

262

0 to 600r/min

0 to 3600r/min 263 9999 264 Pr. 21 = 0 Pr. 21 = 1 Pr. 21 = 0 Pr. 21 = 1 0 to 3600s 0 to 360s 0 to 3600s 0 to 360s 9999 0 to 3600r/min

265

266

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

CAUTION This function is invalid when the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is activated. If the calculation result of the output speed - set speed of Pr. 262 is negative at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure, it is regarded as 0r/min. The power failure stop function is not activated if a power failure occurs during a stop or error. If power is restored during deceleration, the inverter is kept decelerated to a stop. To restart, turn off the start signal once, then turn it on again. This function is not activated when the high power factor converter or power regeneration common converter is used (Pr. 30 = 2).

CAUTION
If power-failure deceleration operation is set, some loads may cause the inverter to trip and the motor to coast. The motor will coast if enough regenerative energy is given from the motor. Related parameters
Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage" (Refer to page 95.) Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference speed", Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration time increments" (Refer to page 91.)

Pr.278 to Pr.285

Refer to Pr.60 (page 118).

170

Droop (Pr. 286 to Pr. 288)

4.26 Droop (Pr. 286 to Pr. 288)

4.26.1 Droop control (Pr. 286, Pr. 287
with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

, Pr. 288

with Encoder

without Encoder

Speed

This function is designed to balance the load in proportion to the load torque to provide the speed drooping characteristic. This function is effective for balancing the load when using multiple inverters The speed command is varied according to the magnitude of the motor load (load meter of the inverter). The drooping amount at the rated torque is set by the droop gain as a percentage using the rated speed as a reference. Droop compensation speed Amount of torque current after filtering 100% torque amount current Rated speed droop gain 100

Droop control is made valid when Pr. 286 is other than "0".
Parameter
286 287

Name
Droop gain Droop filter constant

Factory Setting
0% 0.3s

Setting Range
0 to 100% 0.00 to 1.00s 0 1 2

Remarks
The drooping amount at the rated torque is set by the droop gain as a percentage using the rated speed as a reference. When the setting value is "0", the function will be invalid. Set the time constant of the primary delay filter applied to the torque current. Droop control is not exercised during acceleration/deceleration. Droop control is always exercised during operation. (with zero limit) Droop control is always exercised during operation (without zero limit) (valid for vector control with encoder only)

288

Droop function activation selection

Speed limitter after droop compensation

Pr. 288 setting
0 1 2

Description
Droop control is not excercised during acceleration/deceleration. Note that the speed command after droop is stopped at 0r/min if the speed command after droop is negative. Droop control is always excercised during operation. Note that, during vector control with encoder, the speed command after droop is stopped at 0r/min if the speed command after droop is negative. Droop control is always excercised during operation. Note that the speed command after droop is not stopped at 0r/min even if the speed command after droop is negative. (stop at 0r/min under vector control without encoder)

Speed Rated speed Droop compensation speed Droop gain

-100%

100% Torque

Pr. 342

Refer to Pr. 117 (page 141).

171

PARAMETERS 4

Orientation (Pr. 350 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393 to Pr. 399)

4.27 Orientation (Pr. 350 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393 to Pr. 399)
4.27.1 Orientation control (Pr. 350, Pr. 351, Pr. 356, Pr. 357, Pr. 360 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393, Pr. 396 to Pr. 399
with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Orientation is a function that stops a motor shaft at a position set by parameter using the motor built-in position detector (encoder). Install the option (FR-V5AM or FR-A5AP) on the inverter to perform stop position command control with a position detector (encoder) fitted to the machine. Refer to the instruction mannual of the option for details. Pr. 350 "stop position command selection" is factory-set to "9999" to make the orientation control function invalid.
Parameter No.
350 351 356 357 360 361 362 393 396 397 398 399

Name
Stop position command selection Orientation switchover speed Internal stop position command Orientation in-position zone External position command selection Position shift Orientation position loop gain Orientation selection Orientation speed gain (P term) Orientation speed integral time Orientation speed gain (D term) Orientation deceleration ratio

Setting Range
0, 1, 2, 3, 9999 0 to 1000r/min 0 to 16383 0 to 8192 0, 1, 2 to 127 0 to 16383 0.1 to 100 1, 2, 10, 11, 12 0 to 1000% 0 to 20.0s 0 to 100.0% 0 to 1000

Factory Setting
9999 200r/min 0 11 0 0 10 0 60% 0.333s 1% 20

Remarks

Extended mode

REMARKS
Check the Pr. 851 and Pr. 852 settings. (Refer to page 10.)

<Settings> If the orientation command signal (X22) is turned on during operation after the various parameters have been set, the speed will decelerate to the "orientation switchover speed". After the "orientation stop distance" is calculated, the speed will further decelerate, and the "orientation state" (servo lock) will be entered. The "orientation complete signal" (ORA) will be output when the "orientation complete width" is entered.

(1) Setting I/O singals

Input Orientation command X22 signal Orientation control is valid with the signal on. Set "22" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr.183 or Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 163.) Switched low if the orientation has stopped within the in-position zone while the start and orientation signals are input. Open collector output Permissible load 24VDC, 0.1A Set 27 in any of Pr.190 to Pr. 192 or Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 165.)

Output

Orientaiton complete signal

ORA signal

172

Orientation (Pr. 350 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393 to Pr. 399)

(2) Selecting stop position command (Pr. 350 "stop position command selection")
Pr. 350 Setting
0 1 2 3 9999 (factory setting)

Select either the internal stop position command (Pr. 356) or the external stop position command (6/12/16-bit data).
Type of Command
Internal stop position command (Pr. 356:0 to 16383) External stop position command (FR-V5AX) 6-bit data External stop position command (FR-A5AX) 12-bit data External stop position command (FR-V5AH) 16-bit data Orientation control invalid
Origin (0) CW 270 (3072) 90 (1024) CCW 90 (1024) 270 (3072) Origin (0)

(1) Internal stop position command (Pr. 350="0") The value set in Pr. 356 is the stop position. When the number of encoder pulses is 1024p/r, one revolution of the encoder (360) is divided into 4096 positions, i.e. 360/ 4096 pulses = 0.0879/pulses per address, as shown on the right. The stop positions (addresses) are indicated in parentheses.

180(2048) Pr. 359=0

180(2048) Pr. 359=1

(2)-1 External stop position command (Pr. 350="1") (Pr. 360 "external position command selection" (factory setting: 0)) Mount the option FR-V5AX and set a stop position using 6-bit data (binary input). The value set in Pr. 360 "external position command selection" should be the number of stop positions less 1.
Pr. 360 Setting
0 1

Description
External position command is made invalid (multi-function input with the FR-V5AX) Set 64 stop positions at regular intervals Set the stop position command dividing up to 128 stop positions at regular intervals. If the external stop command entered is greater than the setting, the stop positions are the same as those in the maximum external stop command value. Note that the stop command greater than the 64 stop positions can not be entered if the number of stop positions are 65 to 128. <Example> When the number of stop positions is 20 (divided at intervals of 18), 20 - 1 = 19. Hence, set "19".

2 to 127

Origin (0) 270 (3 or more) 180 (2)

CW

(7 or more) Origin (0) 45(1) 315 (6)270 (5)225 180(4) 90(2) 135(3)

Origin (0)

90 (1)

The external stop command can not be entered. At intervals

of 3

CW
90 (30)

192 180 (64) (60)

Pr. 360 = "3"

Pr. 360 = "7"

Pr. 360 = "119"

(2)-2 External stop position command (Pr. 350="2") Mount the option FR-A5AX and set a stop position using 12-bit data (binary input). The value set in Pr. 360 "external position command selection" should be the number of stop positions less 1.
Pr. 360 Setting
0 1

Description
External position command is made invalid (speed command with the FR-A5AX) Set 4096 stop positions at regular intervals Set the stop position command dividing up to 128 stop positions at regular intervals. If the external stop command entered is greater than the setting, the stop positions are the same as those in the maximum external stop command value. <Example> When the number of stop positions is 90 (divided at intervals of 4), 90 - 1 = 89. Hence, set "89".

2 to 127

173

PARAMETERS 4

[Example 1] 4 stop positions

[Example 2] 8 stop positions

[Example 3] 120 stop positions

Orientation (Pr. 350 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393 to Pr. 399)

[Example 1] 4 stop positions
Origin (0) 270 (3 or more) 180 (2)
CW

[Example 2] 8 stop positions

(7 or more) Origin (0) 45(1) 315 (6)270 (5)225 180(4) 90(2) 135(3)

[Example 3] 120 stop positions

Origin (0) 270 (90) CW

90 (1)

At intervals 90 of 3 (30) 180 (60)

Pr. 360 = "3"

Pr. 360 = "7"

Pr. 360 = "119"

CAUTION Values in parentheses indicate binary data entered from the terminals. If the position pulse monitoring (Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display screen data selection" = 19) is selected, the data monitored is not the number of stop positions but is 0 to 4095 pulses. When any of "1 to 127" is set in Pr. 360, parameters (Pr. 300 to Pr. 305) of the FR-A5AX are made invalid. (Parameters are valid when Pr. 360="0".) Terminal DY (Data read timing input signal) is made invalid. (The position data is downloaded at the start of orientation.) When the option is not fitted or Pr. 360="0", the stop position is 0 even if the external stop position command is selected with the Pr. 350 setting. (2)-3 External stop position command (Pr. 350="3") Mount the option FR-V5AH and set a stop position using 16-bit data (binary input). The value set in Pr. 360 "external position command selection" should be the number of stop positions less 1.
Pr. 360 Setting
0 1

Description
External position command is made invalid (speed command or torque command with the FR-V5AH) Set 65536 stop positions at regular intervals Set the stop position command dividing up to 128 stop positions at regular intervals. If the external stop command entered is greater than the setting, the stop positions are the same as those in the maximum external stop command value. <Example> When the number of stop positions is 90 (divided at intervals of 4), 90 - 1 = 89. Hence, set "89".

2 to 127

[Example 1] 4 stop positions

Origin (0) 270 (3 or more) 180 (2)
CW

[Example 2] 8 stop positions

(7 or more) Origin (0) 45(1) 315 (6)270 (5)225 180(4) 90(2) 135(3)

[Example 3] 120 stop positions

Origin (0) 270 (90) CW

90 (1)

At intervals 90 of 3 (30) 180 (60)

Pr. 360 = "3"

Pr. 360 = "7"

Pr. 360 = "119"

CAUTION Values in parentheses indicate binary data entered from the input terminals. If the position pulse monitoring (Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display screen data selection" = 19) is selected, the data monitored is not the number of stop positions but is 0 to 65535 pulses. When any of "1 to 127" is set in Pr. 360, parameters (Pr. 300 to Pr. 305) of the FR-V5AH are made invalid. (Parameters are valid when Pr. 360="0".) Terminal DY (Data read timing input signal) is made invalid. (The position data is downloaded at the start of orientation.) When the option is not fitted or Pr. 360="0", the stop position is 0 even if the external stop position command is selected with the Pr. 350 setting.

174

Orientation (Pr. 350 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393 to Pr. 399)

(3) Setting the rotation direction (Pr. 393 "orientation selection")
Pr. 393 setting
0 (factory setting) 1

Rotation Direction
Pre-orientation

Type

Remarks
Orientation is executed from the current rotation direction. Orientation is executed from the forward rotation direction. (If the motor is running in reverse, orientation is executed from the forward rotation direction after deceleration.) Orientation is executed from the reverse rotation direction. (If the motor is running in forward, orientation is executed from the reverse rotation direction after deceleration.) Refer to the instruction manual of the option for details.

Forward rotation orientation Motor end orientation

2 10 11 12

Reverse rotation orientation Pre-orientation Forward rotation orientation Reverse rotation orientation Machine end orientation (when the FR-V5AM or FR-A5AP is used)

(1) Orientation from the current rotation direction When the orientation command (terminal X22) is input, the motor speed will decelerate from the runnig speed to Pr. 351 "orientation switchover speed". At the same time, the orientation stop position command will be read in. (The stop position command is determined by the settings of Pr.350 and Pr.360. Refer to the diagram on the right.) When the orientation switchover speed is reached, the encoder Z phase pulse will be confirmed, and the mode will change from speed control to position control (orientation position loop gain parameter (Pr. 362)). When the control is changed, the distance to the orientation stop position will be calculated. The motor will decelerate and stop with a set deceleration pattern (Pr. 399), and the orientation (servo lock) state will be entered. When entered in the Pr. 357 in-position zone is entered, the orientation complete signal (terminal ORA) will be output. The zero point position (origin) can be moved using position shift (Pr. 361).

Speed (forward) [t] X22 ORA OFF ON OFF ON

Speed (reverse)

[t]

X22 ORA

OFF

ON OFF ON

WARNING
If the orientation command (terminal X22) is turned off while the start signal is input, the motor will accelerate toward the speed of the current speed command. Thus, to stop, turn the forward rotation (reverse rotation) signal off. (2) Orientation from the forward rotation direction This method is used to improve the stopping precision and maintain the mechanical precision when the backlash is large. If the motor is running in the forward rotation direction, it will orientation stop with the same method as "orientation from the current rotation direction". If the motor is running in reverse, it will decelerate, the rotation direction will be changed to forward run, and then orientation stop will be executed.

Speed (forward) [t] X22 ORA

Speed (reverse)

[t]

X22 ORA

175

PARAMETERS 4

Orientation (Pr. 350 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393 to Pr. 399)

(3) Orientation from the reverse rotation direction If the motor is running in the reverse rotation direction, it will orientation stop with the same method as "orientation from the current rotation direction". If the motor is running in forward, it will decelerate, the rotation direction will be changed to reverse run, and then orientation stop will be executed.

Speed (forward) [t] X22 ORA

Speed (reverse)

[t]

X22 ORA

CAUTION 1. The encoder should be coupled with the motor shaft or the spindle oriented with a speed ratio of 1 to 1 without any mechanical looseness. 2. To ensure correct positioning, the encoder must be set in the proper rotation direction and the A and B phases connected correctly. 3. The orientation may not be completed if the pulse signals are not received from the encoder during orientation due to a break in the cable or the like. 4. To terminate orientation, the start signal (STF or STR) must be first switched off and the orientation signal (X22) must be switched off. As soon as this orientation signal is switched off, orientation control ends. 5. For orientation control, set correct values in Pr. 350 "stop position command selection" and Pr. 360 "external position command selection" If the values set are incorrect, proper orientation control will not be performed. 6. When orientation control is exercised, PID control is invalid. REMARKS
If "E.ECT" (no encoder signal) is displayed causing the inverter to trip when the orient signal (X22) is ON, check for an break in the cable of the Z phase of the encoder.

Pr. 357 "orientation in-position zone" Example of operation (factory setting:11) The positioning width for orientation stop can be Set point set. The factory setting of Pr. 357 is "11". To change the value, finely adjust with 10 increments, and make fine adjustment. 360 Pr.357 = If the position detection value from the encoder Pr.851 number of encoder pulses 4 enters during orientation stop, the orientation complete signal (ORA) will be output. CAUTION This setting is used to judge the ON/OFF of the orientation complete signal, and does not determine the orientation stop precision.

176

Orientation (Pr. 350 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393 to Pr. 399)

(4) Fine adjustment of the orientation stop position (Pr. 361 "position shift" (factory setting: 0))
The orientation stop position will deviate by the value set x 360 / Pr. 851"number of encoder pulses" x4. Finely adjust the position by changing this setting value in 10 increments. The orientation stop position will differ according to the direction that the encoder is installed in. (Refer to the drawings below.)
Case 1 Installation direction
Encoder Motor Belt A Motor

Case 2
Encoder Belt A

View from A
Normal orientation
Foward Reverse

View from A
Forward Reverse

1024 (90)

3072 (270)

3072 (270)

1024 (90)

2048 (180)

2048 (180)

(5) Adjustment of the servo rigidity

Pr. 396 "orientation speed gain (P term)" (factory setting: 60) Pr. 397 "orientation speed integral time" (factory setting: 0.333) Pr. 398 "orientation speed gain (D term)" (factory setting: 1) Pr. 362 "orientation position loop gain" (factory setting: 10) To increase the servo rigidity*1 during orientation stop in Pr. 396 or Pr. 397, adjust with the following procedures. 1) Increase the Pr. 362 "orientation position loop gain" value to the extent that rocking does not occur during orientation stop. 2) Increase Pr. 396 and Pr. 397 at the same rate. Generally adjust Pr. 396 in the range from 10 to 100, and Pr. 397 from 0.1 to 1.0s. (Note that these do not need to be set to the same rate.) <Example> When the Pr. 396 value is multiplied by 1.2, divide the Pr. 397 value by 1.2. If vibration occurs during orientation stop, the scale cannot be raised any higher. 3) Pr. 398 is the lag/advance compensation gain.*2 The limit cycle can be provided by increasing the value, and the running can be stopped stably. However, the torque in regard to the position deviation will drop, and the motor will stop with deviation. POINT Application of lag/advance control and PI control PI control can be applied by setting Pr. 398 to 0. Normally, the lag/advance control is selected. Use PI control in the following cases. When using a machine with a high spindle stationary friction torque and requires a stopping position precision. REMARKS
*1.. Servo rigidity: This is the response when a position control loop is configured. When the servo rigidity is raised, the holding force will increase, the running will stabilize, but vibration will occur easily. When the servo rigidity is lowered, the holding force will drop, and the setting time will increase. *2.. Limit cycle*:This is a phenomenon that generates continuous vibration centering on the target position. *3.. Rocking: Movement in which return occurs if the stopping position is exceeded.

177

PARAMETERS 4

Orientation (Pr. 350 to Pr. 362, Pr. 393 to Pr. 399)

Pr. 399 "orientation deceleration ratio" (factory setting: 20) Make adjustments as shown below according to the orientation status. (Refer to the Pr. 396 and Pr. 397 details also.) Generally adjust Pr. 362 in the range from 5 to 20 and Pr. 399 from 5 to 50.
Phenomenon
Rocking occurs during stopping The orientation time is long Hunting occurs when stopping The servo rigidity during stopping is low 2) 2)

Pr. 396
3)

Adjustment Procedure Pr. 397 Pr. 362

3) 2) 2) 1)

Pr. 399
1) 1)
REMARKS
1. :Increase the parameter setting value. :Do not change the parameter setting value. :Decrease the parameter setting value. 2. The numbers 1) 2) and 3) in the table show the order of priority for changing the parameters setting value.

1)

1)

2)

CAUTION If orientation stop is not possible and the excessive position error alarm occurs, or if the motor does forward/reverse reciprocation operation , the parameter setting value for the orientation detector installation direction may be incorrect. Review Pr. 393 "orientation selection" (Refer to page 175.) and Pr. 852 "encoder rotation direction" (Refer to page 10.). Pr. 351 "orientation switchover speed" (factory setting: 200) Set the speed when switching beween the speed control mode and the position control mode under orientation operation. Decreasing the set speed enables stable orientation stop. Note that the orientation time will increase.

Speed[r/min]

Pr.351 "Orientation switchover speed" Decelerates according to the deceleration ratio set in Pr.399 Orientation command completion ON Time[t] OFF

Orientation start (X22) Orientation complete (ORA)

Encoder Z phase pulse

REMARKS
When " 19" is set in Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection", position pulse monitor is displayed instead of PU output voltage monitor.

178

Control system function (Pr. 374)

4.28 Control system function (Pr. 374)

4.28.1 Overspeed detection (Pr. 374
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Excess of the motor speed over the overspeed detection level results in E.OS, stopping the output. This function is enabled only during speed control, torque control or position control under vector control with encoder.
Parameter
374

Name
Overspeed detection level

Setting Range
0 to 4200r/min

Factory Setting
4200r/min

Remarks
Extended mode

Overspeed detection level

Motor speed

Pr.374

Alarm contact (ABC)

Pr. 380 to Pr. 383

Refer to Pr. 29 (page 102). Refer to Pr. 350 (page 172).

Pr. 393, Pr. 396 to Pr. 399

179

PARAMETERS 4

Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494)

4.29 Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494)
4.29.1 Position control (Pr. 419 to Pr. 430, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494
Parameter
419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 430 464
Conditional PLC SSC

Position

)
Factory Setting
0 1 1 25s-1 0% 0s 0s 100 pulses 40K 9999 0

Name
Position command right selection Command pulse scaling factor numerator Command pulse scaling factor denominator Position loop gain Position feed forward gain Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant Position feed forward command filter In-position width Excessive level error Pulse monitor selection Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time

Setting Range
0, 1 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 0 to 150s-1 0 to 100% 0 to 50s 0 to 5s 0 to 32767 pulses 0 to 400K, 9999 0 to 5, 9999 0 to 360.0s

Parameter
465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494

Name

Setting Range

Factory Selection Method Setting REX RH RM RL

OFF ON OFF OFF

Positioning Speed
High speed, Pr. 4

First position feed amount lower 4 digits First position feed amount upper 4 digits Second position feed amount lower 4 digits Second position feed amount upper 4 digits Third position feed amount lower 4 digits Third position feed amount upper 4 digits Fourth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fourth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fifth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fifth position feed amount upper 4 digits Sixth position feed amount lower 4 digits Sixth position feed amount upper 4 digits Seventh position feed amount lower 4 digits Seventh position feed amount upper 4 digits Eighth position feed amount lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 Eighth position feed amount upper 4 digits Ninth position feed amount lower 4 digits Ninth position feed amount upper 4 digits Tenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Tenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Eleventh position feed amount lower 4 digits Eleventh position feed amount upper 4 digits Twelfth position feed amount lower 4 digits Twelfth position feed amount upper 4 digits Thirteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Thirteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fourteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fourteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fifteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fifteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits

OFF OFF ON OFF Middle speed, Pr. 5 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON Low speed, Pr. 6 Speed 4, Pr. 24 Speed 5, Pr. 25 Speed 6, Pr. 26 Speed 7, Pr. 27 Speed 8, Pr. 232 Speed 9, Pr. 233

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 0 ON OFF ON ON

ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON

ON OFF ON OFF Speed 10, Pr. 234 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON Speed 11, Pr. 235

ON OFF OFF Speed 12, Pr. 236 ON OFF ON ON ON Speed 13, Pr. 237

ON OFF Speed 14, Pr. 238 ON ON Speed 15, Pr. 239

Refer to page 57 for details of position control. Pr. 450 Pr. 451 Pr. 452 Refer to Pr. 71 (page 123). Refer to Pr. 800 (page 182). Refer to Pr. 9 (page 93). Refer to page 41. Refer to page 57.

Pr. 453, Pr. 454 Pr. 464 to Pr. 494

180

Remote output (Pr. 495 to Pr.497)

4.30 Remote output (Pr. 495 to Pr.497)

4.30.1 Remote output function (Pr. 495 to Pr.497
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

You can utilize the on/off of the inverter's output signals instead of the remote output function of the programmable controller.(Use Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 to set the output signals. Refer to page 165.)
Parameter
495 496 497

Name
Remote output selection Remote output data 1 Remote output data 2

Factory Setting
0 0 0

Setting Range
0 1 0 to 4095 0 to 4095

Description

Remarks

Remote output data cleared at power failure Remote output data held at power failure Extended mode Refer to the following diagram.

<Remote output data> Pr. 496

b11 DO13 DO12 DO11 b0

DO2

DO3

DO1

ABC

**

**

**

*: As desired (always 0 when read) **DO11 to DO13 are available only when the extension output option (FR-V5AY) is fitted. Pr. 497
b11 RA0 RA3 RA2 RA1 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 b0 Y0

* **** *** *** *** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

*: As desired (always 0 when read) **:Y0 to Y6 are available only when the extension output option (FR-A5AY) is fitted. ***:RA1 to RA3 are available only when the extension output option (FR-A5AR) is fitted. ****:RA0 is available only when the extension output option (FR-A5NR) is fitted.

(1) Operation
By setting 1 in the corresponding bit of Pr. 496, the output terminal that has been set to 96 (positive logic) or 196 (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 turns on (off for negative logic). By setting 0, the output terminal turns off (on for negative logic). If a power failure occurs at the Pr. 495 setting of 0, the output data are cleared to zero after power recovery and the output terminals turn on/off in accordance with the positive/negative logic settings of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195. When the Pr. 495 setting is 1, the remote output data at occurrence of a power failure are stored into E2PROM to make the output data at power recovery the same as those at a power failure, and the on/off states of the output terminals are also made the same as those at a power failure. (They are not stored at an inverter reset.) If the terminals of remote output and non-remote output are mixed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195, the terminal to which remote output is not assigned will not turn on/off even if 0/1 is set in the corresponding bit of the remote output data (Pr. 496), and that terminal turns on/off with respect to the selected function.

(2) Others
Setting Pr. 496, Pr. 497 with the PU/DU, by computer link through the PU connector, or by communication through the communication option allows the on/off control of the remote output terminals. Pr. 496, Pr. 497 is always accessible by making access to RAM only. When the inverter is reset, therefore, the Pr. 496, Pr. 497 setting changes to 0. When Pr. 495 = 1, however, that setting is the same as at a power failure. If you change the Pr. 495 setting of 1 to 0 with the Pr. 496 and Pr. 497 value stored in E2PROM at occurrence of a power failure, the Pr. 496 and Pr. 497 value stored changes to 0.

CAUTION When Pr. 495 = 1, take such a step as to connect R1, S1 and P, N to ensure that control power will be retained to some degree. If you do not take such a step, the output signals provided after power-on are not guaranteed. Related parameters
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) (Refer to page 165.)

181

PARAMETERS 4

Operation selection functions 4 (Pr. 800 to Pr. 809)

4.31 Operation selection functions 4 (Pr. 800 to Pr. 809)

4.31.1 Control selection (Pr. 800, Pr. 451
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Used to select the control method. Setting Pr. 800 (Pr. 451) control system selection enables the following combination using the MC signal (mode changing). Use terminal RT to switch to the second motor, control method selection. (Refer to page 41 for details about using the second motor)
Parameter
800 451

Name
Control system selection Second motor control method selection

Factory Setting
0 9999

Setting Range
0 to 5, 10, 11, 12, 20 10, 11, 12, 20, 9999

Select the inverter control system such as speed control, torque control or position control.
Pr. 800 Setting
0 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 20 Vector control without encoder V/F control Vector control with encoder

Control System

Control Method
Speed control Torque control

Remarks

Factory setting MC ON: Torque control Speed control-torque control switchover MC OFF: Speed cotrol Position control MC ON: Position control Speed control-position control switchover MC OFF: Speed control MC ON: Torque control Position control-torque control switchover MC OFF: Position control Speed control Torque control MC ON: Torque control Speed control-torque control switchover MC OFF: Speed control Speed control

Related parameters
MC signal terminal assignment Set "26" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 163.)
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

4.31.2 Torque characteristic selection (Pr. 801

Speed

Torque

Position

When using the motor with encoder, you can select the torque characteristic.
Parameter
801

Name
Torque characteristic selection

Factory Setting
1 0 1

Setting Range Motor with encoder (e.g. SF-JR)

Cyclic operation mode Continuous operation mode

CAUTION Usually, operate in the continuous operation mode (setting value: 1) Torque at a low speed is not sufficient in the cyclic operation mode (setting value: 0). Note this when changing the setting.

Torque characteristic of motor with encoder (Example: SF-JR with encoder (4 poles))
Torque characteristic available when the inverter and motor of the same capacity are used and the rated voltage is input
1800r/min (60Hz) torque reference Cyclic operation mode setting Continuous operation mode setting

Short-duration maximum torque <2.2 to 55 (3 to 75)[kW (HP)]>

Torque(%) 150 Torque [%] 50 2.2kW to 55kW (3HP to 75HP)

Short-duration maximum torque <2.2 to 55 (3 to 75) [kW (HP)]>

Torque(%) 150 Torque [%] 40 2.2kW to 55kW (3HP to 75HP)

1800

Speed [r/min] 3600 (Caution 1)

1500

Speed[r/min] 3600 (Caution 1)

182

Operation selection functions 4 (Pr. 800 to Pr. 809)

1800r/min (60Hz) torque reference Cyclic operation mode setting Continuous operation mode setting

50%ED torque <2.2 to 55 (3 to 75) [kW (HP)]>

Torque(%) 100

Continuous operation torque <2.2 to 55 (3 to 75) [kW (HP)]>

Torque(%) 100 82

2.2kW to 55kW (3HP to 75HP)

2.2kW to 55kW (3HP to 75HP)

50 33 Speed[r/min] 3600 (Caution 1)

33 Speed[r/min] 3600 (Caution 1)

900

1800

0 180 600

1800

CAUTION 1. The maximum speeds are 1) 2.2kW to 7.5kW (3HP to 10HP): 3600r/min, 2) 15kW to 22kW (20HP to 30HP): 3000r/min, and 3) 37kW to 55kW (50HP to 75HP): 1950r/min. 2. 50%ED continuously repeated operation can be performed at the cycle time of 10 minutes. Note that continuous operation can be performed for a maximum of 5 minutes. Pr. 802 Pr. 803 Refer to Pr. 10 to Pr. 12 (page 95). Refer to Pr. 22 (page 100).

183

PARAMETERS 4

Operation selection functions 4 (Pr. 800 to Pr. 809) 4.31.3 Torque command right selection (Pr. 804 to Pr. 806
When you selected torque control, you can choose the torque command.
Parameter Name Factory Setting
0 1
with Encoder without Encoder

Torque

Setting Range
Terminal 3 analog input Digital input from parameter Pr. 805 or Pr. 806 setting (-400% to 400%) Torque command using pulse train command (FR-V5AP) Refer to the instruction manual of the option "FR-V5AP" for details. Torque command by using CC-Link (FR-A5NC) Refer to the instruction manual of the option "FR-A5NC" for details. Torque command from the option (digital) (FR-V5AH, FR-A5AX) Refer to the instruction manual of the option "FR-V5AH, FR-A5AX" for details. 600 to 1400% 600 to 1400%

2 804 Torque command right selection 0 3

4 805 806 Torque command value (RAM) Torque command value (RAM, E2PROM) 1000% 1000%

(1) Terminal 3 calibration (Pr. 804 = 0) The torque command value for the analog input of the terminal 3 varies with Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 as shown on the right.

Torque command value Pr.905 Gain setting Pr.904 Bias setting Pr.904 Bias input No. 3 terminal input Pr.905 Gain input

(2) Digital input from parameter (Pr. 804 = 1) Digital setting of the torque command can be made by writing the torque command value to Pr. 805 or Pr. 806 by communication. The torque command can also be specified by parameter direct setting. In this case, set the speed restriction value to an appropriate value to prevent acceleration. 600% The relationship between the Pr. 805 or Pr. 806 setting and actual torque command value at this time is shown on the right. On the assumption that 1000% is 0%, the torque command is indicated by an offset from 1000%.

Torque command value 400%

Pr. 805 or Pr. 806 setting 1000% 1400%

Torque command value = Pr. 805 or Pr.806 - 1000%

-400%

CAUTION 1. For the command given by the torque setting command E2PROM (RYE), the set torque (RWW1) is reflected on the torque command value of the inverter when the torque setting command E2PROM (RYE) changes from off to on. For the command given by the torque setting command RAM (RYD), the set torque (RWW1) is reflected on the inverter while the torque setting command RAM (RYD) is on. 2. When writing the torque command value by communication (Pr. 804 = 1, Pr. 804 = 3), there is a restriction on the number of write times to E2PROM. When the value is changed often, write it to RAM. (When Pr. 804 = 1, set "1" in Pr. 342 "E2PROM write selection" to select write to RAM.)

184

Operation selection functions 4 (Pr. 800 to Pr. 809) 4.31.4 Speed restriction (Pr. 807 to Pr. 809
with Encoder without Encoder

Torque

When you selected torque control, set the speed restriction value to prevent the load torque from becoming less than the torque command value, resulting in motor overspeed.
Parameter
807 808 809

Name
Speed restriction selection Forward rotation speed restriction Reverse rotation speed restriction

Factory Setting
0 1800r/min 9999

Setting Range
0 , 1, 2 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min, 9999

<Settings>
Set the speed restriction value to prevent the load torque from becoming less than the torque command value, resulting in motor overspeed. Select the speed restriction input method using Pr. 807.
Pr. 807 Setting Speed Restriction Input Method

Operation
Speed setting from the operation panel External analog command (terminal 1, 2) Multi-speed command Option (FR-V5AX etc.) For both PU and external operations, speed restriction changes according to the acceleration/deceleration time. According to the rotation direction, set the speed restrictions in forward and reverse rotation directions individually. When the reverse rotation speed restriction is 9999, the setting is the same as that of the torque restriction in the forward rotation direction. The analog voltage of the terminal 1 input is used to make speed restriction. For 0 to 10V input, set the forward rotation speed restriction. (The reverse rotation speed restriction is Pr. 1 "maximum speed" .) For -10 to 0V input, set the reverse rotation speed restriction. (The forward rotation speed restriction is Pr. 1 "maximum speed".) The maximum speed of both the forward and reverse rotation is Pr. 1 "maximum speed". When terminal 1 input is selected, set "5" in Pr. 868 "No. 1 terminal function assignment". (Refer to page 195.)

0 (factory setting)

Same method as in speed setting for speed control

Pr. 808 Forward rotation speed restriction Pr. 809 Reverse rotation speed restriction Forward/reverse rotation speed restriction (analog polarity switchover speed restriction) (Terminal 1 analog input)

(1) When Pr. 807 =0

Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).

(2) When Pr. 807 = 1

Parameter
808 809

Name
Forward rotation speed restriction Reverse rotation speed restriction

Factory Setting
1800r/min 9999

Setting Range
0 to 3600r/min, 9999

Using the parameters, set the forward rotation and reverse rotation speed restriction levels individually.

Speed 150% torque Forward rotation Torque controllable range Speed Pr.7 Speed restriction operation Pr.8

Pr. 808, forward rotation speed Pr. 808, forward restriction level rotation speed restriction level Pr. 809, reverse rotation speed restriction level Start signal Torque controllable range

Output torque Pr. 809, reverse rotation speed restriction level

Reverse rotation

185

PARAMETERS 4

0 to 3600r/min

Operation selection functions 4 (Pr. 800 to Pr. 809)

(3) When Pr. 807 = 2
Using the analog input of the terminal 1, set the forward rotation and reverse rotation speed restriction levels. At this time, the speed restriction made on the analog input is as shown below. 1) When terminal 1 input is -10 to 0V Reverse rotation speed restriction 2) When terminal 1 input is 0V to 10V Forward rotation speed restriction

Speed Forward rotation Speed Pr. 1 "maximum speed" Torque controllable range Output torque 0 150% torque 0 Forward rotation

No. 1 terminal input Output torque

No. 1 terminal input

Reverse rotation

Actual speed Speed restriction operation

Pr. 1 "maximum speed" Reverse rotation

Speed Pr. 1 "maximum speed"

Pr.7

Pr.8

Torque controllable range

No. 1 terminal input is -10 to 0V

Start signal

Related parameters
Selection of No. 1 terminal function Pr. 868 "No. 1 terminal function assignment" (Refer to page 195.) Speed restriction during acceleration/deceleration Pr. 7 "acceleration time", Pr. 8 "deceleration time" (Refer to page 91.) DC injection brake operation level Pr. 10 "DC injection brake operation speed" (Refer to page 95.) Speed restriction level maximum setting Pr. 1 "maximum speed" (Refer to page 89.)

CAUTION When speed speed restriction, torque control is switched to speed control. Pr. 810, Pr. 812 to Pr. 817 Refer to Pr. 22 (page 100)

186

Control system functions (Pr. 818 to Pr. 837)

4.32 Control system functions (Pr. 818 to Pr. 837)

4.32.1 Easy gain tuning selection (Pr. 818, Pr. 819
with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Position

The ratio of load inertia to motor inertia (load inertia moment ratio) is estimated in real time from the torque command and speed during motor operation under vector control with encoder, and this value is used to automatically set the optimum gain for speed/position control, reducing the time and effort of making gain adjustment.
Parameter
818 819

Name
Easy gain tuning response level setting Easy gain tuning selection

Factory Setting
2 0 0 1 2

Setting Range
1 to 15 No tuning With load estimation Manual load input

Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details. Related parameters

Adjusted gains Pr. 820 "speed control P gain 1", Pr. 821 "speed control integral time 1", Pr. 828 "model speed control gain", Pr. 422 "position loop gain" Adjusted load inertia ratio Pr. 880 "load inertia ratio"

4.32.2 Speed loop proportional gain setting (Pr. 820, Pr. 830
Parameter
820 830

with Encoder

without Encoder

Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Position

Name
Speed control P gain 1 (when RT signal is off) Speed control P gain 2 (when RT signal is on)

Factory Setting
60% 9999

Setting Range
0 to 1000% 0 to 1000%, 9999

Remarks
Extended mode

Set the proportional gain of the speed loop. Increasing the gain enhances the speed response level and decreases the speed fluctuation relative to disturbance, but a too large gain will produce vibration and/or sound. Pr. 820 "speed control P gain 1" and Pr. 830 "speed control P gain 2" are 0 to 1000% in the setting range and 60% in the factory setting. For general adjustment, set them within the range of 20 to 200%. REMARKS
1. The response level will be worse when the coupling is loose. 2. When performing positioning, increase the setting to enhance accuracy. 3. Decrease the setting when there is gear backlash, etc.

4.32.3 Speed control integral time setting (Pr. 821, Pr. 831
Parameter
821 831

with Encoder

without Encoder

Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Position

) PARAMETERS 4 )

Name
Speed control integral time 1 (when RT signal is off) Speed control integral time 2 (when RT signal is on)

Factory Setting
0.333s 9999

Setting Range
0 to 20s 0 to 20s, 9999

Remarks
Extended mode

Set the integral compensation time of the speed loop. If speed fluctuation occurs relative to disturbance, decreasing the value shortens the recovery time, but a too small value will cause a speed overshoot. A large value improves stability but increases the recovery time (response time) and may cause an undershoot. REMARKS
You can switch between PI control and P control under speed control using the X44 signal. (Refer to page 37.)
with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

4.32.4 Speed setting circuit filter function (Pr. 822, Pr. 832

Speed

Position

Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the external speed command (analog input command). Set a large time constant when you want to delay the tracking of the speed command or when the analog input voltage is unstable.
Parameter
822 832

Name
Speed setting filter 1 (when RT signal is off) Speed setting filter 2 (when RT signal is on)

Factory Setting
0s (without filter) 9999

Setting Range
0 to 5s 0 to 5s, 9999

Remarks
Extended mode

187

Control system functions (Pr. 818 to Pr. 837) 4.32.5 Speed detection filter function (Pr. 823, Pr. 833
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the speed feedback signal. Since this function reduces the speed loop response, use it with the factory setting. Set the time constant when speed ripples occur due to harmonic disturbance. Note that a too large value will run the motor unstably.
Parameter
823 833

Name
Speed detection filter 1 (when RT signal is off) Speed detection filter 2 (when RT signal is on)

Factory Setting Setting Range

0.001s 9999 0 to 0.1s 0 to 0.1s, 9999

Remarks
0: without filter Extended 9999: same as the Pr. 823 mode setting

REMARKS
When speed ripples are large, setting this parameter Pr. 823 or Pr. 833 ensures stability.

4.32.6 Current loop proportional gain setting for vector control (Pr. 824, Pr. 834
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder

Speed

Torque

without Encoder

Conditional PLC SSC

Position

Set the current loop proportional gain for vector control. Increasing the gain enhances the torque response level, but a too large gain will cause instability, generating harmonic torque pulsation.
Pr. 824 "torque control P gain 1" and Pr. 834 "torque control P gain 2" are 0 to 200% in the setting range and 100% in the factory setting. For general adjustment, set them within the range 50 to 200%. Parameter
824 834

Name
Torque control P gain 1 (when RT signal is off) Torque control P gain 2 (when RT signal is on)

Factory Setting
100% 9999

Setting Range
0 to 200% 0 to 200%, 9999

Remarks
Extended mode

REMARKS
The factory setting ensures fully stable operation. For general adjustment, make setting within the range 50 to 200% as a guideline.

4.32.7 Current control integral time setting for vector control (Pr. 825, Pr. 835
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Set the current loop integral compensation time for vector control. A small value enhances the torque response level, but a too small value will cause current fluctuation.
Parameter
825 835

Name
Torque control integral time 1 (when RT signal is off) Torque control integral time 2 (when RT signal is on)

Factory Setting
5ms 9999

Setting Range
0 to 500ms 0 to 500ms, 9999

Remarks
Extended mode

REMARKS
The factory setting ensures fully stable operation.
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

4.32.8 Torque setting filter function (Pr. 826, Pr. 836

Speed

Torque

Position

Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the external torque command (analog input command). Set a large time constant value when you want to delay the tracking of the torque command, the analog input voltage fluctuates, etc.
Parameter
826 836

Name
Torque setting filter 1 (when RT signal is off) Torque setting filter 2 (when RT signal is on)

Factory Setting
0s (without filter) 9999

Setting Range
0 to 5s 0 to 5s, 9999

Remarks
Extended mode

188

Torque biases (Pr. 840 to Pr. 848) 4.32.9 Torque detection filter function (Pr. 827, Pr. 837
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the torque feedback signal. Since the current loop response reduces, use it with the factory setting.
Parameter
827 837

Name
Torque detection filter 1 (when RT signal is off) Torque detection filter 2 (when RT signal is on)

Factory Setting
0s 9999
with Encoder without Encoder

Setting Range
0 to 0.1s

Remarks
Extended mode

0 to 0.1s, 9999
Conditional PLC SSC

4.32.10 Model speed control gain (Pr. 828

Parameter
828

Speed

Position

)
Remarks
Extended mode

Name
Model speed control gain

Factory Setting
60%

Setting Range
0 to 1000%

For details, refer to page 51.

4.33 Torque biases (Pr. 840 to Pr. 848)

4.33.1 Torque bias function (Pr. 840 to Pr. 848
with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

This function accelerates the rise of the torque at a start. Adjust the torque at a motor start using the contact signals or analog signals .
Parameter
840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848

Name
Torque bias selection Torque bias 1 Torque bias 2 Torque bias 3 Torque bias filter Torque bias operation time Torque bias balance compensation Fall-time torque bias No. 3 bias Fall-time torque bias No. 3 gain

Factory Setting
9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999

Setting Range
0 to 3, 9999 600 to 1400%, 9999 600 to 1400%, 9999 600 to 1400%, 9999 0 to 5s, 9999 0 to 5s, 9999 0 to 10V, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999

Remarks

Extended mode

Block diagram
Speed command Speed command

+ -

Speed control

Torque control Pr.840

IM

Internal parameters DI x Torque bias selection 1 Torque bias selection 2 SD

HOLD

Encoder

CW

DI x

Pr.841 Pr.842 Pr.843

Cage

+ Pr.846

CW<=cage Pr.905 Pr.904 CW>=cage Pr. 826, torque setting filter 3 Load detector

189

PARAMETERS 4

Torque biases (Pr. 840 to Pr. 848)

(1) Parameter details
1) Pr. 840 "torque bias selection" Select the setting method of the torque bias amount.
Pr. 840 Setting
0 1 2 3 9999

Description
Set the torque bias amount based on the contact signals (DI1 to DI4) in Pr. 841 to Pr. 843. To raise the cage when the motor runs in forward rotation direction. Set the terminal 3-based torque bias amount as desired in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905. To raise the cage when the motor runs in reverse rotation direction. Set the terminal 3-based torque bias amount as desired in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905. The terminal 3-based torque bias amount can be set automatically in Pr. 904, Pr. 905 and Pr. 846 according to the load. No torque bias

<Operation diagrams> When Pr. 840 = 0 Set the torque bias values (Pr. 841 to Pr. 843) in the following table according to the combination of the contact signals (DI1 to DI4).
Torque Bias Selection 1 (X42 Terminal)
OFF ON OFF ON

Torque Bias Selection 2 (X43 Terminal)

OFF OFF ON ON

Torque Bias (Pr. 841 to Pr. 843)

No selection Pr.841 1000 to 1400%: Positive value 600 to 999%: Negative value Pr.842 1000 to 1400%: Positive value 600 to 999%: Negative value Pr.843 1000 to 1400%: Positive value 600 to 999%: Negative value

(Example) 25% when Pr. 841 = 1025, -25% when Pr. 842 = 975, -75% when Pr. 843 = 925 When Pr. 840 = 1 Calculate the torque bias from the analog input value of the terminal 3 as shown below and set the gain and bias (Pr. 904, Pr. 905) of the torque command.
Rise (Motor Forward Rotation)
Bias amount (Pr. 841, Pr. 842, Pr. 843)

Fall (Motor Reverse Rotation)

Bias amount (Pr. 841, Pr. 842, Pr. 843) Fall-time torque bias No. 3 gain, Pr. 848 Fall-time torque bias No. 3 bias, Pr. 847

Torque command No. 3 gain, Pr. 905

No. 3 terminal input

No. 3 terminal input Voltage for max. load

Voltage for Torque max. load command Voltage for No. 3 bias, balanced load Pr. 904 Pr.846

Voltage for balanced load Pr.846

When Pr. 840 = 2

Rise (Motor Reverse Rotation)
Bias amount (Pr. 841, Pr. 842, Pr. 843) Torque command No. 3 bias, Pr. 904 Torque command No. 3 gain, Pr. 905 Voltage for balanced load Pr.846 Voltage for max. load No. 3 terminal input

Fall (Motor Forward Rotation)

Bias amount (Pr. 841, Pr. 842, Pr. 843) Fall-time torque bias No. 3 gain, Pr. 847 Fall-time torque bias No. 3 bias, Pr. 848 Voltage for balanced load Pr.846 Voltage for max. load No. 3 terminal input

190

Torque biases (Pr. 840 to Pr. 848)

When Pr. 840 = 3 Pr. 904 "torque command No. 3 bias", Pr. 905 "torque command No. 3 gain" and Pr. 846 "torque bias balance compensation" can be set automatically according to the load. Pr. 904, Pr. 905 settings
Read Pr. 904 when speed has stabilized. Press [WRITE] key. (Pr. 904 setting complete)

Run under no load.

Press [WRITE] key. (Pr. 905 setting complete)

Read Pr. 905 when speed has stabilized.

Run under maximum load.

Pr. 846 setting

Balanced load being carried
Press [WRITE] key. Torque balance compensation in driving mode is complete.

Read Pr. 846.

CAUTION When starting torque bias operation after completion of automatic setting, set "1 or 2" in Pr. 840. 2) Pr. 841 "torque bias 1", Pr. 842 "torque bias 2", Pr. 843 "torque bias 3" On the assumption that the rated torque is 100%, the torque bias setting of 1000% is the center value of torque and the bias value is "0".
Setting
600 to 999% 1000 to 1400% 9999

Description
Negative torque bias amount (-400% to -1%) Positive torque bias amount (0% to 400%) Without torque bias setting

3) Pr. 844 "torque bias filter" You can make a torque rise gentler. At this time, the torque rises according to the time constant of the primary delay filter.
Setting
0 to 5s 9999

Description
Time until torque rises. Same operation as when 0s is set.

4) Pr. 845 "torque bias operation time" Set the time for output torque be maintained with the torque bias command value alone.
Setting
0 to 5s 9999

Description

5) Pr. 846 "torque bias balance compensation" Set the voltage of the torque bias analog input value input to the terminal 3 to compensate for the balance of the torque bias amount.
Setting
0 to 10V 9999

Description
Set the voltage under balanced load. Same operation as when 0V is set.

6) Pr. 847 "fall-time torque bias No. 3 bias" Set the torque bias amount at a fall time (when the motor runs in the reverse rotation direction).
Setting
0 to 400% 9999

Description
Set the bias value of the torque command. Same as at a rise time (Pr. 904).

7) Pr. 848 "fall-time torque bias No. 3 gain" Set the torque bias amount at a fall time.
Setting
0 to 400% 9999

Description
Set the gain value of the torque command. Same as at a rise time (Pr. 905).

191

PARAMETERS 4

Time for maintaining torque equivalent to the torque bias amount. Same operation as when 0s is set.

Additional functions (Pr. 851 to Pr. 865)

(2) Torque bias operation

Speed

Torque bias Pr.844

Torque bias filter Primary delay timeconstant Output torque Time when torque is generated by torque bias setting Pre-excitation LX* Start signal

Pr.845

*When pre-excitation is not made, the torque bias functions simultaneously with the start signal. Pr. 849 Pr. 850 Refer to Pr. 902, Pr.903 (page 205) Refer to Pr. 10, Pr.11, Pr.12 (page 95)

4.34 Additional functions (Pr. 851 to Pr. 865)

4.34.1 Selection of number of encoder pulses (Pr. 851
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Set the number of pulses of the encoder fitted to the motor. (number of pulses before multiplied by 4)
Parameter
851

Name
Number of encoder pulses

Factory Setting
1024

Setting Range
0 to 4096

Refer to page 10 for details.

4.34.2 Selection of encoder rotation direction (Pr. 852

with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder

Speed

Torque

without Encoder

Conditional PLC SSC

Position

You can set the rotation direction of the encoder.

Parameter
852

Name
Encoder rotation direction

Factory Setting
1

Setting Range
0, 1

Remarks
Extended mode

Refer to page 10 for details.

192

Additional functions (Pr. 851 to Pr. 865) 4.34.3 Excitation ratio (Pr. 854
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Decrease the excitation ratio when you want to improve efficiency under light load. (motor magnetic noise decreases) Note that the rise of output torque becomes slow if excitation ratio is decreased. This function is appropriate for applications as machine tools which repeat rapid acceleration/deceleration up to high speed.

Excitation ratio [%] 100 (Factory setting) Pr. 854 setting

100

Load[%]

Parameter
854

Name
Excitation ratio

Factory Setting
100%

Setting Range
0 to 100%

Remarks
Extended mode

REMARKS
When "1" (magnetic flux command from the terminal 1) is set in Pr. 868 "No. 1 terminal function assignment", this Pr. 854 setting is made invalid.

Pr. 859 Pr. 860

Refer to page 136 Refer to page 136

with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

4.34.4 Notch filter (Pr. 862, Pr. 863

Speed

Position

You can reduce the response level of speed control in the resonance frequency band of the mechanical system to avoid mechanical resonance.
Parameter
862 863

Name
Notch filter frequency Notch filter depth

Setting Range Increments

0 to 31 0 to 3 1 1

Factory Setting
0 0 0: Function invalid

Remarks
Extended mode

Pr. 862 "notch filter frequency"

Pr. 862 Setting
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Frequency
invalid 1125.0 562.5 375.0 281.3 225.0 187.5 160.7

Pr. 862 Setting

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Frequency
140.6 125.0 112.5 102.3 93.8 86.5 80.4 75.0

Pr. 862 Setting

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Frequency
70.3 66.2 62.5 59.2 56.3 53.6 51.1 48.9

Pr. 862 Setting

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Frequency
46.9 45.0 43.3 41.7 40.2 38.8 37.5 36.3

Pr. 863 "notch filter depth"

Pr. 863 Setting
0 1 2 3

Depth (Gain)
deep (-40dB) (-14dB) (-8dB) sharow (-4dB)

CAUTION If you do not know the machine resonance frequency, decrease notch frequency gradually from the highest value. The point at which the smallest vibration is generated is the notch freqeuncy setting. The notch filter with deeper depth has an effect on minimizing mechanical resonance. However, large vibration may be generated adversely due to substantial phase delay. Machine characteristic can be obtained beforehand with machine analyzer by setup software. Necessary notch frequency can be determined from this.

193

PARAMETERS 4

Additional functions (Pr. 851 to Pr. 865) 4.34.5 Torque detection (Pr. 864
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

This function outputs a signal if the motor torque rises to or above the Pr. 864 setting. The signal is used as operation and open signal for an electromagnetic brake.
Parameter
864

Name
Torque detection

Factory Setting
150%

Setting Range
0 to 400%

Remarks
Extended mode

Output torque

The signal turns on when the output torque rises to or above the detection torque value set in Pr. 864. It turns off when the torque falls below the detection torque value.

Pr.864

Torque detection TU signal

ON

OFF

Related parameters
TU signal terminal assignment Set "35" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 165.)
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

4.34.6 Low speed detection (Pr. 865

Speed

Torque

Position

This function outputs a signal if the speed falls to or below the Pr. 865 setting.
Parameter
865

Name
Low speed detection

Factory Setting
45r/min

Setting Range
0 to 3600r/min

Remarks
Extended mode

<Operation>
Output speed

The signal is output during inverter operation under the following conditions.
(1) Vector control with encoder Motor speed Pr. 865 ... ON Motor speed > Pr. 865 ... OFF (2) Vector control without encoder Speed estimated value Pr. 865 ... ON Speed estimated value > Pr. 865 ... OFF (3) V/F control Output speed Pr. 865 speed equivalent ... ON Output speed > Pr. 865 speed equivalent ... OFF

Pr.865

Low speed detection LS signal ON

OFF

REMARKS
When "0" is set, low speed detection (LS signal) is output under position control only.

Related parameters
LS signal terminal assignment Set "34" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 165.)

Pr. 866

Refer to Pr. 55 (page 113)

194

Display function (Pr. 867)

4.35 Display function (Pr. 867)

4.35.1 DA1 output response level adjustment (Pr. 867
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

You can adjust the response level of the output voltage of the output signal DA1.
Parameter
867

Name
DA1 output filter

Factory Setting
0.05s

Setting Range
0 to 5s

Remarks
Extended mode

4.36 Terminal function assignment (Pr. 868)

4.36.1 No. 1 terminal function assignment (Pr. 868
The terminal 1 can be multi-functioned.
Parameter
868
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

Name
No. 1 terminal function assignment

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0, 1, 2, 5, 9999

Remarks
Extended mode

<No1. terminal function according to control>

Pr. 868 Setting 0 (factory setting)
Terminal 1 Function under Speed Control Terminal 1 Function under Torque Control Terminal 1 Function under Position Control

Bias/Gain Setting Pr. 902 "speed setting No. 2 bias" Pr. 903 "speed setting No. 2 gain" Pr. 919 "No. 1 terminal bias (torque/magnetic flux)" Pr. 920 "No. 1 terminal gain (torqe/magnetic flux)" Pr. 919 "No. 1 terminal bias (torque/magnetic flux)" Pr. 920 "No. 1 terminal gain (torqe/magnetic flux)" Pr. 917 "No. 1 terminal bias (speed)" Pr. 918 "No1. terminal gain (speed)" No function

Remarks

Speed setting auxiliary

Speed restriction auxiliary

No function

Magnetic flux command

Magnetic flux command

Magnetic flux command

Regenerative torque restriction

No function

Regenerative torque restriction

Setting can be made when Pr. 810 = 1.

No function

9999

No function

Forward/reverse rotation speed restriction (analog polarity switchover speed restriction) No function

No function

No function

No function

* The function is changed to main speed according to the Pr.73 setting with which override, polarity reversible function, etc. can be selected. (Refer to page 125.) REMARKS
Refer to page 202 for bias/gain settings.

195

PARAMETERS 4

Protective functions (Pr. 870 to Pr. 874)

<Detailed operation>
The following table indicates the functional combinations of the terminals 1, 2 and 3. Basically, the analog multiple functions are assigned to the terminal 1 alone and only one function may be selected for the multi-function analog input.
Control Method Terminal 2 Speed Command/ Speed Restriction/ PID Set Point Terminal 3 Torque Restriction/ Torque Command/ Torque Bias Terminal 1 Multi-function

Remarks

Speed control

Speed command

Speed restriction Torque control

No function

Position control

No function

Speed auxiliary setting Factory-set status No function (Reversible operation also possible) (Pr. 810 = 0, Pr. 840=9999) Magnetic flux command Speed auxiliary setting (Reversible operation also possible) Torque restriction Magnetic flux command (Pr. 810 = 1) Setting can be made Regenerative torque restriction when Pr. 810 = 1. Speed setting auxiliary Torque bias (Pr. 810=0, Pr. 840=1,2,3) Magnetic flux command Speed restriction auxiliary input Magnetic flux command Forward/reverse rotation speed Torque command restriction Setting can be made (analog polarity switchover speed when Pr. 807=2. restriction) No function No function (Pr. 810 = 0) Magnetic flux command No function Magnetic flux command Torque restriction (Pr. 810 = 1) Setting can be made Regenerative torque restriction when Pr. 810=1.

When the PID control function is selected, the terminal 2 is used for the PID set point. For PID control, refer to page 152. When the torque bias function is selected, the terminal 3 is used for the torque bias input. REMARKS
Magnetic flux command is a function used to command magnetic flux (strength of magnetic flux) from the external analog terminal (1). In addition to torque command "terminal 3", the inverter can control torque using magnetic flux as a command. For example, the characteristic of motor torque is that output torque is constant independently of the output speed when exercising line feed/tension constant control on a winder, unwinder, etc. Constant output control by variable magnetic flux, equivalent to field excitation control of the DC shunt motor, can be exercised.

4.37 Protective functions (Pr. 870 to Pr. 874)

4.37.1 Speed deviation excessive (Pr. 870, Pr. 871
If the difference (absolute value) between the speed command value and actual speed exceeds the Pr. 870 "speed deviation level" setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 871 "speed deviation time", speed deviation excessive occurs and error "E. OSD" appears, resulting in a stop.
Parameter
870 871
(r/min) Speed Pr.870
with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

)
Set speed

Actual speed Pr.871 Time ON Speed deviation excessive error activated (E. OSD)

Alarm output (across A-C)

OFF

Name
Speed deviation level Speed deviation time

Factory Setting
9999 12s

Setting Range
0 to 1500r/min, 9999 0 to 100s 9999:Invalid ---

Remarks
Extended mode

REMARKS
1. Set these parameters when a speed difference will pose a problem. 2. This function is activated only under vector control with encoder. 3. When the motor with encoder is driven, setting the Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" value that is different from the actual number of encoder pulses may make control unstable, resulting in "E. OSD" (even if Pr. 870 = 9999).

196

Protective functions (Pr. 870 to Pr. 874) 4.37.2 Speed restriction (Pr. 873
This function prevents the motor from overrunning when the setting of number of encoder pulses and the actual number differ. When the setting of number of encoder pulses is smaller than the actual number, the motor may increase its speed. To prevent this, restrict the output speed with the synchronous speed obtained by adding the set speed and Pr.873 setting. (*)
Parameter
873
with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

)
Set speed Pr.873 setting Pr.873 setting

Actual rotation speed at alarm occurrence

Set speed Actual speed during normal operation

Name
Speed restriction

Factory Setting
600r/min

Setting Range
0 to 3600r/min

Remarks
Extended mode

CAUTION * When the setting of number of the encoder pulses is smaller than the actual number, selecting automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 57) restrict the output speed with the synchronous speed obtained by adding the maximum speed (Pr. 1) and Pr. 873 setting.
with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

4.37.3 Stop by OLT level prevention (Pr. 874

Speed

Position

This function can make an alarm stop if the torque restriction is activated to stall the motor.
Parameter
874

Name
OLT level setting

Factory Setting
150%

Setting Range
0 to 200%
Torque

Remarks
Extended mode

Pr.865 Time Start signal (STF) 3s Alarm contact If torque restriction is activated and speed falls below Pr. 865 setting, OLT alarm does not occur when output torque at this time is lower than Pr. 874.

(2) V/F control If the stall prevention function is activated and the output frequency is kept reduced to 0Hz for 3s, OLT will cause an alarm stop. In this case, this function is activated regardless of Pr. 874. (3) Torque control This alarm is not activated. Related parameters
Low speed detection Pr. 865 "low speed detection" (Refer to page 194.)

197

PARAMETERS 4

(1) Speed control, position control The motor stalls if the torque restriction is activated under a high load applied during speed control or position control. At this time, if the motor speed is lower than the speed set in Pr. 865 (low speed detection) and also the output torque exceeds the level set in Pr. 874 for 3s, it is regarded as a stop effected by stall prevention and E. OLT is output, resulting in an alarm stop.

Pr.874 Output torque

Torque restriction

Time Motor speed

Operation selection functions 5 (Pr. 875)

4.38 Operation selection functions 5 (Pr. 875)

4.38.1 Fault definition (Pr. 875
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder

Speed

Torque

With the alarm definitions classified into major and minor faults, the base circuit is shut off immediately at occurrence of a major fault, or after deceleration to a stop at occurrence of a minor fault.
Parameter
875

Name
Fault definition

Factory Setting
0

Setting Range
0, 1

Remarks
Extended mode

1) Pr. 875 = 0: Normal operation At occurrence of any alarm, the base circuit is shut off immediately. At this time, the alarm output also turns on. 2) Pr. 875 = 1: Fault definition At occurrence of OHT or THM alarm, the motor is decelerated to a stop. At this time, minor fault output 2 (ER) signal turns on and the base circuit is shut off when the DC brake operation starts after deceleration. When the ER signal turns on, the electronic thermal relay function is activated and the inverter decelerates to a stop. Decrease load, etc. to allow the inverter to decelerate. At occurrence of an alarm other than OHT or THM, the base circuit is shut off immediately. CAUTION This function is invalid during position control. The value "0" is recommended for the system in which the motor continues running without deceleration due to a large torque on the load side. Pr.876 Refer to Pr.9 (page 93).

Output speed

OHT occurrence Alarm contact Minor fault output 2 (ER)

E.OHT display

4.39 Control system function 2 (Pr. 877 to Pr. 881)

4.39.1 Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control (Pr. 877 to Pr. 881
with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Position

By making parameter setting, select the speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control. The speed feed forward control enhances the trackability of the motor in response to a speed command change. The model adaptive speed control enables individual adjustment of speed trackability and motor disturbance torque response.
Parameter
877 878 879 880 881

Name
Speed feed forward control/model adaptive speed control selection Speed feed forward filter Speed feed forward torque restriction Load inertia ratio Speed feed forward gain

Factory Setting
0 0s 150% 7 0%

Setting Range
0, 1, 2 0 to 1s 0 to 400% 0, 1 to 200 times 0 to 1000%

Refer to page 51 for details.

198

Maintenance function (Pr. 890 to Pr. 892)

4.40 Maintenance function (Pr. 890 to Pr. 892)

4.40.1 Maintenance output function (Pr. 890 to Pr. 892
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

When the cumulative operation time (Pr. 891 "maintenance output timer") of the inverter has elapsed the time set in Pr. 890 "maintenance output setting time", the maintenance output (MT) signal is output and an alarm is displayed on the PU (FR-DU04-1/FR-PU04V). A repetition signal output and alarm display st specified intervals can be set using Pr. 890 "maintenance output setting time". (usable for a capacitor life alarm, etc.)
Parameter
890 891 892

Name
Maintenance output setting time Maintenance output timer Maintenance output signal clear

Factory Setting
9999 0 0

Setting Range
0 to 9998, 9999 0 to 9998 0

Remarks
9999: Function invalid Extended mode

Initial power on 99980h Pr.890 Maintenance output timer (Pr.891) Pr.890 Pr.890

MT output/display

OFF

ON

ON

0 written to Pr. 892

The maintenance output timer count displayed on the FR-DU04-1 is clamped at 9998 (99980h). Writing 0 to Pr. 892 enables the maintenance (MT) output/display to be turned off. (This is designed to turn it off only when the user intends to turn it off.) When the Pr. 891 setting is less than the Pr. 890 value, the maintenance output turns off. 1) Pr. 891 "Maintenance output timer" The cumulative operation time of the inverter is counted every 1hr and the stored time in E2PROM is output in 10hrs increment. REMARKS
The time is counted regardless of the Pr. 890 "maintenance output setting time" value. The timer can be cleared by setting "0" in Pr. 891 when Pr. 77="801". Make sure that the Pr. 77 value is reset to the original value.

2) Setting the MT signal Set "37" (maintenance output signal) in Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 or Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) to set the MT signal. (Refer to page 165)

199

PARAMETERS 4

Calibration functions (Pr. 900 to Pr. 920)

4.41 Calibration functions (Pr. 900 to Pr. 920)

4.41.1 DA1/DA2 terminal calibration (Pr. 900, Pr. 901
Pr. 900 "DA1 terminal calibration" Pr. 901 "DA2 terminal calibration"
DA1 Meter DC voltmeter 10V full scale
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

DA2

Meter DC voltmeter 10V full scale

When the item to be monitored is selected and set in Pr. 54 "DA1 terminal function selection" or Pr. 158 "DA2 terminal function selection", the inverter is factory-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale status of the corresponding monitor item as described in the section of Pr. 54 and Pr. 158. These parameters allow the output voltage ratios (gains) to be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10VDC. (Terminal DA1 can also provide a -10VDC output.) (Refer to page 110 for Pr. 54 and Pr. 158.) CAUTION DA1 and DA2 output voltage even at an alarm stop.

(1) Calibration of DA1 terminal

1) Connect a meter (speed meter) across inverter terminals DA1-5. (Note the polarity. DA1 is positive.) 2) When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the resistor. 3) Set any of "1 to 3, 5 to 12, 17, 18, 21, 32 to 34 and 36" in Pr. 54. When the speed, inverter output current etc. has been selected as the output signal, preset in Pr. 55, Pr. 56 or Pr. 866 the speed, current value or torque at which the output signal is 1800r/min. At this 1800r/min or rated current, the meter is normally deflected to full scale. 4) When outputting the item that cannot achieve a 100% value easily by operation, e.g. output current, set "21" (reference voltage output) in Pr. 158 and perform the following operation. After that, set "2" (output current, for example) in Pr. 158.

(2) Calibration of terminal DA2

1) Connect a 0-10VDC meter (speed meter) to across inverter terminals DA2-5. (Note the polarity. DA2 is positive.) 2) Set any of "1 to 3, 5 to 12, 17, 18, 21, 32 to 34, 36" in Pr. 158. When the speed, inverter output current or the like has been selected as the output signal, preset in Pr. 55, Pr. 56 or Pr. 866 the speed, current value or torque at which the output signal is 10V. 3) When outputting the item that cannot achieve a 100% value easily by operation, e.g. output current, set "21" (reference voltage output) in Pr. 158 and perform the following operation. After that, set "2" (output current, for example) in Pr. 158.

200

Calibration functions (Pr. 900 to Pr. 920)

<Operation procedure>
When operation panel (FR-DU04-1) is used
1) Select the PU operation mode.

2) Set the speed.

3) Press

SET

4) Read Pr. 900 "DA1 terminal calibration" or Pr. 901 "DA2 terminal calibration".

5) Press

FWD

to run the inverter. (Motor need not be connected during V/F control.)

6) Hold down to adjust the meter needle to a required position. (Depending on the setting, the needle may take some time to move.)

7) Press

SET

for about 1.5s.

8) Press

STOP RESET

to stop the inverter.

REMARKS
Calibration can also be made for external operation. Set the speed in the external operation mode and make calibration as in steps 4) to 8).

Related parameters
Pr. 54 "DA1 terminal function selection" (Refer to page 110.) Pr. 55 "speed monitoring reference" (Refer to page 113.) Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference" (Refer to page 113.) Pr. 158 "DA2 terminal function selection" (Refer to page 110.)

201

PARAMETERS 4

CAUTION 1. Calibration can be made even during operation. 2. Refer to the FR-PU04V instruction manual for the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04V).

Calibration functions (Pr. 900 to Pr. 920) 4.41.2 Biases and gains of speed setting terminals (speed setting terminal 2, torque command terminal 3, multi function terminal 1) (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr. 917 to Pr. 920
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

The "bias" and "gain" functions are designed to adjust the relationships between the externally input 0-10V setting input signal and output speed to set the output speed. Using Pr. 902, set the bias speed at 0V.
(1800r/min) Output speed (r/min) (150%) Torque (%)

Factory setting (1800r/min)

Bias Pr. 904 Pr. 919 Setting signal 10V Gain Pr. 905 Pr. 920

Output speed (r/min)

-10V

Gain Pr. 903 Pr. 918

Bias Pr. 902

Inclination is as set in Pr. 904 (Pr. 919) and Pr. 905 (Pr. 920).

Pr. 917

0 0 0

Setting signal

400% 10V 3600r/min

Parameter
902 903 904 905 917 918 919 920

Name
Speed setting No. 2 bias Speed setting No. 2 gain Torque command No. 3 bias *1 Torque command No. 3 gain *1 No. 1 terminal bias (speed) *2 No. 1 terminal gain (speed) *2 No. 1 terminal bias (torque/magnetic flux) *1 No. 1 terminal gain (torque/magnetic flux) *1

Factory Setting
0V 10V 0V 10V 0V 10V 0V 10V 0r/min 1800r/min 0% 150% 0r/min 1800r/min 0% 150%

Setting Range
0 to 10V 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 400% 0 to 400% 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 3600r/min 0 to 400% 0 to 400%

Remarks

Extended mode

*1 Factory settings may differ because of calibration parameters. *2 For calebration of forward/rotation speed restriction, PID control deveation, and measured value.
Forward/ Reverse Rotation Speed Restricti on

Parameter

Calibrati on Terminal

Speed Command/Speed Restriction (Pr. 807, Pr. 868, Pr. 73)

Torque

Magnetic Flux

PID Control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)

Speed Magnetic Torque Torque Torque Compen Process Magnetic (main flux restriction command bias sation Override Deviation Set point value command speed+a command (Pr. 810) (Pr. 804) (Pr. 840) input uxiliary)

902 903 904 905 917 918 919

terminal 2 (+termin al 1) terminal 3

(terminal 1)

(Pr. 868) terminal 1

920

(regenera tive torque restriction (Pr. 868))

(Pr. 868)

202

Calibration functions (Pr. 900 to Pr. 920)

<Setting>
There are three methods to adjust the speed setting voltage bias and gain. 1) Method to adjust any point by application of voltage to across terminals 2-5 2) Method to adjust any point without application of voltage to across terminals 2-5 3) Method that does not adjust the bias voltage

Pr. 903 "speed setting No. 2 gain" (You can also adjust Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 and Pr. 917 to Pr. 920 in the similar manner.)
<Adjustment procedure> Using the speed setting signal from the operation panel (FR-DU04-1) to make speed setting (1) Power on (Monitoring mode) (2) Choose the PU operation mode.
FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

Hz/r A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

1. Press MODE to make sure that the inverter is in the PU operation mode. (LED of PU is lit.) (For monitoring displays, refer to the Instruction Manual (basic).)
Operation mode (PU operation mode)
FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

REMARKS
ON of the LED is indicated by , and OFF by .

Hz/r A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

2. Set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection". Example: To change the external operation mode (Pr. 79 = 2) to the PU operation mode (Pr. 79 = 1)
As in the procedure in 1), press Parameter setting mode
FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

MODE

to choose the "parameter setting mode". Least significant digit flickering

Hz/r A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

SET

Most significant digit flickering

Middle digit flickering

SET

7 times
SET

9 times

0 to 9 Current setting
SET

0 to 9

Press for Setting change 1.5 s

SET

Setting write If appears

Flicker

Check that the forward rotation (STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal connected to the control terminal is not on. If on, turn it off. "1" (PU operation mode) has been set in Pr. 79. If Press appears, you did not press once, press
SET SET

for

1.5s when writing the value. , and make setting one more time.

(3) Read Pr. 903 to display the currently set gain speed. (You can also adjust Pr. 902, Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 in a similar manner.)
Parameter setting mode As in the procedure in (2)-1), press
MODE

to Least significant digit flickering

SET

choose the "parameter setting mode".

FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

Most significant digit flickering

SET

Middle digit flickering

Hz/r A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

9 times
SET

3 times

Currently set gain speed

FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

SET

Hz/r A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

0 to 9

0 to 9

203

PARAMETERS 4

Calibration functions (Pr. 900 to Pr. 920)

(4) Set the gain speed in Pr. 903 and display the analog voltage A/D value across terminals 2-5 in %. (To change to 1000r/min)
Currently set gain speed
FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

Gain speed changing

FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

Analog voltage A/D value (%) across terminals 2-5 Press for 1.5 s
SET

FR-DU04-1

CONTROL PANEL

Hz/r A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU

Hz/r A V FWD

Hz/r A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

Use to change the preset speed.

In any of the following methods in (5) to (7), continue the setting until the analog voltage A/D value flickers. If you end the setting here, the gain speed changing is not reflected.

(1) When not adjusting the gain voltage To (5)-1 (2) When adjusting any point by application of voltage To (5)-2 (3) When adjusting any point without application of voltage To (5)-3 (5)-1 Method to adjust only the gain speed and not to adjust the voltage
Analog voltage A/D value (%) across terminals 2-5
FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

Hz/r A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

Press or once to display the current analog voltage adjustment value.

Press for 1.5 s.

SET

Example: When the analog voltage adjustment value is 100% (10V)

Flicker

(5)-2 Method to adjust any point by application of voltage to across terminals 2-5 (e.g. from external potentiometer)(Current: across terminals 4-5) (when 5V is applied)
Analog voltage A/D value (%) across terminals 2-5
FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

Apply a 10V voltage. (Turn the external potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5 to the maximum position.) Press for 1.5 s
SET

Hz/r A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

Flicker

In the maximum position of the potentiometer, the value is nearly 100(%).

(5)-3 Method to adjust any point without application of voltage to across terminals 2-5 (To change from 4V (80%) to 5V (100%))
Analog voltage A/D value (%) across terminals 2-5
FR-DU04-1
CONTROL PANEL

Press or once to display the current analog voltage adjustment value.

/ Press to set the gain voltage (%). "0V = 0(%), 10V = 100(%)"

Hz/r A V MON EXT REV PU FWD

/
Press for 1.5 s
SET

Flicker

(6) Pressing the SET key shifts to the next parameter. (7) Re-set the Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" value according to the operation mode being used. CAUTION 1. Changing the Pr. 903 or Pr. 905 (gain adjustment) value will not change the Pr. 20 value. The input of terminal 1 (speed setting auxiliary input) is added to the speed setting signal. 2. For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04V), refer to the FR-PU04V instruction manual.

204

Additional function (Pr. 990)

CAUTION
Take care when setting any value other than "0" as the bias speed at 0V. If a speed command is not given, merely turning on the start signal will start the motor at the preset speed. Related parameters
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference speed" (Refer to page 91.) Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" (Refer to page 129.)

Analog input offset adjustment

When speed command by analog input is set, the range where the motor remains stop is created to prevent malfunction at very slow speed.
Parameter
849

Name
Analog input offset adjustment

Factory setting
100%

Setting Range
0 to 200%

Remarks
Pr. 77=801

Setting Pr. 849 provides speed command by analog input (terminal 2 or terminal 6 (FR-V5AX)) with offset and avoids speed command to be given due to noise under 0 speed command.
Speed Inclination does not change

0%

100% Pr.849 Pr.849

200%

Speed setting signal

Example) Pr.849=101% 10V1/100=0.1V

0.1V offset

4.42 Additional function (Pr. 990)

4.42.1 PU buzzer control (Pr. 990
with Encoder without Encoder with Encoder without Encoder Conditional PLC SSC

Speed

Torque

Position

You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press any key of the operation panel or parameter unit.
Parameter
990

Name
PU buzzer control

Factory Setting
1

Setting Range
0, 1

Remarks
0: Without beep, 1: With beep Extended mode

205

PARAMETERS 4

MEMO

206

5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains the "protective functions" for use of this product. Always read this instructions before using the equipment.

5.1 5.2 5.3

Errors (Alarms) ......................................................208 Correspondences between digital and actual characters ..............................................................218 Resetting the inverter ...........................................218
1

6
207

Errors (Alarms)

5.1 Errors (Alarms)

If any fault has occurred in the inverter, the corresponding protective function is activated to bring the inverter to an alarm stop and automatically give the corresponding error (alarm) indication on the PU display. If the fault does not correspond to any of the following errors or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales representative or distributor. Retenation of alarm output signal....... When the alarm output signal holding protective function is activated, opening the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the inverter's power supply side will cause the control power of the inverter to be lost and the alarm output not to be held. Alarm indication.................................. When the alarm display protective function is activated, the operation panel display section is changed automatically. Resetting method ............................... When the resetting method protective function is activated, the inverter output stop status is held, and the inverter cannot restart unless it is reset. To reset, switch power off once, then on again, or turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1s. If the RES signal is kept on, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a reset status. When any protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.

5.1.1

Major faults

When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and an alarm is output.
Operation Panel Indication Name E.OC1 FR-PU04V OC During Acc

Description

Check point

Corrective action

Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration (*1) When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated inverter current during acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. Power is supplied to only the R1 and S1 terminals. This indication also appears when the start signal is entered. This indication also appears when one of the output cables opens during vector control without encoder. Check for sudden acceleration. Check for long descending acceleration time of lift applications Check for output short circuit. Check that main circuit power (R, S, T) is supplied. Check for wiring (Check that the motor is running normally.) (vector control without encoder.) Decrease the acceleration time. Supply main circuit power (R, S, T). Perform correct wiring. (vector control without encoder.)

Operation Panel Indication Name

E.OC2

FR-PU04V

Stedy Spd OV

Description

Check point

Corrective action

Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed (*1) When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated inverter current during constant speed operation, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. This indication also appears when one of the output cables opens during vector control without encoder. Check for sudden load change. Check for output short circuit. Check for wiring (Check that the motor is running normally.) (under vector control without encoder.) Keep load stable. Perform correct wiring. (under vector control without encoder.)

*1: E. OC3 appears if the overcurrent shutoff occurs during positioning.

208

Errors (Alarms)
Operation Panel Indication Name E.OC3 FR-PU04V OC During Dec

Description

Check point

Corrective action

Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated inverter current during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. This indication also appears when one of the output cables opens during vector control without encoder. Check for sudden speed reduction. Check for output short circuit. Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake. Check for wiring (Check that the motor is running normally.) (under vector control without encoder.) Increase the deceleration time. Check the mechanical brake operation. Perform correct wiring. (under vector control without encoder.)

Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action

E.OV1

FR-PU04V

OV During Acc

Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration (*2) If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power supply system. Check for too slow acceleration.(i.e. during descending acceleration with lifting load) Decrease the acceleration time. Use the brake unit.

E.OV2

FR-PU04V

Stedy Spd OV

*2: E. OV3 appears if the over voltage shutoff occurs during positioning.

Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action

E.OV3

FR-PU04V

OV During Dec

Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during deceleration or stop If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power supply system. Check for sudden speed reduction. Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time that meets the inertia moment of the load) Decrease the braking duty. Use the brake unit.

Operation Panel Indication Name

E.THM

FR-PU04V

Motor Overload

Description

Check point Corrective action

Motor overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function) (*3) The electronic thermal relay function built in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced cooling capability during low-speed operation to stop the inverter output. When running a multi-pole motor or two or more motors during V/F control, provide a thermal relay in the inverter output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected. Protection against burnout due to motor temperature rise Check the motor for use under overload. Reduce the load weight. For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 "applied motor".

209

ERRORS AND PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5

Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed (*2) If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power supply system. Check for sudden load change. Keep load stable. Use the brake unit.

Errors (Alarms)
Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action E.THT FR-PU04V Inv. Overload

Inverter overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function) (*3) If a current not less than 150% of the rated output current flows and overcurrent shut-off does not occur (200% or less), inverse-time characteristics cause the electronic thermal relay function to be activated to stop the inverter output in order to protect the output transistors. Protection of output transistors against overheat. Check the motor for use under overload. Reduce the load weight.

*3. Resetting the inverter initializes the internal heat integrating data of the electronic thermal relay function.
Operation Panel Indication Name E.IPF FR-PU04V Inst. Pwr. Loss

Description

Check point Corrective action

Instantaneous power failure protection (*4) If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the instantaneous power failure protective function is activated to stop the inverter output in order to prevent the control circuit from malfunctioning. At this time, the alarm warning output contacts open (across terminals B-C) and close (across terminals A-C). If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms, the alarm warning output is not provided, and the inverter restarts if the start signal is on upon power restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an instantaneous power failure is within 15ms.) Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence. Remedy the instantaneous power failure. Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure. Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57). (Refer to page 114.)

*4: When an instantaneous power failure occurs, the alarm display and alarm output are not provided, but the

inverter performs protective operation to prevent a fault from occurring in itself. In some operating status (load magnitude, acceleration/deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration.
Operation Panel Indication Name E.UVT FR-PU04V Under Voltage

Description

Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description

Undervoltage protection If the power supply voltage of the inverter reduces, the control circuit will not perform normal functions. In addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if the power supply voltage reduces below about 618VDC, this function stops the inverter output. When a jumper is not connected across P-P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated. Check for start of large-capacity motor. Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P-P1. Check the power supply system equipment such as power supply. Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P-P1.

E.FIN

FR-PU04V

H/Sink O/Temp

Fin overheat If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output. Check for too high ambient temperature. Check for heatsink clogging. Check that the cooling fan is stopped. Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications. Replace the cooling fan.

E.BE

FR-PU04V

Br. Cct. Fault

Check point Corrective action

Brake transistor alarm detection This function stops the inverter output if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake transistors. In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately. Reduce the load inertia. Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper. Check that the brake resistor selected is correct. Replace the inverter.

210

Errors (Alarms)
Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name E.GF FR-PU04V Ground Fault

Output side ground fault overcurrent protection This function stops the inverter output if an ground fault overcurrent flows due to an ground fault that occurred in the inverter's output (load) side. Check for a ground fault in the motor and connection cable. Remedy the ground fault portion.

E.OHT

FR-PU04V

OH Fault

External thermal relay operation If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection, or the internally mounted temperature relay in the motor, etc. switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped. If the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset. Check for motor overheating. Reduce the load and operating duty.

E.OLT

FR-PU04V

Stll Prev STP (OL shown during stall prevention operation)

Description

Check point

Corrective action

Motor overload For V/F control, the stall prevention function is activated if the current flow in the motor exceeds 150% (factory setting) of the inverter rated current, an alarm stop is made if the status that the output frequency is lowered at 0Hz persists for 3s. For speed/position control, if the torque restriction is activated under high load, the motor stalls to the speed less than the low speed detection (Pr. 865) value, and an alarm stop is made if the status that the output torque is more than the OLT level setting (Pr. 874) value persists for 3s. This function is not activated for torque control. Check the motor for use under overload. Check that the low speed detection (Pr. 865) and OLT level setting (Pr. 874) values are correct. (Check the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22) setting if V/F control is exercised.) Check that the inverter is running at low speed under vector control without encoder without having performed start time tuning. Reduce the load weight. Change the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22), low speed detection (Pr. 865) and OLT level setting (Pr. 874) values. (Check the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22) setting if V/F control is exercised.) Perform tuning if vector control without encoder is exercised.

Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action

E.OPT

FR-PU04V

Option Fault

Option alarm Stops the inverter output when two or more communication options are mounted. (*5) Check that the number of communication options mounted is one. When the parameter set is for the option use, the option is not fitted nor connected securely. Mount only one communication option. Check the Pr. 30 setting and wiring. Check the Pr. 419 and Pr. 804 settings.

*5:The FR-A5NR (relay output/computer link) allows one more communication option to be fitted. In this case, only relay output is usable and computer link is unusable.
Operation Panel Indication Name Description E.OP1 to OP3
to

FR-PU04V

Option slot alarm 1 to 3

Check point

Corrective action

Option slot alarm (1 to 3 indicate the option slot numbers.) Stops the inverter output if a functional alarm (e.g. communication line error of the communication option or contact fault of the plug-in option other than the communication option) occurs in the plugin option fitted to the corresponding slot. Check for a wrong option function setting and operation. Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely. Check for an open communication cable. Check that the termination resistor is fitted properly. Check that the option card is normal. Check the option function setting, etc. Connect the plug-in option securely.

211

ERRORS AND PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5

Errors (Alarms)
to

Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action

E. 1 to E. 3

FR-PU04V

Fault 1 to Fault 3

Option alarm Stops the inverter output if a contact fault or the like of the connector between the inverter and communication option occurs. Check that the communication option is plugged into the connector securely. (1 to 3 indicate the option slot numbers.) Connect the plug-in option securely. Please contact your sales representative.

E.11

FR-PU04V

Fault 11

Reversing deceleration alarm If the speed command and estimated speed direction differ when the rotation direction changes from forward to reverse rotation or reverse to forward rotation during vector control without encoder, the motor runs at low speed and stops decelerating. Since the rotation direction will not change to the opposite direction causing overload, the inverter stops output Check for an excessive error between R1 of the motor and R1 of the inverter. Perform offline auto tuning or start time tuning. Please contact your sales representative.

E.PE
Parameter storage device alarm

FR-PU04V

Corrupt Memry

Appears when an error occurred in the stored parameters. (E2PROM fault) Check for too many number of parameter write times. Please contact your sales representative. When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable RAM write. Note that powering off returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.

Operation Panel Indication Name

E.PUE

FR-PU04V

PU Leave Out

Description

Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action

PU disconnection This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the operation panel or parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection". This function stops the inverter output if the number of successive communication errors is greater than the permissible number of retries when the Pr. 121 value is other than "9999" for RS-485 communication from the PU connector. This function also stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 122. Check for loose fitting of the FR-DU04-1 or FR-PU04V. Check the Pr. 75 setting. Fit the FR-DU04-1 or FR-PU04V securely.

E.RET

FR-PU04V

Retry No Over

Retry count excess If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function stops the inverter output. Find the cause of alarm occurrence. Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.

212

Errors (Alarms)
Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action E.LF FR-PU04V ELF

Output phase failure protection This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) opens. Check the wiring (Check the motor for a fault.) Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter. Wire the cables properly. Check the Pr. 251 "output phase failure protection selection" setting.

E.CPU

FR-PU04V

CPU Fault

CPU error Stops the inverter output if the communication error of the built-in CPU occurs. Please contact your sales representative.

Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action

E. 6 FR-PU04V E. 7

Fault 6 Fault 7

CPU error If the arithmetic operation of the peripheral circuit of the built-in CPU does not end within the predetermined period or if an error exists in the receive data of the built-in CPU, the inverter selfdetermines it as an alarm and stops the output. Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter. Connect devices securely. If there are any devices generating excessive electrical noise around the inverter, take measures against noise. Please contact your sales representative.

Operation Panel Indication Name

E.P24

FR-PU04V

E.P24

Description

Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name

E.P12

FR-PU04V

E.P12

12VDC power output short circuit When the 12VDC power for encoder is shorted, this function shuts off the power output. Check for wrong wiring. Check for a loose connector. Check for a break in the cable. Connect the cables securely. Change the cables.

E.CTE

FR-PU04V

Description

Check point

Operation panel power supply short circuit When the operation panel power supply (P5S of the PU connector) is shorted, this function shuts off the power output. At this time, the operation panel (parameter unit) cannot be used and RS-485 communication from the PU connector cannot be made. To reset, enter the RES signal or switch power off, then on again. When the 5VDC power for encoder is shorted, this function shuts off the power output. Check for a short circuit in the PU connector cable. Check for a loose connector. Check that cables are short-circuited. Check for wrong wiring.

213

ERRORS AND PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5

24VDC power output short circuit When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output. At this time, all external contact inputs switch off. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal. To reset it, use the operation panel or switch power off, then on again. When the 24VDC power for encoder is shorted, this function shuts off the power output. Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output. Check for wrong wiring. Check for a loose connector. Check that the cables are short-circuited. Remedy the short circuit portion. Connect the cables securely. Change the cables.

Errors (Alarms)
Operation Panel Indication Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description E.CTE FR-PU04V

Check the PU and cable. Connect the cable securely. Change the cable.

E.MB1 to 7

to

FR-PU04V

Brake sequence error The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285). If (detection frequency) - (output frequency) > Pr. 285 under vector control, E.MB1 occurs and the inverter output is stopped. Find the cause of alarm occurrence. Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly.

E.OS

FR-PU04V

Overspeed occurrence

Overspeed occurrence Indicates that the motor speed has exceeded the overspeed setting level. Check that the Pr. 374 "overspeed detection level" value is correct. Check that the number of encoder pulses differ from the actual number of encoder pulses. Set the Pr. 374 "overspeed detection level" value correctly. Set the correct number of encoder pulses in Pr. 851.

E.OSD

FR-PU04V

Excessive speed deflection

Check point

Corrective action

Speed deviation excess detection Stops the inverter output if the motor speed is increased or decreased under the influence of the load etc. during vector control with encoder and cannot be controlled in accordance with the speed command value. Check that the Pr. 870 "speed deviation level" and Pr. 871 "speed deviation time" values are correct. Check for sudden load change. Check that the number of encoder pulses differ from the actual number of encoder pulses. Set the Pr. 870 "speed deviation level" and Pr. 871 "speed deviation time" values correctly. Keep load stable. Set the correct number of encoder pulses in Pr. 851.

Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point

E.ECT

FR-PU04V

No encoder signal

Corrective action

Break in the cable detection Stops the inverter output if the encoder signal is shut off. Check for a break in the cable of the encoder signal. Check that the encoder specifications are correct. Check for a loose connector. Check that the jumper connector of the rear of the control terminal is correctly set. Remedy the break in the cable. Use the encoder that meets the specifications. Make connection securely. Set the jumper connector of the rear of the control terminal correctly. (Refer to page 9.)

Operation Panel Indication Name Description

E.OD

FR-PU04V

Excessive position error

Check point

Corrective action

Position error large Indicates that the difference between the position command and position feedback exceeded the reference. Check that the position detecting encoder mounting orientation matches the parameter. Check that the load is not large. Check that the Pr. 427 "error excess level" and Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" values are correct. Check the parameters. Reduce the load weight. Set the Pr. 427 "error excess level" and Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" values correctly.

214

Errors (Alarms)
Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point

E.ECA

FR-PU04V

No encoder A signal

Corrective action

Orientation encoder no-signal The encoder pulse for the FR-V5AM or FR-A5AP is not input. Check that the FR-V5AM or FR-A5AP is connected correctly. Check for a loose connector. Check for a break in the cable. Check for a detector fault. Make connection securely. Change the cable. Replace the detector.

Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action

E.EP

FR-PU04V

E.EP

Encoder mis-wiring detection The rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected from the encoder during offline auto tuning. Check for mis-wiring of the encoder cable. Check for wrong setting of Pr. 852 "encoder rotation direction". Perform connection and wiring securely. Change the Pr. 852 "encoder rotation direction" value.

5.1.2

Minor fault

If the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off. You can also output a minor fault signal by making parameter setting. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection). Refer to page 165.) Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action FN
Fan fault For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 "cooling fan operation selection". Check the cooling fan for a fault. Replace the fan.

FR-PU04V

Fan Failure

When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off.
Operation Panel Indication Name OL FR-PU04V OL

Description

Check point

Corrective action

Stall prevention (overcurrent) Output if the inverter output current exceeds torque restriction level. V/F control (Refer to page 100.). Speed control Output if torque restriction level is exceeded. Output if the encoder setting is wrong. Position control Check the motor for use under overload. The acceleration/deceleration time may vary during V/F control. Check that the Pr. 0 "torque boost" setting is not higher than required. Check that the Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" and Pr. 852 "encoder rotation direction" values are correct. Increase the operation level using torque restriction level (analog input or parameter input). Check for the Pr. 851 "number of encoder pulses" and Pr. 852 "encoder rotation direction" values.

*5:Torque restriction level can be set using Pr. 22 "torque restriction level" as desired. (150% with the factory setting)
Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action oL FR-PU04V oL

Stall prevention (overvoltage) If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive to exceed the brake During capability, this function stops the decrease in frequency to prevent overvoltage shutdeceleration off. As soon as the regenerative energy has reduced, deceleration resumes. Check for sudden speed reduction. The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 "deceleration time".

215

ERRORS AND PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5

5.1.3

Warnings

Errors (Alarms)
Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description PS
PU stop Appears when a stop was made by pressing of the operation panel
STOP RESET

FR-PU04V

PS

or parameter unit (FR-

PU04V) during operation in the external operation mode with the Pr. 75 "reset selection/PU stop selection" setting. Check for a stop made by pressing Refer to page 217.
STOP RESET

of the operation panel during external operation.

RB

FR-PU04V

RB

Check point

Corrective action

Regenerative brake prealarm Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 "special regenerative brake duty" value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs. Check that the brake resistor duty is not high. Check that the Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection" and Pr. 70 "special regenerative brake duty" values are correct. Increase the deceleration time. Check the Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection" and Pr. 70 "special regenerative brake duty" values.

Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication

TH

FR-PU04V

TH

Electronic thermal relay function prealarm Appears if the integrating value of the electronic thermal relay function reaches or exceeds 85% of the preset level. If it reaches 100% of the preset level, a motor overload shutoff (E. THM) occurs. Check for large load or sudden acceleration. Reduce the load weight or the number of operation times.

MT

FR-PU04V

MT

Maintenance signal output Indicates that the cumulative operation time of the inverter has reached a given time. Check that Pr. 890 "maintenance output setting time" has been set. (A short time has been set.) After checking the energization time, write "0" to Pr. 892 "maintenance output signal clear".

SL

FR-PU04V

SL

Speed limit indication (speed restriction) Output if the speed restriction level is exceeded during torque control. Check that the torque command is not larger than required. Check that the speed restriction level is not low. Decrease the torque restriction. Increase the speed restriction level.

Err.
This alarm appears if: The RES signal is on; You attempted to make parameter setting in the external operation mode; You attempted to change the operation mode during operation; You attempted to set any parameter value outside its setting range; The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication; You attempted to make parameter setting during operation (when signal STF or STR is on); or You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection" has been set to disable parameter write. Perform run and operation securely.

Description

Corrective action

216

Errors (Alarms) 5.1.4 How to recover from PU stop error (PS)

STOP RESET

(1) Restarting method when stop was made by pressing (Method of restarting from
1) 2)

from operation panel

indication)

After the motor has decelerated to a stop, turn off the STF or STR signal. Press
MODE

twice* to display

CAUTION When Pr. 79 = 3, press

MODE

three times to display

. Then press

to proceed to 3).

(*For monitor screen) ... Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) for details of the monitor display provided by pressing 3) 4)
MODE

Press SET . Turn on the STF or STR signal.

REMARKS
When you provide a reset input (RES) during operation, the inverter that is being reset shuts off the output and resets the internal heat integrating value of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries, and the motor coasts. The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. This value does not return to the initial value if parameter (all) clear is executed. When the motor is stopped from the PU, and are displayed alternately. An alarm output is not provided.

(2) Restarting method when stop was made by pressing

STOP RESET

from PU

1)

After the motor has decelerated to a stop, turn off the STF or STR signal. Press
EXT

Speed Time
EXT STOP RESET

2)

. )

.....(Recovery from 3)

Turn on the STF or STR signal.

STF ON (STR) OFF

Example of stop and restart during external operation

Alternatively, you can make a restart by making a power-on reset or resetting the inverter using the reset terminal of the inverter. REMARKS
When you provide a reset input (RES) during operation, the inverter that is being reset shuts off the output and resets the data of the electronic thermal relay function, and the motor coasts. To make a restart, confirm that the PU is connected and then reset the inverter. The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. This value does not return to the initial value if parameter (all) clear is executed. When the motor is stopped from the PU, PS is displayed. An alarm output is not provided. Since PS is not an inverter error, the inverter can not be reset with
STOP RESET

CAUTION
Do not reset the inverter with the start signal input. Doing so will start the inverter immediately after it has recovered from the error, causing hazard.

217

ERRORS AND PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5

Operation panel

Correspondences between digital and actual characters

5.2 Correspondences between digital and actual characters

There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel.
Actual
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Digital

Actual

Digital

Actual
M N O o P S T U V r

Digital

A B C D E F G H I J L

5.3 Resetting the inverter

The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the electronic thermal relay function's internal heat integrating value and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter. It takes about 1s for reset.
STOP Operation 1: Using the operation panel, press to reset the inverter. RESET (Enabled only when the inverter protective function (major fault) is activated. (Refer to page 208 for major faults.)) Operation 2: Switch power off once, then switch it on again. Operation 3: Turn on the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s.

218

6
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter explains the "specifications" for use of this product. Always read this instructions before use.

6.1 6.2 6.3

Model specifications .............................................220 Common specifications........................................221 Outline dimension drawings ................................222

6
219

Model specifications

6.1 Model specifications

575V class
Type FR-V560-[][]K-NA Applied motor capacity (kW (HP)) Rated capacity (kVA) (Caution 1) Rated current (A) Overload current rating (Caution 2) Voltage (Caution 3) Regenerative Max. value braking torque Permissible duty (Caution 7) 2.2
2.2 (3) 4 4

3.7
3.7 (5) 6.1 6.1

7.5
7.5 (10) 12 12

15
15 (20) 22 22

22
22 (30) 33 33

37
37 (50) 55 55

55
55 (75) 84 84

Output

150% 60s, 200% 0.5s (inverse-time characteristics) Three-phase, 575V 60Hz 100% 5s 2%ED 20% Continuous Three-phase, 575V 60Hz 490 to 632V 60Hz 5% 5.5 9 17 28 41 66 100

Inverter

Power supply

Rated input AC voltage, frequency Permissible AC voltage fluctuation Permissible frequency fluctuation Power supply capacity (kVA) (Caution 5) Protective structure (JEM 1030) Cooling system Approx. weight (kg (Ibs))

Enclosed type (IP20 NEMA1) (Caution 6) Forced air cooling 6.0 (13.2) 6.0 (13.2) 6.0 (13.2) 14.0 (30.9) 14.0 (30.9) 35.0 (77.0) 35.0 (77.0)

CAUTION 1. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 575V. 2. The overload current rating indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the rated output current of the inverter. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. 3. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the PWM pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply. 4. The short-time rating is 5s. 5. The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables). 6. Open type (IP00) when the plug-in option is fitted after removal of the option wiring port cover. 7. For the 2.2K to 15K capacities, using the high-duty brake resistor will achieve the performance of 100% torque/10%ED. 8. If the motor is one rank lower in capacity than the inverter, it can be used by setting Pr. 80 "motor capacity" and Pr. 81 "number of motor poles". Other manufacturers motors and special motors can be used by performing online auto tuning.

220

Common specifications

6.2 Common specifications

Control specifications Soft-PWM control or high carrier frequency sine-wave PWM control can be selected. vector control with encoder, vector control without encoder, or V/F control can be selected. Control mode Speed control, torque control, position control Speed setting Analog input 0.03% of the maximum set speed resolution Digital input 0.003% to the maximum setting (minimum setting 0.1r/min) Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600 s (0.1 s increments) Acceleration/deceleration Linear, S pattern (3 types) or backlash compensation acceleration/deceleration can be selected. pattern Control system Torque restriction level Torque restriction value can be set (0 to 400% variable)
Terminal Setting Range Speed Control No. 2 0 to 10V (resolution 0.03%) Main speed setting

Torque Control

Analog setting signal

0 to 10V (resolution 0.05%) 0 to 10V (resolution 0.05%)

Speed restriction Speed restriction compensation/ Auxiliary speed setting/magnetic flux magnetic flux command/forward/ command/regenerative torque reverse rotation speed restriction restriction (analog polarity switchover speed restriction) Torque restriction/Torque bias Torque command

Input signals

3 Option (FR-V5AX)

Contact signal

Option (FR-V5AX)

Contact signal Open collector signal Option (FR-V5AY) Option (FR-V5AM) Output signals

Option (FR-A5AY))

Analog output Option (FR-A5AY) Encoder pulse output option (FR-V5AY)

Operational functions

Display

Parameter unit (FR-DU04-1/FR-PU04V) Alarm definition

Protective functions

CAUTION 1. Jog operation may also be performed from the operation panel (FR-DU04-1) or the parameter unit (FRPU04V). 2. Not provided for the FR-V560-22K to 55K that do not have a built-in brake circuit. 3. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc. 4. Not provided for the operation panel (FR-DU04-1).

221

SPECIFICATIONS 6

Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Storage temperature (Caution 3) Atmosphere Altitude, vibration

Speed restriction (at this time, terminal 0 to 10V Main speed setting (at this time, 6 2 is invalid)/Torque command (at this (resolution 0.003%) terminal 2 is invalid)/torque restriction time, terminal 3 is invalid) 3 fixed function terminals Forward rotation command, alarm reset, external thermal relay Selection can be made from reverse rotation command, multi-speed setting 5 function terminals (max. 15 speeds), remote setting, jog operation (Caution 1), second function selection, third function selection, output stop, start signal self-holding, preexcitation, control mode switchover, torque restriction selection, start time tuning, S pattern switchover, PID control terminal, orientation command, 6 multi-function terminals break opening completion signal, PU operation/external operation switchover, torque bias selection 1, torque bias selection 2, P control selection, servo on, and PU/external interlock. 1 changeover contact Selection can be made from inverter running, inverter running 2, up to speed, (230VAC 0.3A, 30VDC 0.3A) instantaneous power failure (undervoltage), speed detection, second speed detection, third speed detection, PU operation mode, overload alarm, 3 multi-function terminals regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, 3 multi-function terminals output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper 1 multi-function terminal limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, operation ready, operation ready 2, brake opening request, fan fault output, heatsink overheat prealarm, orientation in-position, forward rotation output, reverse rotation output, low speed output, torque detection, regenerative status output, minor fault output, 7 multi-function terminals minor fault output 2,alarm output, maintenance timer output, start time tuning completion, remote output, output speed detection, second (third) output speed detection, in-position and trace status. 0 to 10V 12 bits 1CH Selection can be made from speed, output current, output voltage, preset 0 to 10V 12 bits 1CH speed, output frequency, motor torque, converter output voltage, regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak value, load meter, motor exciting current, 0 to 10V 10 bits 1CH motor output, reference voltage output, torque command, torque current 0 to 20mA 10 bits 1CH command and torque monitoring. A phase, B phase, Z phase (A and B phases can be divided) Open collector/differential line driver. Maximum/minimum speed setting, speed jump, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, override function, automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure, forward/reverse rotation prevention, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, online auto tuning function, easy gain tuning, computer link operation, remote setting, brake sequence, second function, third function, multi-speed operation, coasting to stop, power failure stop, PID control, speed feed forward, model adaptive speed control, master/slave, torque bias, 12-bit digital command (FR-A5AX option), 16-bit digital command (FR-A5AH option), pulse train input (FR-A5AP option), motor thermistor interface (FR-V5AX option) Selection can be made from speed, output current, output voltage, preset speed, output frequency, motor torque, converter output voltage, regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak value, input terminal status (Caution 4), output terminal status (Caution 4), load meter, motor exciting current, position pulse, cumulative operation time, actual operation time, motor load factor, torque command, torque current command, feedback pulse, motor output, trace status. Alarm definition is displayed when protective function is activated. 8 past alarm definitions are stored. (Only 4 alarm definitions are displayed on the operation panel.) Overcurrent shut-off (during acceleration, deceleration, constant speed), regenerative overvoltage shut-off (acceleration, deceleration, constant speed), undervoltage, instantaneous power failure, overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function), brake transistor alarm (Caution 2), ground fault current, power output short circuit (12/24VDC/operation panel), stall prevention, external thermal relay, heatsink overheat, fan fault, option alarm, parameter error, PU disconnection, encoder no-signal, speed deviation large, overspeed, position error large, CPU error, encoder phase error, output phase failure, retry count excess, brake sequence error -10C to +50C (14F to 122F) (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing) -20 to +65C (-4F to 149F) Indoor use. (No corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt) Maximum 1,000m (3280.80feet) above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less (compliant with JIS C 0040)

Inverter

Environment

Outline dimension drawings

6.3 Outline dimension drawings

6.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings

FR-V560-2.2K, 3.7K, 7.5K-NA

7.5 (0.30) 220 (8.66) 170 (6.69)

2- 6 hole 260 (10.24) 245 (9.65)

7.5 (0.30)

6 (0.24) 195 (7.68)

193 (7.60)

10.5 (0.41)

211 (8.31)

(Unit: mm (inches))

FR-V560-15K, 22K-NA
250 (9.84) 10 (0.39) 190 (7.48)

2- 10 hole 380 (14.96) 10 (0.39) 400 (15.75)

230 (9.06)

10 (0.39)

218 (8.58)

10.5 (0.41)

242 (9.53)

(Unit: mm (inches))

222

Outline dimension drawings

FR-V560-37K, 55K-NA with the attachment for conduit connection
15 (0.59)
6- 12 hole

525 (20.67)

807.5 (31.79)

550 (21.65)

380 (14.96) 450 (17.72) 91 113 113 (4.45) (4.45)

(1.57)

257.5 (10.14)

5.5 (0.22) 236 (9.29) 250 (9.84)

120 (4.72)

40

297.5 (11.71)

227.5 (8.96)

(Unit: mm (inches))

FR-V560-37K, 55K-NA without the attachment for conduit connection

15 (0.59) 2- 12 hole 525 (20.67) 12 (0.47) 10 (0.39) 550 (21.65)

380 (14.96) 450 (17.72)

250 (9.84)

3.2 (0.13)

430 (16.93)

(Unit: mm (inches))

223

SPECIFICATIONS 6

Outline dimension drawings 6.3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU04-1) outline dimension drawings
<Panel cut dimension drawing>
16.5 (0.65)

<Outline drawing>

72 (2.83)

15 10.5 (0.59) (0.41)

24 (0.94)

20 (0.78)

16.5 (0.65)

23.75 (0.94)

2-4 hole 46.5 (1.83)

17 (0.67)

81.5 (3.21)

46.5 (1.83)

2-M3 screw Effective depth 4.5 54 (2.13)

3.25 (0.13) 54 (2.13)

Select the mounting screw whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the mounting screw hole. (Unit: mm (inches))

6.3.3

Parameter unit (FR-PU04V) outline dimension drawings

<Panel cut dimension drawing>
18.5 (0.73) 20 (0.79) 15 (0.59) 10.5 (0.41) 21.5 (0.85) 24 (0.97)
48 (1.89)

<Outline drawing>

19.75 (0.78)

16.5 (0.65) 23.75 (0.93) 11.75 (0.46) 17 (0.67)

1.5 (0.06)

72 (2.83)

13 (0.51)

(0.51)

13

14.5 (0.57)

125 (4.92)

5-M3 screw Effective depth 4.5

81.5 (3.21)

80 (3.14)

1.25 (0.05)

40

40 (1.57)

Select the mounting screw whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the mounting screw hole. (Unit: mm (inches))

224

1.5 (0.06)

3.5 (0.14)

5-4 hole

APPENDIX
This chapter provides the "appendix" for use of this product. Always read this instructions before use.

AppendixParameter Data Code Lists ...........................226

225

Parameter Data Code Lists

Appendix
Function

Parameter Data Code Lists

Parameter No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 41 42 43 44 45 50 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 65 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 75 77 78 79 Name Torque boost (manual) Maximum speed (simple mode) Minimum speed (simple mode) Base frequency Multi-speed setting (high speed) (simple mode) Multi-speed setting (middle speed) (simple mode) Multi-speed setting (low speed) (simple mode) Acceleration time (simple mode) Deceleration time (simple mode) Electronic thermal O/L relay (simple mode) DC injection brake operation speed DC injection brake operation time DC injection brake voltage Starting speed Jog speed setting Jog acceleration/deceleration time MRS input selection Base frequency voltage Acceleration/deceleration reference speed Acceleration/deceleration time increments Torque restriction level Multi-speed setting (speed 4) Multi-speed setting (speed 5) Multi-speed setting (speed 6) Multi-speed setting (speed 7) Multi-speed input compensation Acceleration/deceleration pattern Regenerative function selection Speed jump 1A Speed jump 1B Speed jump 2A Speed jump 2B Speed jump 3A Speed jump 3B Speed display Up-to-speed sensitivity Speed detection Speed detection for reverse rotation Second acceleration/deceleration time Second deceleration time Second speed detection DU/PU main display data selection PU level display data selection DA1 terminal function selection Speed monitoring reference Current monitoring reference Restart coasting time Restart cushion time Remote setting function selection Intelligent mode selection Retry selection Number of retries at alarm occurrence Retry waiting time Retry count display erasure Special regenerative brake duty Applied motor (simple mode) PWM frequency selection (simple mode) Speed setting signal Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection Parameter write disable selection (simple mode) Reverse rotation prevention selection Operation mode selection (simple mode) Data Codes Read Write 00 80 01 81 02 82 03 83 04 84 05 85 06 86 07 87 08 88 09 89 0A 8A 0B 8B 0C 8C 0D 8D 0F 8F 10 90 11 91 13 93 14 94 15 95 16 96 18 98 19 99 1A 9A 1B 9B 1C 9C 1D 9D 1E 9E 1F 9F 20 A0 21 A1 22 A2 23 A3 24 A4 25 A5 29 A9 2A AA 2B AB 2C AC 2D AD 32 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 41 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4B 4D 4E 4F B2 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC C1 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CB CD (Caution) CE CF (Caution) Link Parameter Expansion Setting (Instruction code 7F/FF) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Basic functions

Standard operation functions

Operation selection functions

Output terminal functions Second functions Terminal assignment functions

Display functions

Automatic restart Additional function

Operation selection functions

226

Parameter Data Code Lists

Function Parameter No. 80 81 82 83 84 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 110 111 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 140 141 142 143 144 145 150 151 152 153 156 157 158 160 162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Initial monitor 163 164 165 171 180 181 182 183 187 190 191 192 195 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 244 Name Motor capacity (simple mode) Number of motor poles (simple mode) Motor excitation current (no load current) Rated motor voltage(simple mode) Rated motor frequency (simple mode) Motor constant R1 Motor constant R2 Motor constant L1 Motor constant L2 Motor constant X Online auto tuning selection (simple mode) Auto tuning setting/status (simple mode) Third acceleration/deceleration time Third deceleration time Third speed detection Communication station number Communication speed Stop bit length/data length Parity check presence/absence Number of communication retries Communication check time interval Waiting time setting CR, LF presence/absence selection PID action selection PID proportional band PID integral time Upper limit Lower limit PID action set point for PU operation PID differential time Backlash acceleration stopping speed Backlash acceleration stopping time Backlash deceleration stopping speed Backlash deceleration stopping time Speed setting switchover PU display language selection Output current detection level Output current detection period Zero current detection level Zero current detection period Stall prevention operation selection OL signal output timer DA2 terminal function selection Extended function selection (simple mode) Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection First cushion time for restart First cushion voltage for restart Restart current restriction level Actual operation hour meter clear DI1 terminal function selection DI2 terminal function selection DI3 terminal function selection DI4 terminal function selection STR terminal function selection DO1 terminal function selection DO2 terminal function selection DO3 terminal function selection A, B, C terminal function selection Multi-speed setting (speed 8) Multi-speed setting (speed 9) Multi-speed setting (speed 10) Multi-speed setting (speed 11) Multi-speed setting (speed 12) Multi-speed setting (speed 13) Multi-speed setting (speed 14) Multi-speed setting (speed 15) Soft-PWM setting Cooling fan operation selection Data Codes Read Write 50 D0 51 D1 52 D2 53 D3 54 D4 5A DA 5B DB 5C DC 5D DD 5E DE 5F DF 60 E0 0A 8A 0B 8B 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 32 33 34 35 38 39 3A 00 02 03 04 05 0B 14 15 16 17 1B 1E 1F 20 23 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 34 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 9C 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD B2 B3 B4 B5 B8 B9 BA 80 82 83 84 85 8B 94 95 96 97 9B 9E 9F A0 A3 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B4 Link Parameter Expansion Setting (Instruction code 7F/FF) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Motor constants

Third functions Terminal assignment functions

Communication functions

PID control

Backlash

Display functions

Current detection

Sub functions Display functions

Terminal assignment functions

Multi-speed operation

Sub functions

227

Parameter Data Code Lists

Function Stop selection function Operation selection function Additional functions Parameter No. 250 251 252 253 261 262 263 264 265 266 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 345 346 347 348 Stop selection Output phase failure protection selection Override bias Override gain Power failure stop selection Subtracted speed at deceleration start Subtraction starting speed Power-failure deceleration time 1 Power-failure deceleration time 2 Power-failure deceleration time switchover speed Brake opening speed Brake opening current Brake opening current detection time Brake operation time at start Brake operation speed Brake operation time at stop Deceleration detection function selection Overspeed detection speed Droop gain Droop filter constant Droop function activation selection BCD input bias BCD input gain Binary input bias Binary input gain Digital input and analog compensation input enable/ disable selection Read timing operation selection Analog output signal selection Setting for zero analog output Setting for maximum analog output Analog output signal voltage/current switchover Analog meter voltage output selection Setting for zero analog meter voltage output Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output Y0 output selection Y1 output selection Y2 output selection Y3 output selection Y4 output selection Y5 output selection Y6 output selection RA1 output selection RA2 output selection RA3 output selection Digital input unit selection RA0 output selection Station number Communication speed Stop bit length Parity check presence/absence Number of communication retries Communication check time interval Waiting time setting Operation control command source Speed command source Link startup mode selection CR/LF presence/absence selection E2PROM write selection DeviceNet address (lower) DeviceNet baud rate (lower) DeviceNet address (higher) DeviceNet baud rate (higher) Name Data Codes Read Write 3A 3B 3C 3D 45 46 47 48 49 4A 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2D 2E 2F 30 BA BB BC BD C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF E0 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AD AE AF B0 Link Parameter Expansion Setting (Instruction code 7F/FF) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Power failure stop functions

Brake sequence

Droop

Digital input

Analog output

Digital output

Relay output Digital input Relay output

Communication

228

Parameter Data Code Lists

Function Parameter No. 350 351 356 357 359 360 361 362 369 374 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 410 411 412 413 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 Name Stop position command selection Orientation switchover speed Internal stop position command In-position zone Orientation encoder rotation direction External position command selection Position shift Orientation position loop gain Number of orientation encoder pulses Overspeed detection level Acceleration S pattern 1 Deceleration S pattern 1 Acceleration S pattern 2 Deceleration S pattern 2 Input pulse division scaling factor Speed for zero input pulse Speed for maximum input pulse Orientation selection Number of machine side gear teeth Number of motor side gear teeth Orientation speed gain (P term) Orientation speed integral time Orientation speed gain (D term) Orientation deceleration ratio DI11 terminal function selection DI12 terminal function selection DI13 terminal function selection DI14 terminal function selection DI15 terminal function selection DI16 terminal function selection High resolution analog input selection Motor temperature detection filter DO11 terminal function selection DO12 terminal function selection DO13 terminal function selection Encoder pulse output division ratio Position command right selection Command pulse scaling factor numerator Command pulse scaling factor denominator Position loop gain Position feed forward gain Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant Position feed forward command filter In-position width Excessive level error Command pulse selection Clear signal selection Pulse monitor selection Pulse train torque command bias Pulse train torque command gain IP address 1 IP address 2 IP address 3 IP address 4 Sub-net mask 1 Sub-net mask 2 Sub-net mask 3 Sub-net mask 4 Gateway address 1 Gateway address 2 Gateway address 3 Gateway address 4 Password Digital torque command bias Digital torque command gain Data Codes Read Write 32 B2 33 B3 38 B8 39 B9 3B BB 3C BC 3D BD 3E BE 45 C5 4A 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 0A 0B 0C 0D 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 CA D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 DD DE DF E0 E1 E2 E3 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 8A 8V 8C 8D 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 Link Parameter Expansion Setting (Instruction code 7F/FF) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Orientation

Control system function

S-pattern C

Pulse train input

Orientation

Extension inputs

Extension outputs

Position control

Torque command

Position control

Torque command

229

Parameter Data Code Lists

Function Parameter No. 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 499 Communication 500 501 502 800 801 802 803 Operation selection functions 804 805 806 807 808 809 Name Second applied motor Second motor control method selection Second electronic thermal O/L relay Second motor capacity Number of second motor poles Second exciting current Rated second motor voltage Rated second motor frequency Second motor constant (R1) Second motor constant (R2) Second motor constant (L1) Second motor constant (L2) Second motor constant (X) Second auto tuning setting/status Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time First position feed amount lower 4 digits First position feed amount upper 4 digits Second position feed amount lower 4 digits Second position feed amount upper 4 digits Third position feed amount lower 4 digits Third position feed amount upper 4 digits Fourth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fourth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fifth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fifth position feed amount upper 4 digits Sixth position feed amount lower 4 digits Sixth position feed amount upper 4 digits Seventh position feed amount lower 4 digits Seventh position feed amount upper 4 digits Eighth position feed amount lower 4 digits Eighth position feed amount upper 4 digits Ninth position feed amount lower 4 digits Ninth position feed amount upper 4 digits Tenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Tenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Eleventh position feed amount lower 4 digits Eleventh position feed amount upper 4 digits Twelfth position feed amount lower 4 digits Twelfth position feed amount upper 4 digits Thirteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Thirteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fourteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fourteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fifteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fifteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Remote output selection Remote output data 1 Remote output data 2 Action selection at SSCNET communication inter ruption Communication error recognition waiting time Communication error occurence count display Communication error-time stop mode selection Control system selection (simple mode) Torque characteristic selection Pre-excitation selection Constant output region torque characteristic selection Torque command right selection Torque command value (RAM) Torque command value (RAM, E2PROM) Speed restriction selection Forward rotation speed restriction Reverse rotation speed restriction Data Codes Read Write 32 B2 33 B3 34 B4 35 B5 36 B6 37 B7 38 B8 39 B9 3A BA 3B BB 3C BC 3D BD 3E BE 3F BF 40 C0 41 C1 42 C2 43 C3 44 C4 45 C5 46 C6 47 C7 48 C8 49 C9 4A CA 4B CB 4C CC 4D CD 4E CE 4F CF 50 D0 51 D1 52 D2 53 D3 54 D4 55 D5 56 D6 57 D7 58 D8 59 D9 5A DA 5B DB 5C DC 5D DD 5E DE 5F DF 60 E0 61 E1 63 00 01 02 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 E3 80 81 82 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 Link Parameter Expansion Setting (Instruction code 7F/FF) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

Motor constants

Position control

Remote output

230

Parameter Data Code Lists

Function Parameter No. 810 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 854 859 860 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 870 871 873 874 875 876 877 Control system functions 878 879 880 881 890 891 892 Name Torque restriction input method selection Torque restriction level (regeneration) Torque restriction level (3 quadrant) Torque restriction level (4 quadrant) Torque restriction level 2 Acceleration torque restriction level Deceleration torque restriction level Easy gain tuning response level setting (simple mode) Easy gain tuning selection (simple mode) Speed control P gain 1 Speed control integral time 1 Speed setting filter 1 Speed detection filter 1 Torque control P gain 1 Torque control integral time 1 Torque setting filter 1 Torque detection filter 1 Model speed control gain Speed control P gain 2 Speed control integral time 2 Speed setting filter 2 Speed detection filter 2 Torque control P gain 2 Torque control integral time 2 Torque setting filter 2 Torque detection filter 2 Torque bias selection Torque bias 1 Torque bias 2 Torque bias 3 Torque bias filter Torque bias operation time Torque bias balance compensation Fall-time torque bias No. 3 bias Fall-time torque bias No. 3 gain Analog input offset adjustment Brake operation selection for vector control without encoder Number of encoder pulses Encoder rotation direction Excitation ratio Torque current Second torque current Notch filter frequency Notch filter depth Torque detection Low speed detection Torque monitoring reference DA1 output filter No. 1 terminal function assignment Speed deviation level Speed deviation time Speed restriction OLT level setting Fault definition Thermal relay protector input Speed feed forward/model adaptive speed control selection Speed feed forward filter Speed feed forward torque restriction Load inertia ratio Speed feed forward gain Maintenance output setting time Maintenance output timer Maintenance output signal clear Data Codes Read Write 0A 8A 0C 8C 0D 8D 0E 8E 0F 8F 10 90 11 91 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 36 3B 3C 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 46 47 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 5A 5B 5C 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B6 BB BC BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C6 C7 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF D0 D1 DA DB DC Link Parameter Expansion Setting (Instruction code 7F/FF) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

Control system functions

Torque biases

Operation selection function

Additional functions

Display functions Terminal assignment function

Protective functions

Operation selection functions

Maintenance functions

231

Parameter Data Code Lists

Function Parameter No. 900 901 902 903 904 905 917 918 919 920 925 926 927 928 929 990 991 Name DA1 terminal calibration DA2 terminal calibration Speed setting No. 2 bias Speed setting No. 2 gain Torque command No. 3 bias Torque command No. 3 gain No. 1 terminal bias (speed) No. 1 terminal gain (speed) No. 1 terminal bias (torque/magnetic flux) No. 1 terminal gain (torque/magnetic flux) Motor temperature detection calibration No. 6 terminal bias (speed) No. 6 terminal gain (speed) No. 6 terminal bias (torque) No. 6 terminal gain (torque) PU buzzer control PU contrast adjustment Data Codes Read Write 5C DC 5D DD 5E DE 5F DF 60 E0 61 E1 11 91 12 92 13 93 13 94 19 99 1A 9A 1B 9B 1C 9C 1D 9D 5A DA 5B DB Link Parameter Expansion Setting (Instruction code 7F/FF) 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

Calibration functions

Additional functions

CAUTION Note that read and write of the Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 values are enabled for computer link operation that uses the PU connector, but write is disabled for computer link operation that uses the option (FR-A5NR).

232

MEMO

REVISIONS *The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date
Jun., 2003

*Manual Number
IB(NA)-0600135E-A First edition

Revision